JP2022052726A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine having characteristic operating force means.SOLUTION: A game machine includes operation means capable of changing a performance mode by the operation of a player, and first symbol display means capable of displaying variation display of a first symbol. When the operation means is operated in a first state, it may be accepted as a change operation of the performance mode. When the operation means is operated in a second state, it is not accepted as the change operation of the performance mode. In the first state, at least the variation display of the first symbol is displayed. In the second state different from the first state, at least the variation display of the first symbol is displayed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11

Description

The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a spinning machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

Conventionally, as one of the game consoles such as slot machines and pachinko machines, there is a game console provided with a plurality of types of operating means (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-296354

However, there is room for improvement in the operation means of the conventional game table.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game table having a characteristic operating means.

The game console according to the present invention is a game console provided with an operation means capable of changing the effect mode by the operation of the player and a first symbol display means capable of displaying a variable display of the first symbol. When the operating means is operated in the first state, it may be accepted as a change operation of the effect mode, and when the operation means is operated in the second state, the change operation of the effect mode may be accepted. The first state is a state in which at least the variation display of the first symbol is displayed, and the second state is a state in which at least the variation display of the first symbol is displayed. The first state is different from the second state.

According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game table having a characteristic operating means.

It is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). (A) It is a figure which showed the item given in the point specialization state production, and the point corresponding to each item. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the 1st grant effect in the point specialization state effect in time series. (C) It is a figure which showed the example of the second grant effect (refill effect) in the point specialization state effect in chronological order. (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the 1st grant effect in the point specialization state effect in chronological order. (B) It is a figure which showed the example of the 2nd grant effect (refill effect) in the point specialization state effect in chronological order. (C) It is a figure which showed an example of the third grant effect (replacement effect of a refill effect) in a point specialization state effect in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the process such as payout before and after the power cutoff / recovery of a slot machine in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the process such as payout and error notification before and after the power cutoff / recovery of a slot machine in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the process of payout, etc. before and after the electric power cutoff / recovery of the slot machine which concerns on the modified example 1, the modified example 2, the modified example A, and the modified example B in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the process of payout, etc. before and after the power cutoff and power recovery of the slot machine which concerns on the modification C to F in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the process of payout, etc. before and after the power-out / recovery of the slot machine which concerns on the modification G-J in chronological order. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). It is a figure which showed an example of various displays by a decorative pattern display device 208 provided in a pachinko machine 100. (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the change reception of the effect mode while the special figure 1 is changing and the change reception of the effect mode while the special figure 1 is stopped in chronological order. (B) Special Figure 1 SP Reach during variable display Special Figure 1 is a diagram showing an example of acceptance of a change in the effect mode during fluctuation in chronological order. (A) Remaining special figure 1 after power failure / power recovery Acceptance of change of production mode during variable game, and remaining special figure 1 after power failure / power recovery The next special figure 1 variable game during variable game It is a figure which showed an example of the change reception of a production mode in chronological order. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the change reception of the effect mode while the special figure 2 is changing and the change reception of the effect mode while the special figure 2 is stopped in chronological order. It is a figure which showed an example of the change reception of the production mode during the big hit game before the power cut / recovery and the change reception of the production mode during the remaining big hit game after the power cut / power recovery in chronological order. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a front view in the state which the front door of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention is opened. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. (A) It is a figure which expands and shows the arrangement of the symbols applied to each reel of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention in a plane. (B) It is a figure which shows the winning line of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. (A) It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination in the three-card betting game. (B) It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination in the two-card betting game. (A) It is a transition diagram of the game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. (B) It is a transition diagram of the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. (A) It is a figure which shows the lottery table used for the internal lottery processing of a winning combination. (B) It is a figure explaining the correct operation order of the push order combination of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure which associates the display data with the lighting mode of the payout number display 127. (A) The image of the effect table provided in the first sub-control unit 400 is illustrated. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the judge state production table. (C) It is a figure which showed an example of the LMT state production table. (D) is a figure which showed the modification of the LMT state effect table. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interrupt processing. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (A) It is a figure which showed the change of the mode of the image display and the sound in time series when the player selects the BGM sound by using the operation means during an AT game. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of an image display. (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the demo display. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the game information display. (A) It is a figure which showed the example which shifts from the normal background display to the demo display. (B) It is a figure which showed the example which shifts to the demo display again after shifting from the demo display to the game information display. (A) It is a figure which showed the example which shifts to the demo display again after shifting from the demo display to the normal background display. (B) It is a figure which showed the example which shifts from the demo display to the game information display, further shifts to the normal background display, and then shifts to the demo display again. (A) It is a figure which showed the example which shifts from the demo display to the game information display, further shifts to the setting confirmation display, and then shifts to the demo display again. (B) It is a figure which showed the example which shifts to the demo display again with the settlement operation as an opportunity. (A) It is a figure which showed the example which the emission color of a lamp does not interlock when the mode of the light emission effect by a lamp and the sound effect by a speaker which are executed in parallel change. (B) It is a figure which showed the example which the emission color of a lamp is interlocked with the background effect when the mode of the light emission effect by a lamp and the background effect by a liquid crystal display device which are executed in parallel change. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows an example of a winning line. It is a circuit block diagram of a control unit. It is a figure which unfolds and shows the arrangement of the design applied to each reel in a plane. It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the payout of each winning combination. It is a figure which shows the lottery table of the internal winning combination for each RT. It is a transition diagram of the game state (RT) of the slot machine 100. It is a figure which shows the transition of the state of the game about the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section of the slot machine 100. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interrupt processing. (A) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400, and (c) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process. It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (A) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500, and (c) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process. It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500, and (d) is the flowchart of the image control processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. It is a perspective view which shows the button main body 610 which constitutes the push button 600. It is sectional drawing which shows the push button 600. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship between a button body 610 and a detection sensor 710. It is a figure which shows the modification of the push button 600. It is a figure which shows an example of the arrangement of a button body 610 and a detection sensor 710. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure which the thickness direction of a substrate 700 is orthogonal to the pressing direction of a button body 610. It is a figure which shows an example of the display in an effect image display apparatus 157. It is a figure which shows the operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the 2nd stop operation and the 3rd stop operation. It is a figure which shows the operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the 3rd stop operation and the bet operation. It is a figure which shows the operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between a bet operation and a start operation. It is a figure which shows the operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the 2nd stop operation and the 3rd stop operation. It is a figure which shows the operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the 3rd stop operation and the bet operation. It is a figure which shows the operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between a bet operation and a start operation. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows an example of a line. It is a front view which shows the slot machine 100 in the state which the front door is opened. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of a reel unit 700. (A) is a perspective view showing the structure of the backlight module 740, and (b) is a front view of the backlight module 740. It is a figure which shows the 1st selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the selection example of the setting value using the 1st selection switch 190 and the 2nd selection switch 194. The circuit block diagram of the control unit is shown. It is a figure which shows the connection example of each board and each unit. It is a figure which shows the state which the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 in the electric power cut state is opened, and the left reel 110 is manually rotated. (A) is a perspective view of the hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 60 as viewed from diagonally above, and (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated. It is a figure which shows the example which provided the relay board between the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 66, and the hopper unit 180 and the reel unit 700 also shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the demo animation displayed on the production image display device 157 in the demonstration production. (A) is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157, which is displayed when the second chance button 166 is pressed while the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed, and (b) is a diagram. It is a figure which shows the display screen which is displayed when the 1st chance button 165 is pressed in the state shown in 74 (h). It is a figure which shows the state of the effect image display apparatus 157 and various lamps step by step when it is selected to set a power saving mode in a state where a non-demo animation is displayed. It is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. 72. The state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when the selection is made to open the front door 102 and set the power saving mode while holding the open / close piece while the demo animation is displayed is stepwise. It is a figure which shows. It is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. 74. When the front door 102 is opened and the power saving mode is selected without pressing the open / close piece while the demo animation is displayed, the state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps is stepwise. It is a figure which shows. It is a figure which shows the state of the effect image display apparatus 157 and various lamps step by step when it is selected to set a power saving mode with a hopper empty error still occurring. It is a figure which shows two examples of the operation effect. It is a table summarizing the outline of the characteristic operation effect in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 58. It is a figure which shows the relationship of color in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 58. It is a figure which concretely shows some example of the 1st operation effect 1 explained with respect to FIG. 79 (a). It is a figure which concretely shows some examples of the 1st operation effect 2 explained using FIG. 79 (b). It is a figure which concretely shows some examples of the 2nd operation effect 1 explained with respect to FIG. 79 (c). It is a figure which shows concretely some examples of the 2nd operation effect 2 explained with reference to FIG. 79 (d). It is a figure which shows the other example of the operation effect. It is a figure which shows the example of the case where the operation means other than the 1st chance button 165 is operated in the operation effect. It is a rear view which looked at the pachinko machine to which this invention can apply from the back side.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

In the game console (slot machine in this example) of the present embodiment, a predetermined number of game media are loaded, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols are subjected to a predetermined rotation start instruction operation (for example, described later). The rotation is started by accepting the operation by the start lever), and based on the acceptance of the rotation start instruction operation (for example, the operation by the stop button described later), the winning or not of the internal winning of multiple types of roles is determined by lottery. Judgment is made, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops the rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation, and the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the symbol combination when the plurality of reels are stopped is determined. It is a game table that advances a series of games in which a game medium is paid out and the game is terminated if the predetermined payout conditions are met, and a game is ended without the game medium being paid out if the game medium is not met.

Next, the slot machine of this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 1 to 5. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 1 to 5 are used only for the description of the present embodiment, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals are shown in the description of the present embodiment. Priority is given to the reference numerals 1 to 5 shown in FIG. Moreover, each embodiment of this embodiment and each embodiment of other embodiments can be applied in combination with each other.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of the game console of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. .. Inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in which multiple types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a drive device such as a stepping motor.

In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped member at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 110 to 112, and the light emitting unit of this optical sensor is provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light receiving portion and the light receiving portion. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line. The winning line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 114.

For example, the notification lamp 123 informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in the winning combination internal lottery described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. It is a lamp to inform you. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment is lit until the bonus game is completed after the bonus notification of notifying the confirmation of the bonus. The notification lamp 123 may be turned on before the bonus notification (at the time of the bonus or immediately before the bonus notification). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be re-gamed (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, a maximum of three bets are inserted, two are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The bet button 132 also functions as an effect button capable of starting a certain effect when an operation is accepted. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a production button.

The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 130 to 132, or the actual medals can be inserted (inserted operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the insertion means that both are included. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display. The payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device for notifying information regarding the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are provided corresponding to the reels 110 to 112. .. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be pressed. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it.

Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the operation may be referred to as a first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation may be referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation may be referred to as a third stop reel.

Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110 to 112 are stopped is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. The operation order in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 as a stop operation is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 is called "forward push operation order". It is called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can grasp that the high navigation state is in the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190.

The medal return button 133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 134 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100. The medal payout outlet 155 is a payout outlet for paying out medals from a medal payout device (a device for paying out medals collected in a bucket) (not shown).

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 160. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) is in front of the slot machine 100 (game). It has a structure that appears on the person's side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device for notifying information regarding a stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

It should be noted that the device may be configured to be capable of displaying various production images and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen may be used. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

The notification lamp 123 and the high navigation state lamp 190 are designed to notify predetermined information by causing the lamps to emit light, but the notification mode is not limited to the light emission of the lamp. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a part of the area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a slot machine having a full liquid crystal display, an area near reels 110 to 112 may be used). Hereinafter, when it is described as lighting of the notification lamp 123 or the high navigation state lamp 190, it is intended to include notification by another effect device (for example, a display device) having the same function.

<Refill production / Overview>
Next, the outline of the "refilling effect" that can be executed by the game console according to the present embodiment will be described.

The game console (slot machine in this example) according to the present embodiment is granted by the first grant effect in the first grant effect for granting the privilege and the next game of the game in which the first grant effect is executed. It is possible to execute a second grant effect (refill effect) that grants the same type of privilege as the given privilege. Further, in the first grant effect and the second grant effect, it is possible to display the privilege display regarding the privilege given to the player.

Here, the "privilege" according to the present invention is a profit that is advantageous to the player, for example, points, items, bonuses, AT, addition of AT games, mini games, payout of game media (medals), etc. Operation navigation, internal winning of winning roles, winning, special production, etc. are applicable. Further, the "privilege display" according to the present invention is a display relating to the privilege given to the player, for example, a display including points, a display including items, and an operation navigation suggesting an operation mode of the operation means. A display including the number of operation instructions indicating the number of executions, a display notifying the AT addition game, a display notifying the grant of a bonus, and the like are applicable.

The "display including points" includes, for example, a display including a number or character string such as "+10" indicating the number of points given, or a number or character string such as "0010/1000" indicating the cumulative number of points. Applicable to the display including. In addition, the "display including items" includes, for example, a display including an image showing the given item (for example, an image imitating the appearance of fruits such as bananas, apples, and grapes), and the given item in characters. The indicated display (for example, a display including character strings such as "banana", "apple", and "grape") is applicable. Further, as the "operation navigation suggesting the operation mode of the operation means", for example, symbols and character strings such as "←", "right middle left", and "321" suggesting the reverse pressing of the stop buttons 137 to 139. The display including is applicable, and as the "display including the number of operation instructions indicating the number of times the operation navigation is executed", for example, a character string or a symbol such as "15 times" or "●● (* represents 2 times)" is used. Including indication is applicable.

<Refill production / Example 1>
Next, the first embodiment of the “refilling effect” in which the game console according to the present embodiment can be executed will be described with reference to FIG.

In this example, in the point specialization state production, the first grant effect and the second grant effect (refill effect) are executed, and the same type of privilege is executed in the first grant effect and the second grant effect (refill effect). (In this example, the banana of the first value) is given.

Here, the point-specialized state effect is a progress effect that may progress for each game, and in this example, it is continuously executed over a plurality of games (at least 10 games), and all of them are executed. It is a production in which items are always given in the game. The "progress effect" according to the present invention is not limited to this example, and may not be a continuous game (may be a discontinuous game), and an item may not be given in any of the games. There may be.

FIG. 2A is a diagram showing items given in the point specialization state effect and points corresponding to each item.

The item in this example is composed of a group consisting of multiple types of points (values). Further, in this example, there are a plurality of types of groups, and one type of group, "banana", is a group (item) to which any one of 10, 20, or 30 points (value) is given. An "apple", which is a group of one other type, is a group (item) to which any one of 30, 40, or 50 points (value) is given, and is a group of another one type. The "grape" is a group (item) to which any one of 100, 200, or 300 points (value) is given.

The points (second value) that can be given by the item "grape" in this example are either 100, 200, or 300, and all of them are the points that can be given by the item "apple" (first value). It is a point of value greater than 30, 40, or 50 (value). Needless to say, the type and number of items (groups) and the types and number of points given by each item (group) are not limited to this example.

FIG. 2B is a diagram showing an example of the first granting effect in the point-specialized state effect in chronological order.

The states shown in FIGS. 2 (b) and 2 (1) are states in which the point specialization state effect is started in the N (N is a positive integer) game and before the pressing operation (lever on) of the start lever 135 is accepted. ..

In this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to indicate that the point specialization state effect is being executed (in this example, the display including the character string "point specialization in progress") and the point specialization state. A display suggesting the number of remaining games in the production (display including the character string "remaining 10G" in this example) and a point number display indicating the number of points acquired by the player (character string "0000/1000" in this example). Display including) is being executed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 2 (b) and 2 (2) are states after accepting the pressing operation of the start lever 135 in the N game.

In this example, since the N game is started by the pressing operation (lever on) of the start lever 135 and one game is exhausted, the display suggesting the number of remaining games of the point specialization state production is displayed from "remaining 10G". It has been updated to "remaining 9G".

In addition, since the item (privilege) "banana" was given in the N game, the privilege display SP1 suggesting the item (privilege) given to the player (in this example, the display of an image imitating the appearance of the banana). Is running.

The method of selecting one item from a plurality of types of items is not particularly limited. For example, one item may be selected by lottery, or one item may be selected based on an internal winning combination, a winning combination, a gaming state, or the like. You may select an item.

The following states shown in FIGS. 2 (b) and 2 (3) are states after the third stop operation is accepted in the N game.

In this example, since the N game ends with the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, the privilege display suggesting the points (privileges) corresponding to the item (privilege) "banana" given to the player. SP2 (in this example, a display including a character string of "+10" suggesting that 10 points have been given) is being executed. Further, since 10 points have been given, the point number display indicating the number of points acquired by the player is updated from "0000/1000" to "0010/1000".

Further, in this example, when the number of points acquired by the player reaches 1000, it is easy to shift to AT in the production (judgment production) of judging whether or not to shift to AT (winning the AT lottery). (To make it easier).

The method of selecting one point from a plurality of types of points included in the item is not particularly limited. For example, one point may be selected by lottery, or may be used for an internal winning combination, a winning combination, a gaming state, or the like. You may select one point based on it.

FIG. 2C is a diagram showing an example of the second grant effect (refill effect) in the point specialization state effect in chronological order.

The state shown in FIGS. 2 (c) and 2 (1) is a state in which the point specialization state effect is continued in the N + 1 game and before the pressing operation (lever on) of the start lever 135 is accepted.

In this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to indicate that the point specialization state effect is being executed (in this example, the display including the character string "point specialization in progress") and the point specialization state. A display suggesting the number of remaining games in the production (display including the character string "remaining 9G" in this example) and a point number display indicating the number of points acquired by the player (character string "0010/1000" in this example). Display including) is being executed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 2 (c) and 2 (2) are states after accepting the pressing operation of the start lever 135 in the N + 1 game.

In this example, the N + 1 game is started when the start lever 135 is pressed (lever on), and one game is exhausted. However, in the game in which the second grant effect (refill effect) is executed, the progress effect is not advanced. Therefore, the display suggesting the number of remaining games in the point-specialized state effect is not updated and remains as "remaining 9G".

According to this example, in the game in which the second grant effect is executed, the progress effect is not advanced, and the chance of the privilege being granted in the progress effect can be increased. Therefore, is the second grant effect executed? It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not it is possible, and it is possible to maintain the player's willingness to play.

In addition, the N + 1 game executes a second grant effect (refill effect) that grants the same type of privilege (in this example, the item "banana") as the privilege granted in the first grant effect (N game). Since it is a game, an effect suggestion display RD (in this example, a display including the character string "refill!"), Which suggests that it is a second grant effect (refill effect), is performed and is given to the player. Item (privilege) The privilege display SP1 (in this example, the display of an image imitating the appearance of a banana) suggesting a "banana" is being executed.

The effect suggestion display RD is not limited to this example, and may be a display such as "KEEP" or "LOCK" that suggests that the progress effect is not progressed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 2 (c) and 2 (3) are states after the third stop operation is accepted in the N + 1 game.

In this example, since the N + 1 game is terminated by the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 while continuing the effect suggestion display RD, the points (privileges) corresponding to the items (privileges) given to the player are given. ) Is being executed (in this example, a display including a character string of "+10" indicating that 10 points have been given). Further, since 10 points have been given, the point number display indicating the number of points acquired by the player is updated from "0010/1000" to "0020/1000".

According to this example, in the game following the game in which the first grant effect is executed, the second grant effect that grants the same type of privilege as the privilege granted in the first grant effect can be executed. , Even in the game immediately after the first grant effect is executed, the player's expectation for the privilege can be increased, and the player's motivation to play is maintained from the first grant effect to the second grant effect. be able to.

In addition, since the privilege of the same value as the privilege given in the first grant effect is given in the second grant effect, it is guaranteed that the privilege of the same value will be given in the second grant effect, and the game It is possible to give a sense of security to the person and prevent the player's willingness to play from diminishing.

FIG. 2 (c3') shows a case where the same item "banana" as the first grant effect is given in the second grant effect, but different points (30 points) from the first grant effect are given. It is a figure which showed the example of.

In this example, the privilege display SP3 (in this example, the character of "+30" indicating that 30 points have been granted, suggesting the points (privileges) corresponding to the item (privilege) "banana" given to the player. (Display including columns) was executed, and 30 points were given. Therefore, the point number display indicating the number of points acquired by the player is updated from "0010/1000" to "0040/1000".

According to this example, the privilege is composed of a group consisting of a plurality of types of values, and the same group is selected again in the second grant effect. Therefore, when the value of the privilege granted in the first grant effect is low. Even so, in the second grant effect, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that a privilege having a higher value than the first grant effect may be granted.

<Refill production / Example 2>
Next, the second embodiment of the “refilling effect” in which the game console according to the present embodiment can be executed will be described with reference to FIG.

In this example, in the point specialization state production, the first grant effect and the second grant effect (refill effect) are executed, and the same type of privilege is executed in the first grant effect and the second grant effect (refill effect). (In this example, the second value item "grape", which is higher in value than the first value item "banana") is given.

FIG. 3A is a diagram showing an example of the first grant effect in the point specialization state effect in chronological order.

The states shown in FIGS. 3A and 3A are states in which the point specialization state effect has been started in the N + 2 game and before the pressing operation (lever on) of the start lever 135 is accepted.

In this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to indicate that the point specialization state effect is being executed (in this example, the display including the character string "point specialization in progress") and the point specialization state. A display suggesting the number of remaining games in the production (display including the character string "remaining 9G" in this example) and a point number display indicating the number of points acquired by the player (character string "0020/1000" in this example). Display including) is being executed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 3 (a) and 3 (2) are states after the start lever 135 is pressed in the N + 2 game.

In this example, since the N + 2 game is started by the pressing operation (lever on) of the start lever 135 and one game is exhausted, the display suggesting the number of remaining games of the point specialization state production is displayed from "remaining 9G". It has been updated to "remaining 8G".

In addition, since the item (privilege) "grape" was given in the N game, the privilege display SP4 (in this example, an image imitating the appearance of the grape) suggesting the item (privilege) "grape" given to the player. Display) is being executed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 3A and 3A are states after the third stop operation is accepted in the N + 2 game.

In this example, since the N + 2 game ends with the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, the privilege display suggesting the points (privileges) corresponding to the item (privilege) "grape" given to the player. SP5 (in this example, a display including a character string of "+100" suggesting that 100 points have been given) is being executed. Further, since 100 points have been given, the point number display indicating the number of points acquired by the player is updated from "0020/1000" to "0120/1000".

FIG. 3B is a diagram showing an example of the second granting effect (refilling effect) in the point-specialized state effect in chronological order.

The state shown in FIGS. 3 (b) and 3 (1) is a state in which the point specialization state effect is continued in the N + 3 game and before the pressing operation (lever on) of the start lever 135 is accepted.

In this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to indicate that the point specialization state effect is being executed (in this example, the display including the character string "point specialization in progress") and the point specialization state. A display suggesting the number of remaining games in the production (display including the character string "remaining 8G" in this example) and a point number display indicating the number of points acquired by the player (character string "0120/1000" in this example). Display including) is being executed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 3 (b) and 3 (2) are states after accepting the pressing operation of the start lever 135 in the N + 3 game.

In this example, the N + 3 game is started by the pressing operation (lever on) of the start lever 135, and one game is exhausted, but in the game in which the second grant effect (refill effect) is executed, the progress effect is not advanced. Therefore, the display suggesting the number of remaining games in the point specialization state production is not updated and is left as "remaining 8G".

According to this example, in the game in which the second grant effect is executed, the progress effect is not advanced, and the chance of the privilege being granted in the progress effect can be increased. Therefore, is the second grant effect executed? It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not it is possible, and it is possible to maintain the player's willingness to play.

In addition, the N + 3 game is a game that executes a second grant effect (refill effect) that grants the same type of privilege (item "grape" in this example) as the privilege granted in the first grant effect (N game). Therefore, the effect suggestion display RD (in this example, the display including the character string "refill!") Suggesting that it is the second grant effect (refill effect) is performed, and the effect is given to the player. The privilege display SP4 (in this example, the display of an image imitating the appearance of the grape) suggesting the item (privilege) "grape" is being executed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 3 (b) and 3 (3) are states after the third stop operation is accepted in the N + 3 game.

In this example, since the N + 3 game is terminated by the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 while continuing the effect suggestion display RD, it corresponds to the item (privilege) "grape" given to the player. The privilege display SP5 (in this example, the display including the character string of "+100" indicating that 100 points have been given) is executed, which suggests points (privileges). In addition, since 100 points have been awarded, the point number display indicating the number of points acquired by the player has been updated from "0120/1000" to "0220/1000".

According to this example, in the game following the game in which the first grant effect is executed, the second grant effect that grants the same type of privilege as the second privilege granted in the first grant effect is executed. Therefore, in the game immediately after the first grant effect is executed, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the second privilege, which is a value larger than the first value, and the first grant effect to the first. It is possible to maintain the player's willingness to play the game over the second granting effect.

In addition, since the privilege of the same value as the privilege given in the first grant effect is given in the second grant effect, it is guaranteed that the privilege of the same value will be given in the second grant effect, and the game It is possible to give a sense of security to the person and prevent the player's willingness to play from diminishing.

FIG. 3C is a diagram showing an example of the third grant effect (replacement effect of the refill effect) in the point specialization state effect in chronological order.

The state shown in FIGS. 3 (c) and 3 (1) is a state in which the point specialization state effect is continued in the N + 4 game and before the pressing operation (lever on) of the start lever 135 is accepted.

In this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to indicate that the point specialization state effect is being executed (in this example, the display including the character string "point specialization in progress") and the point specialization state. A display suggesting the number of remaining games in the production (display including the character string "remaining 8G" in this example) and a point number display indicating the number of points acquired by the player (character string "0220/1000" in this example). Display including) is being executed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 3 (c) and 3 (2) are states after accepting the pressing operation of the start lever 135 in the N + 4 game.

In this example, the N + 4 game is started by the pressing operation (lever on) of the start lever 135, and one game is exhausted. Since it is not advanced, the display suggesting the number of remaining games in the point specialization state production is not updated and is left as "8G remaining".

According to this example, in the game in which the third grant effect is executed, the progress effect is not progressed, and the chance of the privilege being granted in the progress effect can be increased. Therefore, is the third grant effect executed? It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not it is possible, and it is possible to maintain the player's willingness to play.

In this example, an example is shown in which the progress effect is not progressed in the third grant effect, but for example, the progress effect is not progressed in the second grant effect (refill effect), while the third grant effect (refill) is not progressed. In the alternative production of the production), the progress production may be configured to proceed.

In addition, the N + 4 game has a third grant effect (refill effect) that grants the same type of benefit (item "grape" in this example) as the benefit granted in the first grant effect (N game). Since it is a game to be executed, an effect suggestion display RD (in this example, a display including the character string "refill!") Is performed to suggest that it is a third grant effect (refill effect). The privilege display SP4 (in this example, the display of an image imitating the appearance of the grape) suggesting the item (privilege) given to the player is executed.

The display mode of the effect suggestion display suggesting the third grant effect and the effect suggestion effect display suggesting the second grant effect may be different. For example, the third grant effect (replacement effect of the refill effect) may be different. ) As an effect suggestion display RD suggesting that it is, a display including the character string "Refill! Refill!" May be executed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 3 (c) and 3 (3) are states after the third stop operation is accepted in the N + 4 game.

In this example, since the N + 4 game is terminated by the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 while continuing the effect suggestion display RD, it corresponds to the item (privilege) "grape" given to the player. The privilege display SP6 (in this example, the display including the character string of "+300" indicating that 300 points have been given) is executed, which suggests points (privileges). In addition, since 300 points have been awarded, the point number display indicating the number of points acquired by the player has been updated from "0220/1000" to "0520/1000".

According to this example, in the game following the game in which the second grant effect is executed, the third grant effect that grants the same type of privilege as the privilege granted in the second grant effect can be executed. , Even in the game immediately after executing the second grant effect, the player's expectation for the privilege can be increased, and the player's motivation to play is maintained from the second grant effect to the third grant effect. be able to.

In addition, the privilege is composed of a group consisting of a plurality of types of values, and the same group is selected again in the third grant effect. Therefore, even if the value of the privilege granted in the first grant effect is low. , In the third grant effect, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that a privilege having a higher value than the first grant effect may be granted.

<Refill production / Summary>
As described above, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a game console provided with a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and the display means is plurality. The first grant effect (for example, FIGS. 2 (b) (1) to FIG. 2 (1)) for granting any of the types of benefits (for example, 10 points of the item “banana” shown in FIG. 2 (a)). (B) It is a means capable of executing the first grant effect shown in (3), and the display means is shown in FIG. The privilege display SP1 shown and the privilege display SP2) shown in FIGS. 2 (b) and 2 (3) are displayable means, and the display means is the first game in the game following the game in which the first grant effect is executed. A second grant effect (for example, FIGS. 2 (c) (1) to (c)) that grants the same type of privilege as the privilege granted in the first grant effect (for example, 10 points of the item "banana"). It is a game table characterized in that it is a means by which the second granting effect shown in (3) can be executed.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, in the game following the game in which the first grant effect is executed, the second grant effect that grants the same type of privilege as the privilege granted in the first grant effect. Therefore, even in the game immediately after the first grant effect is executed, the player's expectation for the privilege can be increased, and the player's expectation from the first grant effect to the second grant effect can be increased. You can maintain your motivation to play games.

Further, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a game console provided with a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and the display means has a plurality of types of benefits. The first grant effect (for example, FIGS. 3 (a) (1) to (a) (a) (for example, 100 points of the item "grape" shown in FIG. It is a means capable of executing the first grant effect shown in 3), and the display means is a privilege display related to the privilege given to the player (for example, the privilege display SP4 shown in FIGS. 3A and 3). , The privilege display SP5) shown in FIGS. 3 (a) and 3 (3), and the privilege is the first type of privilege (for example, the item shown in FIG. 2 (a)) which is the first value. Includes 10 points for "banana") and a second type of perk that is a second value greater than the first value (eg, 100 points for the item "grape" shown in FIG. 2 (a)). In the game following the game in which the first grant effect is executed, the display means grants the same type of privilege as the privilege granted in the first grant effect (for example, 100 points of the item "grape"). The second grant effect (for example, the second grant effect shown in FIGS. 3 (b) (1) to (b) (3)) is a means capable of executing the second grant effect. be.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, in the game following the game in which the first grant effect is executed, the second privilege of the same type as the second privilege granted in the first grant effect is granted. Since it is possible to execute the grant effect, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the second privilege, which is a value larger than the first value, in the game immediately after executing the first grant effect. It is possible to maintain the player's willingness to play from the granting effect of the above to the second granting effect.

In addition, the display means has the same type of privilege as the privilege given in the second grant effect (for example, 300 points of the item "grape") in the game following the game in which the second grant effect is executed. 3rd granting effect (for example, the third granting effect shown in FIGS. 3 (c) (1) to FIG. 3 (c) (3)) may be a means that can be executed.

With such a configuration, in the game following the game in which the second grant effect is executed, it is possible to execute the third grant effect that grants the same type of privilege as the privilege granted in the second grant effect. Therefore, even in the game immediately after the second grant effect is executed, the player's expectation for the privilege can be increased, and the player's willingness to play from the second grant effect to the third grant effect can be increased. Can be sustained.

Further, the first grant effect may be an effect that always grants the privilege.

With such a configuration, the player will not be discouraged even if the second grant effect is executed after the first grant effect.

Further, the display means is a means capable of executing a progress effect (for example, the point specialization state effect shown in FIGS. 2 and 3) that may progress for each game, and the second grant effect is executed. In the game, the progress effect may not be progressed.

With such a configuration, the progress effect is not advanced in the game in which the second grant effect is executed, and the chance of the privilege being granted in the progress effect can be increased. Therefore, the second grant effect is executed. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the game is to be played, and it is possible to maintain the player's willingness to play the game.

Further, the display means is a means capable of executing the second grant effect in the next game when the power is cut off and restored before the next game of the game in which the first grant effect is executed is started. May be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give a surprise to the player who started the game when the game store is opened or the like.

In addition, the privilege is composed of a group (for example, the item "banana", "apple", or "grape") composed of a plurality of types of values (for example, three types of points), and the above-mentioned "first". The "same type as the privilege given in the grant effect" may be one type of group reselected from the plurality of types of the above groups.

With such a configuration, even if the value of the privilege given in the first grant effect is low, the privilege having a higher value than the first grant effect is given in the second grant effect. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it may be.

Further, the second granting effect may be an effect of granting the privilege having the same value (for example, points) as the privilege given in the first granting effect.

With such a configuration, it is guaranteed that the privilege of the same value will be given in the second granting effect, so that the player can be relieved and the player's willingness to play will be reduced. Can be prevented.

Further, the privilege may include points, and the privilege display may be a display including the points (for example, the privilege display SP2 shown in FIGS. 2B and 3).

With such a configuration, even in the game immediately after the first grant effect is executed, the player's expectation for re-granting points can be increased, and the first grant effect can be changed to the second grant effect. It is possible to maintain the player's willingness to play throughout.

Further, the privilege may include an item, and the privilege display may be a display including the item (for example, the privilege display SP1 shown in FIGS. 2B and 2).

With such a configuration, even in the game immediately after the first grant effect is executed, the player's expectation for re-granting the item can be increased, and the first grant effect is changed to the second grant effect. It is possible to maintain the player's willingness to play throughout.

Further, the operation means (for example, the stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, the privilege includes an operation navigation suggesting an operation mode of the operation means, and the privilege display indicates the number of times the operation navigation is executed. The display may include the number of operation instructions shown.

With such a configuration, even in the game immediately after the first grant effect is executed, the player's expectation for the operation navigation can be increased, and the first grant effect to the second grant effect can be increased. It is possible to maintain the player's willingness to play.

The configuration of the game console according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the above embodiment. Therefore, for example, the "privilege" according to the present invention is not limited to items and points, for example, bonus, AT, addition of AT game, mini game, payout of game medium (medal), operation navigation, inside of winning combination. It may be a prize, a prize, a special production, or the like.

In addition, the "privilege display" according to the present invention may be any display relating to the privilege, for example, a display for notifying the grant of the privilege or a false notice for granting the privilege (a notice that the privilege is not actually granted). Or, it may be a display (tutorial display) that explains the contents of the privilege.

Further, the "progressive effect" according to the present invention is not limited to the point-specialized state effect, and may be, for example, a game section effect in which the number of AT-added games can be acquired, or a special winning combination can be won. It may be the production of various game sections.

Further, the "value" according to the present invention is not limited to points, and may be, for example, the ease of transition to an advantageous state, the number of payouts of game media, the winning percentage of mini games, and the like.

<Payout / Overview after power failure / recovery>
Next, the outline of "payout after power failure / recovery" that can be executed by the game console according to the present embodiment will be described.

The game console (slot machine in this example) according to the present embodiment includes a payout means capable of executing the payout of the game medium and a sound output means capable of outputting the payout sound during the payout period of the game medium. Further, the payout means can execute the rest of the payout when the power is cut off and restored during the payout of the game medium, and the sound output means is executing the rest of the payout by the payout means. It is configured not to output the payout sound. Further, the sound output means can output the background sound, and is configured not to output the background sound during the rest of the payout by the payout means.

Here, the "payout means" according to the present invention is a means capable of paying out a game medium (for example, a medal), for example, a medal payout from the medal payout outlet 155 shown in FIG. Applicable to devices, etc. Further, the "sound output means" is a means capable of outputting sounds such as payout sounds and background sounds, and corresponds to, for example, a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a musical instrument, or the like.

The “payout sound” corresponds to, for example, a sound effect such as “chareen” output in accordance with the payout of the game medium, or a voice such as “paying out medals”. Further, the "background sound" corresponds to, for example, a BGM output together with an effect using a lamp or the like, a sound effect for enlivening the game, or the like.

Further, the game console according to the present embodiment is provided with a display means capable of displaying a return display after the power is turned on, and the display period of the return display by the display means is a silent period in which no sound is output by the sound output means. , The payout means performs the rest of the payout during the silent period.

Here, the "display means" according to the present invention is a means capable of displaying a return display after the power is turned on, and corresponds to, for example, a liquid crystal display device 157 or the like. Further, the "return display" according to the present invention is a display suggesting that it is a period (during return) from the time when the power of the slot machine is restored until the normal game can be started, for example, "return". A display including a character string such as "medium" or "please wait for a while", or a display in which all display areas are set to a certain color (for example, black or white) is applicable.

Further, the game console according to the present embodiment includes a payout display means capable of displaying a payout number indicating the number of payouts of the game medium, and the payout display means is said to be said during the remaining execution of the payout by the payout means. Executes the display of the number of payouts.

Here, the "payout display means" according to the present invention is a means capable of displaying the number of payouts indicating the number of payouts of the game medium, and corresponds to, for example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. .. The payout display means is not limited to the 7-segment (SEG) display, and may be another display means such as a liquid crystal display device.

Further, the game console according to the present embodiment includes storage display means capable of displaying the number of stored sheets indicating the number of stored game media, and the storage display means is said to be said during the remaining execution of the payout by the payout means. Display the number of stored sheets.

Here, the "storage display means" according to the present invention is a means capable of displaying the number of stored sheets indicating the number of stored game media, and corresponds to, for example, the stored number display device 125 shown in FIG. .. The storage display means is not limited to the 7-segment (SEG) display, and may be another display means such as a liquid crystal display device.

<Payout after power failure / recovery / Example 1>
Next, the first embodiment of the “payout after power failure / recovery” that can be executed by the game console according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the processing such as payout before and after the power failure / recovery of the slot machine in chronological order.

Here, the "display device" in the figure is a display means (in this example, a liquid crystal display device 157), the "speaker" is a sound output means, and the lamp is an optical output means (which can output light). In this example, it is the side lamp (decorative lamp) 144) shown in FIG. Further, the payout number display is a payout display means (in this example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 1), and the payout device is a payout means (in this example, a payout device (not shown)).

Before the power failure shown in FIG. 4B, the slot machine 100 is normally energized.

In this example, before the settlement button 134 is pressed, the background display is displayed on the display device, the background sound is output from the speaker, and the light is output from the lamp in the normal light emitting mode. Further, since 50 medals are stored, the number 50 is displayed on the payout number display, and since the medals are not being paid out, the state of the payout device is not being paid out.

The state shown in FIG. 4A is a state in which the operation of pressing the settlement button 134 is accepted during the game and the payout of the bet medals is started. In this state, a winning combination may be won in a certain game, a third stop operation may be accepted, and a medal corresponding to the winning combination may be started to be paid out.

In this example, when the operation of pressing the settlement button 134 is accepted, the state of the payout device is changed from non-payout to payout, the payout device starts paying out medals, and the payout device pays out medals. During the period, the payout sound (for example, the sound effect of "charin") is output from the speaker.

Further, in the payout number display, each time one medal is paid out by the payout device, a number is subtracted by 1 and displayed as in the order of 50 → 49 → 48 → 47 → ....

Even during the medal payout period, the background display by the display device, the output of the background sound by the speaker, and the output of the light in the normal light emitting mode by the lamp are all configured to continue.

The following state shown in FIG. 4B is a state in which a power failure has occurred (a state in which the energization of the slot machine 100 is cut off).

In the same state, since the supply of power to various devices is stopped, the background display by the display device, the background sound output by the speaker, the light output in the normal light emission mode by the lamp, the payout number display by the payout number display, and the payout The payout of medals by the device will not be executed.

The state shown in FIG. 4 (c) that follows is a state in which the power is restored (a state in which the energization of the slot machine 100 is resumed).

In this example, the return display is started on the display device when the power is restored, and the display period of the return display is a silent period in which no sound is output from the speaker.

Further, during this silent period, the payout device executes the rest of the payout (in this example, the remaining 46 medals are paid out), and the payout number display shows each time one medal is paid out by the payout device. In addition, by subtracting the numbers by 1 and displaying them in the order of 46 → 45 → ... 3 → 2 → 1, the payout number display is executed during the remaining execution of the payout by the payout device. After all the medals have been paid out, the state of the payout device is changed from payout to non-payout, the payout by the payout device is stopped, and the number 0 is displayed on the payout number display.

According to this example, since it is possible to confirm the operation sound of the payout by the payout means without the payout sound or the background sound, the clerk of the amusement store is sure that the payout means is operating normally outside the business hours. Whether or not it can be easily confirmed by the operation sound, and during business hours, the clerk of the amusement store can notice that the fraudulent payout has occurred, and prevent the fraudulent activity. Is possible.

Further, since the payout by the payout means can be visually confirmed by the payout number display, the payout by the payout means can be confirmed more reliably.

In addition, as with the power failure / recovery, the operation sound of the payout by the payout means can be confirmed in a silent state even after the power is turned on. Whether or not it is operating normally can be easily confirmed by the operating sound.

The following state shown in FIG. 4D is a state in which the game can be started after the power is restored.

In this example, when the game can be started after the power is restored, the background display before the power failure is restarted instead of the return display by the display device, the background sound is output by the speaker, and the normal lamp is used. By restarting the output of the light in the light emitting mode, the state before the power failure is restored.

<Payout after power failure / recovery / Example 2>
Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the second embodiment of the “payout after power failure / recovery” that can be executed by the game console according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 5 is a diagram showing processes such as payout and error notification before and after the power failure / recovery of the slot machine in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 4A to 4C are the same as those shown in FIGS. 4A to 4C, the description thereof will be omitted.

In this example, in addition to the contents of the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 4, the sound output means (speaker in this example) can output an error sound for notifying an error, and the payout means (payout in this example). It is configured to output an error tone during the rest of the payout by the device).

Here, examples of errors that may occur in the slot machine 100 include a door open error, a hopper empty error, medal insertion abnormalities 1 to 4, medal payout abnormalities 1 to 3, overflow abnormalities, RAM defects, and winning abnormalities.

The door open error is an error that notifies the opening of the door of the game table, occurs when the front door 102 is opened, and is resolved when the front door 102 is closed. The hopper empty error is a payout error related to the payout of medals, and occurs when the number of medals stored in the hopper housed inside the main body 101 becomes less than the specified number, and more than the specified number of medals are sent to the hopper. It will be solved by replenishing.

The medal insertion abnormality 1 occurs when the inserted medals are retained, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error. The medal insertion abnormality 2 occurs when the number of medals inserted is equal to or greater than the specified number, and is resolved by changing the set value or clearing the RAM.

The medal insertion abnormality 3 occurs when either the insertion sensor 1 or the insertion sensor 2 is turned on except during the medal insertion processing, and the medal insertion abnormality 4 occurs when the inserted medals are inserted into the insertion sensor 1 and the insertion sensor 2. It occurs when the error is not passed normally, and it is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error.

The medal payout abnormality 1 occurs when the medal is not paid out for a certain period of time when the medal payout device is driven, and the medal payout abnormality 2 occurs when the medal stays while the medal payout device is driven, and the medal payout abnormality 3 occurs. Occurs when either the payout sensor 1 or the payout sensor 2 is turned on except during the medal payout process, and both of them are resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error. ..

The overflow abnormality occurs when the overflow terminal of the medal auxiliary storage is turned on, and is resolved when the error release switch operation is accepted after removing the cause of the error. The RAM failure occurs when an abnormality is detected by checking the RAM, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted. The winning abnormality occurs when a winning symbol different from the winning symbol confirmed by the internal lottery is won after the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted.

The game console according to the present invention is not limited to the slot machine 100, and can be applied to pachinko machines. Examples of errors that can occur in a pachinko machine include a bottom pan full tank error, a payout device error, a payout excess error, an illegal payout error, a main control unit communication error, a magnetic error, a magnetic field error, a frame opening error, and a RAM clear error. , Impact sensor error, etc., and these errors are also resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after the cause of the error is removed.

The state shown in FIG. 5 (e) is a state in which an error is detected during the recovery display after the power is restored.

In this example, since a door open error or a hopper empty error was detected during the return display after power recovery, the display device displays an error instead of the return display, outputs an error sound from the speaker, and outputs a lamp. Light is output from the error emission mode.

Even if an error is detected, both the payout device and the payout number display are configured to continue.

The mode of error display by the display device is not particularly limited, but for example, an error display for notifying the content of the error as a character string (for example, a character string such as "door open error has occurred!" Or "hopper empty error has occurred!" (Including display), error display prompting the resolution of the error (for example, display including a character string such as "Call a clerk"), error display indicating an error with a still image, a moving image, or the like.

The mode of the error sound by the speaker is not particularly limited, but for example, an error sound for notifying the content of the error by voice (for example, a voice such as "door open error occurrence" or "hopper empty error occurrence") or an error. An error sound (for example, a voice such as "Call a clerk" or a warning sound) that prompts the resolution of the above is applicable.

The error emission mode of the lamp is not particularly limited, but for example, a light emission mode different from the normal effect (for example, regular blinking or lighting of all lamps), light emission in a special color suggesting an error, or light emission. , Lighting of the lamp dedicated to error, etc.

According to this example, the operation sound of the payout method that does not accompany the payout sound and the output timing of the error sound overlap, so that the clerk of the amusement store is more surely aware that the fraudulent payout has occurred. It becomes possible.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 5 (f) is a state in which the cause of the error is eliminated and the error is cleared.

In this example, the error display by the display device, the output of the error sound by the speaker, and the output of the light of the error emission mode by the lamp are all stopped, while the return display is restarted on the display device.

<Payout / Summary after power failure / recovery>
As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment has a payout means (for example, a payout device) capable of paying out a game medium (for example, a medal) and the game. It is a game table provided with a sound output means (for example, a speaker) capable of outputting a payout sound during the payout period of the medium, and the payout means is disconnected and restored during the execution of the payout of the game medium. In this case, it is a means capable of executing the rest of the payout, and the sound output means does not output the payout sound during the execution of the rest of the payout by the payout means (during the operation of the payout means) (for example, payout). It is a game table characterized by being a means for temporarily blocking (muting) the audio signal while outputting the audio signal of the payout sound without outputting the audio signal of the sound.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, since the operation sound of the payout by the payout means can be confirmed without the payout sound, the clerk of the game store operates the payout means normally outside the business hours. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not it is done by the operation sound, and during business hours, the clerk of the game store can notice that the fraudulent payout has occurred, and the fraudulent activity can be prevented. It becomes possible to do.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment has a payout means (for example, a payout device) capable of paying out a game medium (for example, a medal) and a payout device for paying out the game medium. A game console provided with a sound output means (for example, a speaker) capable of outputting a payout sound (for example, a sound effect of "charin") during a period, and the payout means is executing payout of the game medium. It is a means capable of executing the rest of the payout when the power is cut off and restored to the above, and the sound output means outputs the payout sound during the execution of the rest of the payout by the payout means (during the operation of the payout means). It is a means that does not output (for example, does not output the audio signal of the payout sound, temporarily shuts off (mute) the audio signal while outputting the audio signal of the payout sound), and the sound output means is an error (for example). , A door open error notifying the opening of the door of the game table, a hopper empty error related to payout) is a means capable of outputting an error sound, and the sound output means is during the remaining execution of the payout by the payout means. It is a game table characterized by being a means that may output the error sound.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, since the operation sound of the payout by the payout means can be confirmed without the payout sound, the clerk of the game store operates the payout means normally outside the business hours. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not it is done by the operation sound, and during business hours, the clerk of the game store can notice that the fraudulent payout has occurred, and the fraudulent activity can be prevented. It becomes possible to do. In addition, by overlapping the operation sound of the payout means that does not accompany the payout sound and the output timing of the error sound, it is possible for the clerk of the amusement store to more surely notice that the fraudulent payout has occurred. Become.

Further, the sound output means is a means capable of outputting a background sound (for example, BGM), and the sound output means does not output the background sound during the remaining execution of the payout by the payout means (for example,). It may be a means that does not output the audio signal of the background sound, or temporarily cuts off (mutes) the audio signal while outputting the audio signal of the background sound.

With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the operation sound of the payout by the payout means without the background sound, so that the clerk of the game store checks whether the payout means is operating normally outside the business hours. It can be easily confirmed by the operation sound, and during business hours, the clerk of the amusement store can notice that the fraudulent payout has occurred, and it is possible to prevent the fraudulent activity. It will be possible.

Further, a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157) capable of displaying a return display after the power is turned on is provided, and no sound is output by the sound output means during the display period of the return display by the display means (for example, sound). A silent period (for example, a silent period shown in FIGS. 4 and 5) in which the audio signal is not output and the audio signal is temporarily cut off (mute) while the audio signal is being output, and the payout means is , May be a means of performing the rest of the payout during the silence period.

With such a configuration, the operation sound of the payout by the payout means can be confirmed in a silent state after the power is turned on, so that the payout means operates normally for the clerk of the game store before the opening of the game store. It can be easily confirmed by the operation sound whether or not it is.

Further, the payout display means (for example, a payout number display) capable of displaying the payout number indicating the payout number of the game medium is provided, and the payout display means is said to be said during the remaining execution of the payout by the payout means. It may be a means for executing the display of the payout number display.

With such a configuration, the payout by the payout means can be visually confirmed, so that the payout by the payout means can be confirmed more reliably.

Further, the error may be a door open error for notifying the door opening of the game table.

With such a configuration, even if the power is cut off and restored by a fraudster during business hours, the clerk of the amusement store may notice the fraudulent activity due to the door open error sound.

Further, the error may be a payout error related to the payout.

With such a configuration, the clerk of the amusement store can both check the payout operation and the error detection operation outside the business hours, which can improve convenience.

Further, the main control unit and the sub control unit may be provided, and the main control unit may control the payout means and the payout display means, and the sub control unit may control the display means. good.

With such a configuration, when the return time of the main control unit is earlier than that of the sub control unit after the power is cut off or the power is turned on, the payout of the game medium and the display of the number of payouts are given priority to start. It becomes possible to quickly pay out the game medium, and the convenience can be improved.

<Disbursement / modification example after power failure / recovery>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 6 to 8, a modified example of “payout after power failure / recovery” that can be executed by the game console according to the present embodiment will be described. The various devices shown in FIGS. 6 to 8 will be described.

The payout device in each figure is a payout means (payout device (not shown in this example)), and the state in which the game medium (medal in this example) is being paid out is “paying out”, and the game medium is The state in which the payout is not executed is "not paying out".

The storage number display device in each figure is a storage display means (in this example, the storage number display 125 shown in FIG. 1), and each time one game medium is paid out by the payout device, for example, 49 → 48 → 47 → ..., the number of the number of stored sheets indicating the number of stored sheets is subtracted by 1 and displayed.

The payout number display in each figure is a payout display means (in this example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 1), and each time one game medium is paid out by the payout device, for example, 1 → 2 → As in 3 → 4 → ..., the number of the number of payouts indicating the number of payouts is added and displayed one by one.

The "display device" in each figure is a display means (in this example, a liquid crystal display device 157). A return-to-return display is executed to notify that there is an error, or a checkout display is displayed to notify that the payout is being executed (payment in progress) while the game medium is being paid out by the payout means (during the payout means is operating). During the execution of the demo, the demo display that informs that the demo is in progress (non-gaming state) can be executed, and an error (for example, a door open error that informs the door opening of the game console, a hopper empty regarding payout) can be executed. When an error occurs), an error display that notifies the error is displayed.

The "speaker" in each figure is a sound output means, for example, during a normal game, a normal BGM is output, or a payout sound (during operation of the payout means) is being executed by the payout means. For example, when the sound effects such as "Piro Piro ..." and "Chareen") are output, or when the payout of the game medium is completed by the payout means, the payout completion sound (for example, "Please be careful not to forget to remove the prepaid card". , Etc.), or when an error (for example, a door open error notifying the door opening of the game console, a hopper empty error related to payout) occurs, an error sound notifying the error is output.

The lamp in each figure is an optical output means capable of outputting light (in this example, the side lamp (decorative lamp) 144 shown in FIG. 1 and the top lamp arranged above the sound hole 143 shown in FIG. 1). Yes, for example, during a normal game, light is output in a normal light emitting mode, or during the payout of the game medium by the payout means (during the operation of the payout means), the payout is being executed (payment in progress). An error may be output, such as outputting light in a light emission mode during payment (for example, blinking red) to notify, or outputting light in a demo light emission mode informing that the demo is in progress (non-gaming state) during the execution of the demo. (For example, when a door open error for notifying the opening of the door of the game table, a hopper empty error for paying out) occurs, light is output in an error light emitting mode (for example, lighting in red) for notifying the error.

The reel back lamp in each figure is a light output means (in this example, a backlight arranged on the back surface of the reels 110 to 112) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 113, for example, a game. During the feasible period, the light is output in the normal light emission mode, the light is turned off during the period when the game is infeasible, and the demo light emission that notifies that the demo is in progress (non-gaming state) during the demonstration. Light is output depending on the mode.

The movable body in each figure is a movable body capable of a certain movement (in this example, the shutter (shielding device) 163 shown in FIG. 1), and is, for example, a normal operation mode (for example, the right shutter 163a) during a normal game. , The left shutter 163b is opened and closed), and the initial operation (for example, the operation of closing the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b) is executed when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

<Disbursement / Modification 1 after power failure / recovery>
FIG. 6 (1) is a diagram showing the processing of payout and the like before and after the power interruption / recovery of the slot machine according to the modified example 1 in chronological order.

Before the power failure shown in FIGS. 6 (1) and 6 (b), the slot machine 100 is normally energized.

In this example, before the settlement button 134 is pressed as shown in FIGS. (1) and (a), the normal background display is displayed on the display device, the normal BGM is output from the speaker, and the normal light is emitted from the lamp or the reel back lamp. Light is output in the mode. In addition, since 50 medals are stored, the number 50 is displayed on the stored number display, and since the medals are not being paid out, the state of the payout device is not being paid out, and the payout number display device. The display is not executed in.

The state shown in FIGS. 6 (1) and 6 (a) is a state in which the operation of pressing the settlement button 134 is accepted during the game and the payout of the stored medals is started. It should be noted that this state may be a state in which a winning combination is won in a certain game, a third stop operation is accepted, and a medal corresponding to the winning combination is started to be paid out (the same applies to the following modification).

In this example, when the operation of pressing the settlement button 134 is accepted, the state of the payout device is changed from non-payout to payout, the payout device starts paying out medals, and the payout device pays out medals. During the period, the payout sound (for example, the sound effect of "charin") is output from the speaker.

Further, in the stored number display, each time one medal is paid out by the payout device, the number of the stored number display indicating the number of stored medals is subtracted by 1 and displayed as 49 → 48 → 47 → ... do.

Even during the medal payout period, the normal background display by the display device, the output of the normal BGM by the speaker, and the output of the light in the normal light emitting mode by the lamp or the reel back lamp are all configured to continue.

The following states shown in FIGS. 6 (1) and 6 (b) are states in which a power failure has occurred (a state in which the energization of the slot machine 100 is cut off).

In the same state, since the supply of power to various devices is stopped, the display device displays the normal background, the speaker outputs the normal BGM and payout sound, the lamp and the reel back lamp output the light in the normal light emitting mode, and the number of stored sheets. Neither the display of the number of stored sheets on the display nor the payout of medals by the payout device is executed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 6 (1) and 6 (c) are states in which power is restored (a state in which energization to the slot machine 100 is resumed).

In this example, after the display device starts displaying the returning display with the power recovery as an opportunity, the recovery is performed until the recovery period of the display device ends (until the initial setting of the display device after power recovery is completed). While the middle display is continued, during the return period of this display device, the normal BGM by the speaker and the silent period in which the payout sound is not output are set.

In addition, during the return period of this display device (during the silent period of the speaker), the payout device executes (restarts) the rest of the payout (in this example, payout of the remaining 47 medals), and also displays the number of stored cards. Then, every time one medal is paid out by the payout device, the number of the number of stored medals indicating the number of stored medals is subtracted by 1 like 47 → 46 → 45 → ... 3 → 2 → 1 → 0. By displaying, the number of stored sheets is displayed during the remaining execution of the payout by the payout device.

In addition, when the power is restored, the reel back lamp executes (restarts) the output of the light in the normal light emitting mode, and while the initial operation of the movable body is started, the output of the light in the normal light emitting mode by the lamp is executed (resumed). It is configured not to restart).

The following states shown in FIGS. 6 (1) and 6 (d) are states in which the recovery period of the display device has ended (the initial setting of the display device after power recovery has ended).

In this example, since all the medals have been paid out by the payout device in the same state, the state of the payout device is changed from being paid out to being not being paid out, the payout by the payout device is stopped, and the number of stored cards is displayed. Displays the number 0 indicating that the number of stored items is 0.

Further, since the return period of the display device has expired, the normal background display by the display device, the output of the normal BGM by the speaker, and the output of the light in the normal light emission mode by the lamp are executed (restarted).

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment has a payout means (for example, a payout device) capable of paying out a game medium (for example, a medal) and the game. It is a game table provided with a sound output means (for example, a speaker) capable of outputting a payout sound during the payout period of the medium, and the payout means is disconnected and restored during the execution of the payout of the game medium. In this case, it is a means capable of executing the rest of the payout, and the sound output means does not output the payout sound during the execution of the rest of the payout by the payout means (during the operation of the payout means) (for example, payout). It is a means (which does not output a sound signal), the sound output means is a means capable of outputting a background sound, and the sound output means outputs the background sound during the rest of the payout by the payout means. It is a means that does not output, and the background sound is a sound different from the error sound, which is a game table.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, the payout sound by the speaker and the operation sound of the payout by the payout means can be confirmed without BGM. Therefore, the clerk of the game store can use the payout means outside the business hours. Whether or not it is operating normally can be easily confirmed by the operation sound, and during business hours, the clerk of the amusement store can notice that an illegal payout has occurred by a fraudulent person, and the fraudulent act. Can be prevented in advance.

Further, as in the case of power failure / recovery, if the operation sound of the payout by the payout means can be confirmed in a silent state even after the power is turned on, the clerk of the game shop can check the operation sound of the payout by the payout means. Can easily confirm whether or not the payout means is operating normally by the operating sound.

In addition, since the payout by the payout means can be visually confirmed by the stored number display, the payout by the payout means can be confirmed more reliably.

<Disbursement / Modification 2 after power failure / recovery>
FIG. 6 (2) is a diagram showing the processes such as payout and error notification before and after the power failure / recovery of the slot machine according to the modified example 2 in chronological order. The states shown in FIGS. (2) (a) to (2) (c) and (d) are as shown in FIGS. 6 (1) (a) to (1) (c) and (d). Since they are in the same state, the description thereof will be omitted.

In this example, in addition to the contents of the modification 1 described with reference to FIG. 6 (1), the sound output means (speaker in this example) can output an error sound for notifying an error, and the payout means (book). In the example, it is configured to output an error sound during the rest of the payout by the payout device).

As described above, the errors that may occur in the slot machine 100 include a door open error, a hopper empty error, medal insertion abnormalities 1 to 4, medal payout abnormalities 1 to 3, overflow abnormalities, RAM defects, winning abnormalities, and the like.

The state shown in FIGS. 6 (2) and 6 (e) is a state in which an error is detected during the recovery period of the display device.

In this example, since a door open error or a hopper empty error was detected during the return period of the display device, the display device displays an error to notify the error and emits an error sound from the speaker instead of the return display. It outputs and outputs light from the lamp in an error emission mode.

On the other hand, in this example, even if an error is detected, both the payout of medals by the payout device and the display of the number of stored medals by the stored number indicator are configured to continue.

The mode of error display by the display device is not particularly limited, but for example, an error display for notifying the content of the error as a character string (for example, a character string such as "door open error occurred!" Or "hopper empty error occurred!" (Including display), error display prompting the resolution of the error (for example, display including a character string such as "Call a clerk"), error display indicating an error with a still image, a moving image, or the like.

The mode of the error sound by the speaker is not particularly limited, but for example, an error sound for notifying the content of the error by voice (for example, a voice such as "door open error occurrence" or "hopper empty error occurrence") or an error. An error sound (for example, a voice such as "Call a clerk" or a warning sound) that prompts the resolution of the above is applicable.

The error emission mode of the lamp is not particularly limited, but for example, a light emission mode different from the normal effect (for example, regular blinking or lighting of all lamps), light emission in a special color suggesting an error, or light emission. , Lighting of the lamp dedicated to error, etc.

According to this example, the operation sound of the payout method that does not accompany the payout sound and the output timing of the error sound overlap, so that the clerk of the amusement store is more surely aware that the fraudulent payout has occurred. It becomes possible.

Subsequent states shown in FIGS. 5 (2) and 5 (f) are states in which the cause of the error is eliminated and the error is cleared.

In this example, the error display by the display device, the output of the error sound by the speaker, and the output of the light of the error emission mode by the lamp are all stopped, while the return display is executed (restarted) in the display device. Returns to the state immediately before the error occurred.

On the other hand, in this example, since all the medals have been paid out by the payout device when the error is cleared, the state of the payout device is changed from being paid out to being not being paid out, the payout by the payout device is stopped, and the medals are stored. On the number display, the number 0 indicating that the number of stored sheets is 0 is displayed.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment has a payout means (for example, a payout device) capable of paying out a game medium (for example, a medal) and the game. A game table including a sound output means (for example, a speaker) capable of outputting a payout sound (for example, a sound effect of "charin") during the payout period of the medium, wherein the payout means is of the game medium. It is a means capable of executing the rest of the payout when the power is cut off and restored during the execution of the payout, and the sound output means is during the execution of the rest of the payout by the payout means (during the operation of the payout means). The payout sound is not output, and the sound output means is a means capable of outputting an error sound for notifying an error (for example, a door open error for notifying the door opening of a game table, a hopper empty error for payout). The sound output means may output the error sound during the remaining execution of the payout by the payout means, and the sound output means is a means capable of outputting the background sound and the sound. The output means is a means for not outputting the background sound during the remaining execution of the payout by the payout means, and the background sound is a sound different from the error sound. ..

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, the payout sound by the speaker and the operation sound of the payout by the payout means can be confirmed without BGM. Therefore, the clerk of the game store can use the payout means outside the business hours. Whether or not it is operating normally can be easily confirmed by the operation sound, and during business hours, the clerk of the amusement store can notice that an illegal payout has occurred by a fraudulent person, and the fraudulent act. Can be prevented in advance.

Further, as in the case of power failure / recovery, if the operation sound of the payout by the payout means can be confirmed in a silent state even after the power is turned on, the clerk of the game shop can check the operation sound of the payout by the payout means. Can easily confirm whether or not the payout means is operating normally by the operating sound.

In addition, since the payout by the payout means can be visually confirmed by the stored number display, the payout by the payout means can be confirmed more reliably.

<Disbursement / Modification A after power failure / recovery>
FIG. 6 (3) is a diagram showing in chronological order the processing such as payout and error notification before and after the power failure / recovery of the slot machine according to the modified example A.

Before the power failure shown in FIGS. 6 (3) and 6 (b), the slot machine 100 is normally energized.

In this example, before the operation of pressing the settlement button 134 shown in FIGS. (3) and (a), the normal background display is displayed on the display device, and the light is output from the lamp or the reel back lamp in the normal light emitting mode. .. In addition, since 50 medals are stored, the number 50 is displayed on the stored number display, and since the medals are not being paid out, the state of the payout device is not being paid out, and the payout number display device. The display is not executed in.

The state shown in FIGS. 6 (3) and 6 (a) is a state in which the operation of pressing the settlement button 134 is accepted during the game and the payout of the stored medals is started.

In this example, when the operation of pressing the settlement button 134 is accepted, the state of the payout device is changed from non-payout to payout, the payout device starts paying out medals, and the payout device pays out medals. During the period, the payout sound (for example, the sound effect "Piro Piro ...") is output from the speaker.

Further, in the stored number display, each time one medal is paid out by the payout device, the number of the stored number display indicating the number of stored medals is subtracted by 1 and displayed as 49 → 48 → 47 → ... At the same time, the display device (display means) displays the payment in progress display (first display) informing that the payout is being executed (payment in progress), and the lamp (first light emitting means) displays the payout. Light is output in the during-payment light emitting mode (first mode, for example, blinking red) to notify that the execution is in progress (payment in progress).

Even during the medal payout period, the reel back lamp is configured to continue to output light in the normal light emitting mode.

The following states shown in FIGS. 6 (3) and 6 (b) are states in which a power failure has occurred (a state in which the energization of the slot machine 100 is cut off).

In the same state, since the supply of power to various devices is stopped, the display device displays the checkout sound, the speaker outputs the payout sound, the lamp outputs the light in the checkout mode, and the reel back lamp uses the normal light emission mode. The output of light, the display of the number of stored sheets by the stored number display, and the payout of medals by the payout device are not executed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 6 (3) and 6 (c) are states in which power is restored (a state in which energization to the slot machine 100 is resumed).

In this example, when the power is restored, the display device starts displaying a black background display (first background display) in which the entire display area is black (first color), while the display device is used. During the return period, the display device does not display the checkout display, and the speaker does not output the payout sound.

In addition, during the period of black background display of this display device (during the silent period of the speaker), the payout device executes (resumes) the rest of the payout (in this example, payout of the remaining 47 medals) and stores it. In the number display, each time one medal is paid out by the payout device, the number of the stored number display indicating the number of stored medals is subtracted by 1 and displayed as 47 → 46 → ... 35 → 34. Then, the number of stored sheets is displayed while the remaining number of payouts by the payout device is being executed.

Further, when the power is restored, the reel back lamp is configured to execute (restart) the output of the light in the normal light emitting mode, while the lamp is configured not to execute (restart) the output of the light in the light emitting mode during settlement. ..

The following states shown in FIGS. 6 (3) and 6 (d) are states in which a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the recovery period of the display device has ended (the initial setting of the display device after power restoration has ended)).

In this example, when a certain condition is satisfied, the display device starts displaying a blue background display (second background display) in which all the display areas are blue (second color), and the speaker is used. Executes (restarts) the output of the payout sound. In addition, the output of the light in the light emitting mode during the settlement by the lamp is executed (restarted), and the initial operation of the movable body is started.

In this example, an example is shown in which the output of the payout sound by the speaker is executed (restarted) when a certain condition is satisfied, but when a certain condition is satisfied, the remaining amount of the game medium is N or less (for example,). , 20 or less), it may be configured not to output the payout sound. Further, a certain condition is not limited to the end of the return period of the display device, that a certain time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after the power is restored, and that the preparation for the initial operation of the movable body is completed. And so on.

The following states shown in FIGS. 6 (3) and 6 (e) are states in which the payout of medals by the payout device is completed.

In this example, since all the medals have been paid out by the payout device, the state of the payout device is changed from being paid out to being not being paid out, the payout by the payout device is stopped, and the number of stored medals is displayed on the storage number display. Displays the number 0 indicating that is 0.

In addition, when the payout of medals is completed, the display device starts displaying a payout completion display (in this example, a display that alerts the user to forget to remove the prepaid card) to notify that the payout has been completed. A payout completion sound that notifies you that the payout has been completed from the speaker (in this example, one voice randomly selected from multiple types of voices including a voice such as "Please be careful not to forget to remove the prepaid card") Starts outputting.

Even during the output of the payout completion sound, the output of the light in the light emitting mode during the settlement by the lamp and the output of the light in the normal light emitting mode by the reel back lamp are both continued.

The following states shown in FIGS. 6 (3) and 6 (f) are states in which the output of the payout completion sound from the speaker is completed.

In this example, since the output of the payout completion sound by the speaker is completed, the display device starts displaying the demo animation, and the lamp notifies that the demo is in progress (non-gaming state). Output light. Even during the demonstration, the reel back lamp is configured to continue to output light in the normal light emitting mode.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment has a payout means (for example, a payout device) capable of paying out a game medium (for example, a medal) and the game. A sound output means (for example, a speaker) capable of outputting the payout sound during the payout period of the medium and a first display (for example, a checkout indicating that the checkout is in progress) are displayed during the payout period of the game medium. A game table including a possible display means (for example, a display device), wherein the payout means can execute the rest of the payout if the power is cut off and restored during the payout of the game medium. The sound output means is a means that does not output the payout sound (for example, does not output the audio signal of the payout sound) while the remaining payout by the payout means is being executed (during the operation of the payout means). The display means is a gaming table characterized in that the first display is not displayed during the remaining execution of the payout by the payout means.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, the payout sound by the speaker and the operation sound of the payout by the payout means can be confirmed without BGM. Therefore, the clerk of the game store can use the payout means outside the business hours. Whether or not it is operating normally can be easily confirmed by the operation sound, and during business hours, the clerk of the amusement store can notice that an illegal payout has occurred by a fraudulent person, and the fraudulent act. Can be prevented in advance. In addition, since the first display is not output during the remaining execution of the payout by the payout means, the first display is not displayed when the fraudulent payout is executed, which makes it easier for the fraudster to be alert. , It may be possible to prevent fraudulent activities.

Further, the first display may be a display indicating that the settlement is in progress (for example, a display including a character string of "payment in progress").

Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying the first background display (for example, black background display) of the first color (for example, black) during at least a part of the remaining execution period of the payout. There may be.

Further, a first light emitting means (for example, a lamp) capable of emitting light in the first aspect (for example, blinking in red) is provided during the payout period of the game medium, and the first light emitting means is the rest of the payout. It may be a means that does not emit light in the first aspect during at least a part of the period during the execution of the above.

It also comprises a movable body (eg, the shutter (cloaking device) 163 shown in FIG. 1), wherein the movable body has an initial operation (eg, right shutter 163a, for at least a portion of the rest of the payout period during execution. The operation of closing the left shutter 163b) may be an executable means.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment has a payout means (for example, a payout device) capable of paying out a game medium (for example, a medal) and a payout device for paying out the game medium. A game console provided with a sound output means (for example, a speaker) capable of outputting a payout sound during a period, wherein the payout means is used when power is cut off and restored during execution of payout of the game medium. It is a means capable of executing the rest of the payout, and the sound output means is at least a part of the period during the execution of the rest of the payout by the payout means (during the operation of the payout means) (hereinafter, "first period"). For example, during the return period of the display device), the payout sound is not output (for example, the audio signal of the payout sound is not output), and the sound output means is the second after the first period. It is a game table characterized by being a means capable of outputting the payout sound in two periods (for example, a certain period after the return period of the display device has elapsed).

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, the payout sound by the speaker and the operation sound of the payout by the payout means can be confirmed without BGM. Therefore, the clerk of the game store can use the payout means outside the business hours. Whether or not it is operating normally can be easily confirmed by the operation sound, and during business hours, the clerk of the amusement store can notice that an illegal payout has occurred by a fraudulent person, and the fraudulent act. Can be prevented in advance. In addition, since the payout sound can be output in the second period after the first period, the payout sound is output at a certain timing when an illegal payout is executed by a fraudulent person. A game store clerk or the like can easily notice fraudulent activity and can prevent fraudulent activity.

Further, the sound output means may be a means that does not output the payout sound during the execution period when the remaining execution period of the payout by the payout means is shorter than a certain period.

Also provided with display means, said display means will provide a second background display (eg, blue background display) of a second color (eg, blue) for at least a portion of the rest of the payout period. It is a displayable means, and the sound output means may be a means capable of outputting the payout sound during the display of the second background display.

Further, the first light emitting means (for example, a lamp) capable of emitting light in the first aspect (for example, blinking in red) is provided during the payout period of the game medium, and the first light emitting means is the second light emitting means. It may be a means capable of emitting light in the first aspect during the display of the background display (all or a part of the period).

Further, a movable body (for example, the shutter (shielding device) 163 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and the movable body is initially displayed during (all or a part of the period) of the display of the second background display. It may be a means capable of executing an operation (for example, an operation executed at the time of turning on the power or after power is restored. An operation of closing the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b).

<Disbursement / Modification B after power failure / recovery>
FIG. 6 (4) is a diagram showing the processes such as payout and error notification before and after the power failure / recovery of the slot machine according to the modified example B in chronological order.

First, the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described prior to the explanation of the payout after the power is cut off and restored.

Inside the main body 101 of the game table, a setting key that can be switched from one of on (second state) and off (first state) to the other is provided by a rotation operation. This setting key is an operation means for starting setting change and setting confirmation of setting values (settings 1 to 6 in this example). Further, inside the main body 101, there is provided a setting switch capable of performing an operation for changing the setting (setting value changing operation) and an operation for confirming the setting by a pressing operation. These setting keys and setting switches can be operated by opening the front door 102, and are difficult or impossible to operate in the closed state (the operating means cannot be operated by the player).

By opening the front door 102 and turning on the power with the setting key provided inside the main body 101 turned on, it is possible to shift to the setting change mode in which the setting can be changed. Further, after the power is turned on, the operation of opening the front door 102 and switching the setting key provided inside the main body 101 from off (first state) to on (second state) (rotation operation in this example). By performing, it is possible to shift to the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed.

Changing the setting means changing the setting value of the game console. In this example, in the setting change mode, the operation is performed while displaying the setting value (any of setting 1 to setting 6) on the payout number display 127. Every time the pressing operation by the means (setting switch) is detected, the setting value 1 to 6 currently set is incremented and updated by 1, and when the setting value exceeds 6, it is repeatedly executed to return to 1. By doing so, it is possible to change the set value arbitrarily.

Further, in the setting change mode, when the pressing operation by the operation means (start lever 135 in this example) is accepted, the set value is confirmed and the setting change is completed, and the game shifts to the normal gaming state in which the normal game is possible. ..

In the setting change mode, when the operation means (start lever 135) is operated without pressing the operation means (setting switch), or when the operation means (setting switch) is repeatedly pressed, the set value is set. When the operation of the operation means (start lever 135) is executed after one lap (for example, setting 5 → setting 5), the setting value is the same as the setting before the power failure.

Further, the setting confirmation means to confirm the setting value of the game console. In this example, in the setting confirmation mode, the setting value initially set by the pressing operation by the operation means (setting switch) (for example, setting 1). ) Or, by displaying the set value (any of settings 1 to 6) set by changing the setting on the payout number display 127, it is possible to confirm the current set value.

Before the power failure shown in FIGS. 6 (4) and 6 (b), the slot machine 100 is normally energized.

In this example, before the operation of pressing the settlement button 134 shown in FIGS. (4) and (a), the normal background display is displayed on the display device, and the light is output from the lamp or the reel back lamp in the normal light emitting mode. .. In addition, since 50 medals are stored, the number 50 is displayed on the stored number display, and since the medals are not being paid out, the state of the payout device is not being paid out, and the payout number display device. The display is not executed in.

The state shown in FIGS. 6 (4) and 6 (a) is a state in which the operation of pressing the settlement button 134 is accepted during the game and the payout of the stored medals is started.

In this example, when the operation of pressing the settlement button 134 is accepted, the state of the payout device is changed from non-payout to payout, the payout device starts paying out medals, and the payout device pays out medals. During the period, the payout sound (the first sound, for example, the sound effect "Piro Piro ...") is output from the speaker.

Further, in the stored number display, each time one medal is paid out by the payout device, the number of the stored number display indicating the number of stored medals is subtracted by 1 and displayed as 49 → 48 → 47 → ... At the same time, the display device (display means) displays the settlement in progress display (first display) notifying that the payout is being executed (payment in progress), and the payout is performed from the lamp (first light emitting means). Light is output in the during-payment light emitting mode (first mode, for example, blinking red) to notify that the execution is in progress (payment in progress).

Even during the medal payout period, the reel back lamp is configured to continue to output light in the normal light emitting mode.

The following states shown in FIGS. 6 (4) and 6 (b) are states in which a power failure has occurred (a state in which the energization of the slot machine 100 is cut off).

In the same state, since the supply of power to various devices is stopped, the display device displays the checkout sound, the speaker outputs the payout sound, the lamp outputs the light in the checkout mode, and the reel back lamp uses the normal light emission mode. The output of light, the display of the number of stored sheets by the stored number display, and the payout of medals by the payout device are not executed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 6 (4) and 6 (c) are states in which power is restored (a state in which energization to the slot machine 100 is resumed).

In this example, when the power is restored, the display device starts displaying a black background display (first background display) in which the entire display area is black (first color), while the display device is used. During the return period, the display device does not display the checkout display, and the speaker does not output the payout sound.

In addition, during the period of black background display of this display device (during the silent period of the speaker), the payout device executes (resumes) the rest of the payout (in this example, payout of the remaining 47 medals) and stores it. In the number display, each time one medal is paid out by the payout device, the number of the stored number display indicating the number of stored medals is subtracted by 1 and displayed as 47 → 46 → ... 35 → 34. Then, the number of stored sheets is displayed while the remaining number of payouts by the payout device is being executed.

Further, when the power is restored, the reel back lamp is configured to execute (restart) the output of the light in the normal light emitting mode, while the lamp is configured not to execute (restart) the output of the light in the light emitting mode during settlement. ..

The following states shown in FIGS. 6 (4) and 6 (d) are states in which a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the recovery period of the display device has ended (the initial setting of the display device after power restoration has ended)).

In this example, when a certain condition is satisfied, the display device starts displaying a blue background display (second background display) in which all the display areas are blue (second color), and the speaker is used. Executes (restarts) the output of the payout sound. In addition, the output of the light in the light emitting mode during the settlement by the lamp is executed (restarted), and the initial operation of the movable body is started.

Further, in this example, the setting key (operation means) is operated (rotation operation) from off (first state) to on (second state) during the rest of the payout by the payout device. However, it is configured not to shift to the setting confirmation mode during the rest of the payout.

In this example, an example is shown in which the output of the payout sound by the speaker is executed (restarted) when a certain condition is satisfied, but when a certain condition is satisfied, the remaining amount of the game medium is N or less (for example,). , 20 or less), it may be configured not to output the payout sound. Further, a certain condition is not limited to the end of the return period of the display device, that a certain time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after the power is restored, and that the preparation for the initial operation of the movable body is completed. And so on.

The following states shown in FIGS. 6 (4) and 6 (e) are states in which the payout of medals by the payout device is completed.

In this example, since all the medals have been paid out by the payout device, the state of the payout device is changed from being paid out to being not being paid out, the payout by the payout device is stopped, and the number of stored medals is displayed on the storage number display. Displays the number 0 indicating that is 0.

In addition, when the payout of medals is completed, the display device starts displaying a payout completion display (in this example, a display that alerts the user to forget to remove the prepaid card) to notify that the payout has been completed. A payout completion sound that notifies you that the payout has been completed from the speaker (in this example, one voice randomly selected from multiple types of voices including a voice such as "Please be careful not to forget to remove the prepaid card") Starts outputting.

Even during the output of the payout completion sound, the output of the light in the light emitting mode during the settlement by the lamp and the output of the light in the normal light emitting mode by the reel back lamp are both continued.

The following states shown in FIGS. 6 (4) and 6 (f) are states in which the output of the payout completion sound from the speaker is completed.

In this example, since the output of the payout completion sound by the speaker is completed, the display device starts displaying the demo animation, and the lamp notifies that the demo is in progress (non-gaming state). Output light. Even during the demonstration, the reel back lamp is configured to continue to output light in the normal light emitting mode.

Further, in this example, even if the front door 102 is open (door open state) after the remaining execution of payout is completed, the setting confirmation mode is not set.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment has a payout means (for example, a payout device) capable of paying out a game medium (for example, a medal) and the game. A sound output means (for example, a speaker) capable of outputting the output sound during the period of delivery of the medium, and an operation that can be operated from one of the first state (for example, off) and the second state (for example, on) to the other. A game table including means (for example, a setting key), wherein the payout means is a means capable of executing the rest of the payout when the power is cut off and restored during the payout of the game medium. The sound output means is a means that does not output the payout sound (for example, does not output the voice signal of the payout sound) while the remaining payout by the payout means is being executed (during the operation of the payout means), and is a door. When the operating means is operated from the first state to the second state in the open state, it is possible to shift to the setting confirmation mode (a state in which the set value can be confirmed), and the remaining of the payout by the payout means. (For example, during the period during which the remaining 33 medals are being paid out as shown in FIG. 6 (4)), the operating means is operated from the first state to the second state. The setting is not made during the remaining execution of the payout, and even if the door is open (for example, the front door 102 is open) after the remaining execution of the payout is completed. It is a game console characterized by not shifting to the confirmation mode.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, the payout sound by the speaker and the operation sound of the payout by the payout means can be confirmed without BGM. Therefore, the clerk of the game store can use the payout means outside the business hours. Whether or not it is operating normally can be easily confirmed by the operation sound, and during business hours, the clerk of the amusement store can notice that an illegal payout has occurred by a fraudulent person, and the fraudulent act. Can be prevented in advance. Further, if the operating means is operated from the first state to the second state in the door open state during the remaining execution of the payout by the payout means, the setting confirmation mode is not performed during the remaining execution of the payout. Since the setting confirmation mode is not entered even if the door is open after the remaining execution of the payout is completed, the clerk of the game store opens the door to inspect the game table (check the operation of the hopper, etc.). Even if the operating means is mistakenly operated during the operation, the inspection of the game console (checking the operation of the hopper, etc.) can be continued, and the convenience of the store clerk can be improved.

Further, the sound output means is a means capable of outputting a first sound (for example, a payout sound (sound effect) of "piropiro ...") at the end of settlement, and the sound output means is the payout by the payout means. It may be a means capable of outputting the first sound after the completion of the remaining executions of.

Further, a display means (for example, a display device) capable of displaying a demo animation is provided, and the display means is provided with a payout completion sound shown in FIGS. 6 (4) and 6 (f) after the output of the first sound is completed. It may be a means capable of displaying the demo animation after the completion of the above.

It also comprises a movable body (eg, the shutter (cloaking device) 163 shown in FIG. 1), wherein the movable body has an initial operation (eg, right shutter 163a, for at least a portion of the rest of the payout period during execution. The operation of closing the left shutter 163b) may be an executable means.

Further, if the operating means is operated from the first state to the second state after the remaining execution of the payout by the payout means is completed, the mode may shift to the setting confirmation mode.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment has a payout means (for example, a payout device) capable of paying out a game medium (for example, a medal) and a payout device for paying out the game medium. A sound output means (for example, a speaker) capable of outputting a payout sound during a period, and an operation means (for example, an operation means) capable of operating one of the first state (for example, off) and the second state (for example, on) to the other. A game table provided with a setting key), wherein the payout means is a means capable of executing the rest of the payout when the power is cut off and restored during the payout of the game medium, and the sound. The output means is a means that does not output the payout sound (for example, does not output the audio signal of the payout sound) while the remaining payout by the payout means is being executed (during the operation of the payout means), and the operating means is said. When the operation from the first state to the second state is performed, it is possible to shift to the setting confirmation mode (a state in which the set value can be confirmed), and the rest of the payout by the payout means is being executed (for example, FIG. 6). When the operating means is operated from the first state to the second state during the period during which the remaining 33 medals are being paid out as shown in (4), the remaining payout is being executed. Is a game table characterized in that it does not shift to the setting confirmation mode and does not shift to the setting confirmation mode even if the remaining execution of the payout is completed.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, the payout sound by the speaker and the operation sound of the payout by the payout means can be confirmed without BGM. Therefore, the clerk of the game store can use the payout means outside the business hours. Whether or not it is operating normally can be easily confirmed by the operation sound, and during business hours, the clerk of the amusement store can notice that an illegal payout has occurred by a fraudulent person, and the fraudulent act. Can be prevented in advance. Further, if the operating means is operated from the first state to the second state during the execution of the rest of the payout by the payout means, the setting confirmation mode is not entered during the rest of the payout, and the rest of the payout is performed. Even if the execution of is completed, the setting confirmation mode is not entered. Therefore, when the clerk of the game store opens the door for checking the game table (checking the operation of the hopper, etc.), the operating means is mistakenly operated. Even if it is done, the inspection of the game console (checking the operation of the hopper, etc.) can be continued, and the convenience of the store clerk can be improved.

Further, the sound output means is a means capable of outputting a first sound (for example, a payout sound (sound effect) of "piropiro ...") at the end of settlement, and the sound output means is the payout by the payout means. It may be a means capable of outputting the first sound after the completion of the remaining executions of.

Further, a display means (for example, a display device) capable of displaying a demo animation is provided, and the display means is provided with a payout completion sound shown in FIGS. 6 (4) and 6 (f) after the output of the first sound is completed. It may be a means capable of displaying the demo animation after the completion of the above.

It also comprises a movable body (eg, the shutter (cloaking device) 163 shown in FIG. 1), wherein the movable body has an initial operation (eg, right shutter 163a, for at least a portion of the rest of the payout period during execution. The operation of closing the left shutter 163b) may be an executable means.

Further, if the operating means is operated from the first state to the second state after the remaining execution of the payout by the payout means is completed, the mode may shift to the setting confirmation mode.

<Disbursement / Modification C after power failure / recovery>
FIG. 7 (1) is a diagram showing in chronological order the processing such as payout and error notification before and after the power failure / recovery of the slot machine according to the modified example C.

Before the power failure shown in FIGS. 7 (1) and 7 (b), the slot machine 100 is normally energized.

In this example, before the operation of pressing the settlement button 134 shown in FIGS. (1) and (a), the normal background display is displayed on the display device, and the light is output from the lamp or the reel back lamp in the normal light emitting mode. .. In addition, since 50 medals are stored, the number 50 is displayed on the stored number display, and since the medals are not being paid out, the state of the payout device is not being paid out, and the payout number display device. The display is not executed in.

The state shown in FIGS. 7 (1) and 7 (a) is a state in which the operation of pressing the settlement button 134 is accepted during the game and the payout of the stored medals is started.

In this example, when the operation of pressing the settlement button 134 is accepted, the state of the payout device is changed from non-payout to payout, the payout device starts paying out medals, and the payout device pays out medals. During the period, the payout sound (for example, the sound effect "Piro Piro ...") is output from the speaker.

Further, in the stored number display, each time one medal is paid out by the payout device, the number of the stored number display indicating the number of stored medals is subtracted by 1 and displayed as 49 → 48 → 47 → ... do.

Even during the medal payout period, the display device is configured to continue the normal background display, and the lamp or the reel back lamp is configured to continue to output the light in the normal light emitting mode.

The following states shown in FIGS. 7 (1) and 7 (b) are states in which a power failure has occurred (a state in which the energization of the slot machine 100 is cut off).

In the same state, since the supply of power to various devices is stopped, the normal background display by the display device, the output of the payout sound by the speaker, the output of the light in the normal light emission mode by the lamp or reel back lamp, and the storage number display are used. Neither the display of the number of stored sheets nor the payout of medals by the payout device is executed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 7 (1) and 7 (c) are states in which power is restored (a state in which energization to the slot machine 100 is resumed).

In this example, a preparation display (fourth background display. For example, the character display "preparing" is displayed to notify that various devices (display devices, etc.) are being prepared in the display device when the power is restored. After starting the display of (including display), until the recovery period of the display device ends (until the initial setting of the display device after power recovery is completed), after continuing the preparation display, the normal background display (third) While the background display) is started (restarted), the period during which the preparation display and the normal background display are being executed is a silent period in which the payout sound from the speaker is not output.

In addition, during the period during which the preparation display and the normal background display are being executed (during the silent period of the speaker), the payout device executes (restarts) the rest of the payout (in this example, the payout of the remaining 47 medals). ) At the same time, in the stored number display, each time one medal is paid out by the payout device, a number indicating the number of stored medals such as 47 → 46 → 45 → ... 2 → 1 → 0 is displayed. Is subtracted by 1 and displayed, so that the number of stored sheets is displayed during the remaining execution of the payout by the payout device.

Further, it is configured to execute (restart) the output of light in the normal light emitting mode by the lamp or the reel back lamp when the power is restored.

The following states shown in FIGS. 7 (1) and 7 (d) are states in which the payout of medals by the payout device is completed.

In this example, since all the medals have been paid out by the payout device, the state of the payout device is changed from being paid out to being not being paid out, the payout by the payout device is stopped, and the number of stored medals is displayed on the storage number display. Displays the number 0 indicating that is 0.

In this example, since all the medals have been paid out by the payout device, the display device starts displaying the demo animation suggesting that the game is in a non-gaming state, and the lamp and the reel back lamp are demonstrating. Light is output in a demo light emission mode to notify that.

In addition, when the payout of medals is completed, the payout completion sound (first sound. In this example, "Piron Piron Piron" sound effect and "Come again"" will be notified from the speaker that the payout has been completed. The output of voice) is started.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment has a payout means (for example, a payout device) capable of paying out a game medium (for example, a medal) and the game. It is a game table provided with a sound output means (for example, a speaker) capable of outputting a payout sound during the payout period of the medium, and the payout means is disconnected and restored during the execution of the payout of the game medium. In this case, it is a means capable of executing the rest of the payout, and the sound output means does not output the payout sound during the execution of the rest of the payout by the payout means (during the operation of the payout means) (for example, payout). It is a means (which does not output a sound signal), the sound output means is a means capable of outputting a first sound (for example, a payout completed sound) at the end of settlement, and the sound output means is based on the payout means. The gaming table is characterized in that it is a means capable of outputting the first sound after the completion of the remaining execution of the payout (for example, after the completion of the payout shown in FIGS. 7 (1) and 7 (d)).

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, the payout sound by the speaker and the operation sound of the payout by the payout means can be confirmed without BGM. Therefore, the clerk of the game store can use the payout means outside the business hours. Whether or not it is operating normally can be easily confirmed by the operation sound, and during business hours, the clerk of the amusement store can notice that an illegal payout has occurred by a fraudulent person, and the fraudulent act. Can be prevented in advance. In addition, since the first sound can be output after the remaining execution of the payout by the payout means is completed, the first sound (payment completion sound) is output when an illegal payout is executed by a fraudulent person. Therefore, the clerk of the amusement store may easily notice the fraudulent activity and prevent the fraudulent activity.

Further, a display means (for example, a display device) capable of displaying a third background display (for example, a normal background display) is provided, and the display means is used for at least a part of the remaining execution of the payout period (hereinafter, hereinafter, the display device). It is referred to as a "second period". For example, after the power is restored as shown in FIGS. 7 (1) and 7 (c) and before the completion of payout shown in FIGS. 7 (1) and 7 (d), the third background display can be displayed. It may be a means.

Further, the display means may be a means capable of displaying a fourth background display (for example, a display in preparation) in a period before the second period.

Further, the rest of the payout may be executed during the display of the fourth background display (all or a part of the period).

<Disbursement / Modification D after power failure / recovery>
FIG. 7 (2) is a diagram showing in chronological order the processing such as payout and error notification before and after the power failure / recovery of the slot machine according to the modified example D.

In this example, before the settlement button 134 is pressed as shown in FIGS. (2) and (a), the normal background display is displayed on the display device, the normal BGM is output from the speaker, and the normal light is emitted from the lamp or the reel back lamp. Light is output in the mode. In addition, since 50 medals are stored, the number 50 is displayed on the stored number display, and since the medals are not being paid out, the state of the payout device is not being paid out, and the payout number display device. The display is not executed in.

The state shown in FIGS. 7 (2) and 7 (a) is a state in which the operation of pressing the settlement button 134 is accepted during the game and the payout of the stored medals is started.

In this example, when the operation of pressing the settlement button 134 is accepted, the state of the payout device is changed from non-payout to payout, the payout device starts paying out medals, and the payout device pays out medals. During the period, the payout sound (for example, the sound effect "Piro Piro ...") is output from the speaker.

Further, in the stored number display, each time one medal is paid out by the payout device, the number of the stored number display indicating the stored number is subtracted by 1 and displayed as 49 → 48 → 47 → ... At the same time, the lamp (first light emitting means) outputs light in a light emitting mode during payment (first mode, for example, blinking red) for notifying that the payout is being executed (payment in progress).

Even during the medal payout period, the display device displays the normal background, the speaker outputs the normal BGM, and the reel back lamp outputs the light in the normal light emitting mode.

The following states shown in FIGS. 7 (2) and 7 (b) are states in which a power failure has occurred (a state in which the energization of the slot machine 100 is cut off).

In the same state, since the supply of power to various devices is stopped, the display device displays the normal background, the speaker outputs the normal BGM and payout sound, the lamp outputs the light in the light emitting mode during settlement, and the reel back lamp normally outputs the light. The output of the light in the light emitting mode, the display of the number of stored sheets by the stored number display, and the payout of the medals by the payout device are not executed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 7 (2) and 7 (c) are states in which power is restored (a state in which energization to the slot machine 100 is resumed).

In this example, a preparation display (fourth background display. For example, the character display "preparing" is displayed to notify that various devices (display devices, etc.) are being prepared in the display device when the power is restored. After starting the display of (including display), until the recovery period of the display device ends (until the initial setting of the display device after power recovery is completed), the normal background display by the display device, the normal BGM and the payout sound by the speaker Do not start (restart) the output, the output of the light in the light emitting mode during settlement by the lamp, the output of the light in the normal light emitting mode by the reel back lamp, the display of the number of stored sheets by the stored number display, and the payout of the medal by the payout device. It is configured in.

The following states shown in FIGS. 7 (2) and 7 (d) are states in which the recovery period of the display device has ended (state in which the preparation display has ended).

In this example, when the return period of the display device ends, the display device normally starts (restarts) the background display (third background display) and the payout of medals by the payout device, while the medals by this payout device are started (restarted). During the period during which the payout is being executed, the payout sound from the speaker is not output.

In addition, during the period in which the payout device is executing (restarting) the rest of the payout (in this example, the payout of the remaining 47 medals), the speaker notifies that the power has been turned on (recovered). In addition to outputting the input sound, the storage number display indicates the number of stored medals, such as 47 → 46 → 45 → ... 2 → 1 → 0, each time one medal is paid out by the payout device. By subtracting the displayed number by 1 and displaying it, the stored number display is executed during the remaining execution of the payout by the payout device.

Further, upon the end of the return period of the display device, the output of the light in the light emitting mode during the settlement by the lamp and the output of the light in the normal light emitting mode by the reel back lamp are executed (restarted). The trigger for resuming the rest of the payout is not limited to the end of the return period of the display device. May be the case when is completed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 7 (2) and 7 (e) are states in which the payout of medals by the payout device is completed.

In this example, since all the medals have been paid out by the payout device, the state of the payout device is changed from being paid out to being not being paid out, the payout by the payout device is stopped, and the number of stored medals is displayed on the storage number display. Displays the number 0 indicating that is 0.

In this example, since all the medals have been paid out by the payout device, the display device starts displaying the demo animation, and the reel back lamp outputs light in a demo light emission mode to notify that the demo is in progress. do.

In addition, when the payout of medals is completed, the speaker will start outputting a payout completion sound (first sound, in this example, a voice such as "Come again") to notify that the payout has been completed. During the output of this payout completion sound, the power-on sound for notifying that the power has been turned on (restored) is output from the speaker.

The game console according to this example is shown in the fourth background display (for example, in preparation display) (for example, after the power is restored shown in FIGS. 7 (2) and 7 (c)). It is configured so that the rest of the payout is not executed during the period until the payout starts.

Further, the sound output means performs the rest of the payout by the payout means (all or a part of the period) (for example, the rest of the payout shown in FIGS. 7 (2) and 7 (d)). It is a means capable of outputting a power-on sound during (during the execution period), and the sound output means is (for example, all or a part of) during the output of the first sound (for example, the payout completion sound). (For example, during the period during which the payout completion sound is being output, which is shown in FIGS. 7 (2) and 7 (e)), the power-on sound may be output.

<Disbursement / Modification E after power failure / recovery>
FIG. 7 (3) is a diagram showing the processes such as payout and error notification before and after the power failure / recovery of the slot machine according to the modified example E in chronological order.

In this example, before the settlement button 134 is pressed as shown in FIGS. (3) and (a), the normal background display is displayed on the display device, the normal BGM is output from the speaker, and the normal light is emitted from the lamp or the reel back lamp. Light is output in the mode. In addition, since 50 medals are stored, the number 50 is displayed on the stored number display, and since the medals are not being paid out, the state of the payout device is not being paid out, and the payout number display device. The display is not executed in.

The state shown in FIGS. 7 (3) and 7 (a) is a state in which the operation of pressing the settlement button 134 is accepted during the game and the payout of the stored medals is started.

In this example, when the operation of pressing the settlement button 134 is accepted, the state of the payout device is changed from non-payout to payout, the payout device starts paying out medals, and the payout device pays out medals. During the period, the payout sound (for example, the sound effect "Piro Piro ...") is output from the speaker.

Further, in the stored number display, each time one medal is paid out by the payout device, the number of the stored number display indicating the stored number is subtracted by 1 and displayed as 49 → 48 → 47 → ... At the same time, the lamp (first light emitting means) outputs light in a light emitting mode during payment (first mode, for example, blinking red) for notifying that the payout is being executed (payment in progress).

Even during the medal payout period, the display device is configured to continue the normal background display and the reel back lamp to output the light in the normal light emitting mode, while the speaker is configured to stop the output of the normal BGM. There is.

The following states shown in FIGS. 7 (3) and 7 (b) are states in which a power failure has occurred (a state in which the energization of the slot machine 100 is cut off).

In the same state, since the supply of power to various devices is stopped, the normal background display by the display device, the output of the payout sound by the speaker, the light output of the light emitting mode during the settlement by the lamp, and the normal light emitting mode by the reel back lamp. The output of light, the display of the number of stored sheets by the stored number display, and the payout of medals by the payout device are not executed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 7 (3) and 7 (c) are states in which power is restored (a state in which energization to the slot machine 100 is resumed).

In this example, when the power is restored, the display device starts displaying a black background display (first background display) in which the entire display area is black (first color), and a chance button lamp (book). In the example, after the light is output from the lamps of the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 in the normal light emitting mode (in this example, the lamp is lit in yellow), until the recovery period of the display device is completed (after power restoration). (Until the initial setting of the display device is completed), the normal background display by the display device, the output of the normal BGM and payout sound by the speaker, the light output of the light emission mode during settlement by the lamp, the light of the normal light emission mode by the reel back lamp It is configured so that the output, the display of the number of stored sheets by the stored number display, and the payout of the medal by the payout device are not started (restarted).

The state shown in FIGS. 7 (3) and 7 (d) that follows is a blue background display (second color) in which all the display areas are blue (second color) instead of the black background display (first background display) in the display device. The display of the second background display) has started.

In this example, in the display device, the display of the blue background display (second background display) is started instead of the black background display (first background display), and the normal light emission mode by the chance button lamp is started. The light output is stopped. The trigger for starting the display of the blue background display (second background display) is not particularly limited, and for example, when the initial setting of the display device after the power recovery is completed or for a certain time (for example) after the power recovery. It may be the case that 10 seconds) has elapsed, or the preparation of the payout device is completed after the power is restored.

The following states shown in FIGS. 7 (3) and 7 (e) are states in which the payout of medals by the payout device is resumed.

In this example, when the payout of medals is resumed by the payout device, the display device starts the normal background display (third background display) instead of the blue background display (second background display). During the period when the medal is paid out by the payout device, the payout sound by the speaker is not output.

Further, during the period in which the remaining payout (in this example, the payout of the remaining 47 medals) is being executed (restarted) by the payout device, one medal is paid out by the payout device on the stored number display. By subtracting the number of the number of stored sheets indicating the number of stored items by 1 and displaying it as 47 → 46 → 45 → ... 2 → 1 → 0 each time, the rest of the payout by the payout device is being executed. Executes the display of the number of stored sheets.

Further, the output of the light in the normal light emitting mode by the lamp or the reel back lamp is started (restarted) when the payout of the medal is restarted by the payout device. The opportunity to resume the payout of medals by the payout device is not particularly limited, and for example, when the initial setting of the display device after the power recovery is completed or a certain time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the power recovery. This may be the case, or the preparation of the payout device is completed after the power is restored.

The following states shown in FIGS. 7 (3) and 7 (f) are states in which the payout of medals by the payout device is completed.

In this example, since all the medals have been paid out by the payout device, the state of the payout device is changed from being paid out to being not being paid out, the payout by the payout device is stopped, and the number of stored medals is displayed on the storage number display. Displays the number 0 indicating that is 0.

In this example, when the payout of the medal is completed, a part of the payout completion sound (in this example, the sound effect "Piro Piro ...") that notifies the completion of the payout from the speaker (first sound. Book). In the example, the output of the sound effect (sound effect such as “pylon”) is started, and the output of the light in the normal light emitting mode by the lamp or the reel back lamp is continued.

<Disbursement / Modification F after power failure / recovery>
FIG. 7 (4) is a diagram showing in chronological order the processing such as payout and error notification before and after the power failure / recovery of the slot machine according to the modified example F. Since the states shown in FIGS. (3) (a) to 7 (e) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 7 (3) (a) to 7 (e), the description thereof will be omitted.

The state shown in FIGS. 7 (4) and 7 (e) is a state in which the payout of medals by the payout device is resumed.

In this example, even if the setting key (operating means) is operated (rotated) from off (first state) to on (second state) during the rest of the payout by the payout device. It is configured not to shift to the setting confirmation mode during the remaining execution of the payout, but to shift to the setting confirmation mode when the remaining execution of the payout is completed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 7 (4) and 7 (f) are states in which the payout of medals by the payout device is completed.

In this example, since all the medals have been paid out by the payout device, the state of the payout device is changed from being paid out to being not being paid out, the payout by the payout device is stopped, and the number of stored medals is displayed on the storage number display. Displays the number 0 indicating that is 0.

Further, in this example, when the payout of medals is completed, the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode, and the set value is displayed on the 7-segment display (first display means, not shown) mounted on the main board. So, do not output a part (first sound. In this example, a sound effect such as "Piron") of the payout completion sound (in this example, the sound effect "Piro Piro ...") that notifies that the payout is completed. It is configured in.

In the setting confirmation mode, an example of displaying the set value using the 7-segment display (first display means) is shown, but in addition to (or instead of) the display, a payout number display is used. The set value may be displayed. In addition, when the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode, the liquid crystal display device (second display means) is used to display a dedicated display that can be displayed only in the setting confirmation mode (for example, an operation history display that displays the operation history of the operation means). , Display during setting confirmation to notify that the mode is in the setting confirmation mode) may be displayed.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment has a payout means (for example, a payout device) capable of paying out a game medium (for example, a medal) and the game. A sound output means (for example, a speaker) capable of outputting the output sound during the period of delivery of the medium, and an operation that can be operated from one of the first state (for example, off) and the second state (for example, on) to the other. A game table including means (for example, a setting key), wherein the payout means is a means capable of executing the rest of the payout when the power is cut off and restored during the payout of the game medium. The sound output means is a means that does not output the payout sound (for example, does not output the audio signal of the payout sound) while the remaining payout by the payout means is being executed (during the operation of the payout means). When the operating means is operated from the first state to the second state, it is possible to shift to the setting confirmation mode (a state in which the set value can be confirmed), and the remaining execution of the payout by the payout means ( For example, when the operating means is operated from the first state to the second state during the period during which the remaining 47 medals are being paid out as shown in FIGS. 7 (5) and 7 (e). The gaming table is characterized in that it does not shift to the setting confirmation mode during the remaining execution of the payout, and shifts to the setting confirmation mode when the remaining execution of the payout is completed.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, the payout sound by the speaker and the operation sound of the payout by the payout means can be confirmed without BGM. Therefore, the clerk of the game store can use the payout means outside the business hours. Whether or not it is operating normally can be easily confirmed by the operation sound, and during business hours, the clerk of the amusement store can notice that an illegal payout has occurred by a fraudulent person, and the fraudulent act. Can be prevented in advance. Further, if the operating means is operated from the first state to the second state during the execution of the rest of the payout by the payout means, the setting confirmation mode is not entered during the rest of the payout, and the rest of the payout is performed. When the execution of is completed, the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode, so that the store clerk can perform the setting confirmation work after completing the inspection of the game console (checking the operation of the hopper, etc.), which improves the convenience of the store clerk. Can be enhanced.

Further, the sound output means is a means capable of outputting the first sound (for example, a part of the payout completion sound) at the end of the settlement, and the sound output means is the execution of the rest of the payout by the payout means. It is a means capable of outputting the first sound after completion (for example, after the completion of payout shown in FIGS. 7 (3) and 7 (f)), and the sound output means is set when the remaining execution of the payout is completed. When shifting to the confirmation mode (for example, after the payment is completed after shifting to the setting confirmation mode shown in FIGS. 7 (4) and 7 (f)), the first sound may not be output.

Further, the first display means (for example, a 7-segment display) may be provided, and the first display means may be a means capable of displaying the set value when the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode.

Further, a second display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) is provided, and the second display means is a dedicated display that can be displayed only in the setting confirmation mode when the setting confirmation mode is entered (for example, operation of the operation means). It may be a means for displaying an operation history display (display during setting confirmation to notify that the mode is in the setting confirmation mode) for displaying the history.

<Disbursement after power failure / recovery / Modification G>
FIG. 8 (1) is a diagram showing in chronological order the processing such as payout and error notification before and after the power failure / recovery of the slot machine according to the modified example G.

In this example, before the settlement button 134 is pressed as shown in FIGS. (1) and (a), the normal background display is displayed on the display device, the normal BGM is output from the speaker, and the normal light is emitted from the lamp or the reel back lamp. Light is output in the mode. In addition, since 50 medals are stored, the number 50 is displayed on the stored number display, and since the medals are not being paid out, the state of the payout device is not being paid out, and the payout number display device. The display is not executed in.

The state shown in FIGS. 8 (1) and 8 (a) is a state in which the operation of pressing the settlement button 134 is accepted during the game and the payout of the stored medals is started.

In this example, when the operation of pressing the settlement button 134 is accepted, the state of the payout device is changed from non-payout to payout, the payout device starts paying out medals, and the payout device pays out medals. During the period, the payout sound (for example, the sound effect "Piro Piro ...") is output from the speaker.

Further, in the stored number display, each time one medal is paid out by the payout device, the number of the stored number display indicating the stored number is subtracted by 1 and displayed as 49 → 48 → 47 → ... At the same time, the lamp (first light emitting means) outputs light in a light emitting mode during payment (first mode, for example, blinking red) for notifying that the payout is being executed (payment in progress).

Even during the medal payout period, the display device displays the normal background, the speaker outputs the normal BGM, and the reel back lamp outputs the light in the normal light emitting mode.

The following states shown in FIGS. 8 (1) and 8 (b) are states in which a power failure has occurred (a state in which the energization of the slot machine 100 is cut off).

In the same state, since the supply of power to various devices is stopped, the display device displays the normal background, the speaker outputs the normal BGM and payout sound, the lamp outputs the light in the light emitting mode during settlement, and the reel back lamp normally outputs the light. The output of the light in the light emitting mode, the display of the number of stored sheets by the stored number display, and the payout of the medals by the payout device are not executed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 8 (1) and 8 (c) are states in which power is restored (a state in which energization to the slot machine 100 is resumed).

In this example, in the case of power recovery, the display device is in preparation to notify that various devices (display devices, etc.) are being prepared instead of the normal background display before the power failure (fourth background display). For example, while starting the display (display including the character display of "preparing"), the normal BGM and payout sound output by the speaker, the light output of the light emitting mode during settlement by the lamp, and the normal light emitting mode by the reel back lamp. The light output, the number of stored sheets displayed by the stored number display, and the payout of medals by the payout device are not started (restarted).

The following states shown in FIGS. 8 (1) and 8 (d) are states in which the recovery period of the display device has ended (state in which the preparation display has ended).

In this example, when the return period of the display device ends, the display device starts the power-on background display to notify that the power has been turned on (restored) instead of the preparation display, and also starts the power-on power supply. Outputs a power-on sound to notify that the power has been turned on (restored), and starts (restarts) the payout of medals by the payout device, while the payout of medals by this payout device is being executed. The period during which the payout sound from the speaker is not output.

In addition, during the period in which the remaining payout (in this example, the payout of the remaining 47 medals) is being executed (restarted) by the payout device, each time one medal is paid out by the payout device on the stored number display. By subtracting the number of the number of stored sheets indicating the number of stored items by 1 and displaying it as 47 → 46 → 45 → ... 2 → 1 → 0, during the remaining execution of the payout by the payout device. Display the number of stored sheets.

Further, upon the end of the return period of the display device, the output of the light in the light emitting mode during the settlement by the lamp and the output of the light in the normal light emitting mode by the reel back lamp are started (restarted).

Further, in this example, the setting key (operation means) is operated (rotation operation) from off (first state) to on (second state) during the rest of the payout by the payout device. However, it is configured not to shift to the setting confirmation mode during the rest of the payout.

The following states shown in FIGS. 8 (1) and 8 (e) are states in which the payout of medals by the payout device is completed.

In this example, since all the medals have been paid out by the payout device, the state of the payout device is changed from being paid out to being not being paid out, the payout by the payout device is stopped, and the number of stored medals is displayed on the storage number display. Displays the number 0 indicating that is 0.

In this example, since all the medals have been paid out by the payout device, the display device starts displaying the demo animation, and the lamp outputs light in a demo light emission mode notifying that the demo is in progress.

In addition, while continuing to output the power-on sound from the speaker, the payout completion sound (first sound. In this example, "coming again" is used to notify the speaker that the payout has been completed, triggered by the completion of the payout of the medal. Start outputting voice) such as "Tene".

The following states shown in FIGS. 8 (1) and 8 (f) are states in which the front door 102 is open (door open state).

In this example, when the front door 102 is opened, the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode, and the display device starts the setting confirmation display for notifying that the setting confirmation mode is in progress, and the speaker is in the setting confirmation mode. A setting confirmation sound is output to notify that the number is, and a numerical value (6 in this example) indicating the current set value (set value 6 in this example) is displayed on the payout number display, and the setting is made from the lamp. Setting to notify that the confirmation mode is in the confirmation Light is output in the light emission mode.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment has a payout means (for example, a payout device) capable of paying out a game medium (for example, a medal) and the game. A sound output means (for example, a speaker) capable of outputting the output sound during the period of delivery of the medium, and an operation that can be operated from one of the first state (for example, off) and the second state (for example, on) to the other. A game table including means (for example, a setting key), wherein the payout means is a means capable of executing the rest of the payout when the power is cut off and restored during the payout of the game medium. The sound output means is a means that does not output the payout sound (for example, does not output the audio signal of the payout sound) while the remaining payout by the payout means is being executed (during the operation of the payout means). When the operating means is operated from the first state to the second state, it is possible to shift to the setting confirmation mode (a state in which the set value can be confirmed), and the remaining execution of the payout by the payout means ( For example, when the operating means is operated from the first state to the second state during the period during which the remaining 47 medals are being paid out as shown in FIGS. 7 (5) and 7 (e). The game console is characterized in that it does not shift to the setting confirmation mode during the remaining execution of the payout, but shifts to the setting confirmation mode when the door is open after the remaining execution of the payout is completed. be.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, the payout sound by the speaker and the operation sound of the payout by the payout means can be confirmed without BGM. Therefore, the clerk of the game store can use the payout means outside the business hours. Whether or not it is operating normally can be easily confirmed by the operation sound, and during business hours, the clerk of the amusement store can notice that an illegal payout has occurred by a fraudulent person, and the fraudulent act. Can be prevented in advance. Further, if the operating means is operated from the first state to the second state during the remaining execution of the payout by the payout means, and the door is open after the remaining execution of the payout is completed, the setting confirmation is performed. Since the mode is changed, the clerk of the game store can check the settings after completing the inspection of the game table (checking the operation of the hopper, etc.), and the convenience of the clerk can be improved.

Further, the sound output means is a means capable of outputting a first sound (for example, a payout completion sound) at the end of settlement, and the sound output means is after the completion of the remaining execution of the payout by the payout means (for example). For example, it is a means capable of outputting the first sound at the time of completion of payout shown in FIGS. 8 (1) and 8 (e), and the sound output means enters the setting confirmation mode when the remaining execution of the payout is completed. In the case of transition (for example, the door open state shown in FIGS. 8 (1) and 8 (f)), the means may be a means that does not output the first sound.

Further, the first display means (for example, a 7-segment display) may be provided, and the first display means may be a means capable of displaying the set value when the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode.

Further, a second display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) is provided, and the second display means is a dedicated display that can be displayed only in the setting confirmation mode when the setting confirmation mode is entered (for example, operation of the operation means). It may be a means for displaying an operation history display (display during setting confirmation to notify that the mode is in the setting confirmation mode) for displaying the history.

<Disbursement / Modification H after power failure / recovery>
FIG. 8 (2) is a diagram showing in chronological order the processing such as payout and error notification before and after the power failure / recovery of the slot machine according to the modified example H.

In this example, before the operation of pressing the settlement button 134 shown in FIGS. (2) and (a), the display device displays the normal background display, the speaker outputs the normal BGM, and the lamp emits light in the normal light emitting mode. The light is output from the reel back lamp (second light emitting means) in a normal light emitting mode (second mode, for example, output of blue light). In addition, since 50 medals are stored, the number 50 is displayed on the stored number display, and since the medals are not being paid out, the state of the payout device is not being paid out, and the payout number display device. The display is not executed in.

The state shown in FIGS. 8 (2) and 8 (a) is a state in which the operation of pressing the settlement button 134 is accepted during the game and the payout of the stored medals is started.

In this example, when the operation of pressing the settlement button 134 is accepted, the state of the payout device is changed from non-payout to payout, the payout device starts paying out medals, and the payout device pays out medals. During the period, the speaker (sound output means) pays out a sound (for example, a sound effect of "piro-piro ...") and a sound during settlement (second sound, for example, "payment in progress") that notifies that the settlement is in progress. Audio) is output.

Further, in the stored number display, each time one medal is paid out by the payout device, the number of the stored number display indicating the stored number is subtracted by 1 and displayed as 49 → 48 → 47 → ... At the same time, the lamp (first light emitting means) outputs light in a light emitting mode during payment (first mode, for example, blinking red) for notifying that the payout is being executed (payment in progress).

Even during the medal payout period, the display device is configured to continue the normal background display and the reel back lamp (second light emitting means) to output the light in the normal light emitting mode (second mode). ing.

The following states shown in FIGS. 8 (2) and 8 (b) are states in which a power failure has occurred (a state in which the energization of the slot machine 100 is cut off).

In the same state, since the supply of power to various devices is stopped, the normal background display by the display device, the output of the payout sound and the settlement sound by the speaker, the light output of the light emission mode during the settlement by the lamp, and the reel back lamp are used. The output of light in the normal light emitting mode, the display of the number of stored sheets by the stored number display, and the payout of medals by the payout device are not executed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 8 (2) and 8 (c) are states in which power is restored (a state in which energization to the slot machine 100 is resumed).

In this example, when the power is restored, the display device displays the demo animation and the power saving mode setting display (for example, "for example," to notify that the power saving mode is set, instead of the normal background display before the power failure. The display of the image including the character string "Power saving mode is being set") is started, and the lamp starts to output the light of the normal light emitting mode instead of the light of the light emitting mode during payout before the power failure, and the reel back. While starting (resuming) the output of light in the normal light emission mode by the lamp, the display device displays the normal background, the speaker outputs the payout sound and the checkout sound, the stored number indicator displays the number of stored sheets, and the payout device displays the medal. All payouts are configured so that they do not start (restart).

The following states shown in FIGS. 8 (2) and 8 (d) are states in which the payout device has started paying out medals (for example, a state in which a certain time has passed since the power was restored).

In this example, when a certain time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the power restoration, the payout of medals by the payout device is started (restarted), while the payout of medals by this payout device is executed. During the period, the speaker outputs the payout sound and the checkout sound, the lamp (first light emitting means) outputs the light in the checkout mode (first mode, for example, blinking red), and the reel back. The period during which the output of the light of the normal light emitting mode (second mode) by the lamp (second light emitting means) is not started.

In addition, during the period when the payout device is executing (restarting) the rest of the payout (in this example, the payout of the remaining 47 medals), the display device displays the demo animation and the power saving mode setting display. On the storage number display, each time one medal is paid out by the payout device, the number of stored medals is displayed as 47 → 46 → 45 → ... 2 → 1 → 0. By subtracting the numbers by 1 and displaying them, the number of stored sheets is displayed during the remaining execution of the payout by the payout device.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment has a payout means (for example, a payout device) capable of paying out a game medium (for example, a medal) and the game. A game table including a sound output means (for example, a speaker) capable of outputting a payout sound during a period of paying out the medium and a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device), wherein the payout means is the game medium. The sound output means is a means capable of executing the rest of the payout when the power is cut off and restored during the execution of the payout, and the sound output means is executing the rest of the payout by the payout means (during the operation of the payout means). It is a means that does not output the payout sound (for example, does not output the audio signal of the payout sound), and the display means is a demo animation (for example, before the remaining execution of the payout by the payout means is started). It is a game table characterized by being a means capable of starting display (a production suggesting that the player is in a non-game state).

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, the payout sound by the speaker and the operation sound of the payout by the payout means can be confirmed without BGM. Therefore, the clerk of the game store can use the payout means outside the business hours. Whether or not it is operating normally can be easily confirmed by the operation sound, and during business hours, the clerk of the amusement store can notice that an illegal payout has occurred by a fraudulent person, and the fraudulent act. Can be prevented in advance. In addition, since the display means can start displaying the demo animation before the remaining execution of the payout by the payout means is started, the operation of the display means can be confirmed without payout sound or BGM by the speaker. It is possible to confirm the operation sound of the payout by the payout means, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the clerk.

Further, the sound output means is a means capable of outputting a second sound (for example, a sound being settled) during settlement, and the sound output means is executing (all of) the rest of the payout by the payout means. (For example, during the period during which the remaining 47 medals are being paid out as shown in FIGS. 8 (2) and 8 (d)), the second sound may not be output. It may be some means.

In addition, a first light emitting means (for example, a lamp) capable of emitting light in the first aspect (for example, a light emitting mode during settlement) during (for all periods or a part of the period) the payout of the game medium is being executed. The first light emitting means is a means that may not emit light in the first aspect during the rest of the payout by the payout means (all or part of the period). You may.

In addition, when the first light emitting means does not emit light in the first aspect during the rest of the payout by the payout means (all or a part of the period), the first light emitting means. A means (or a means that may emit light in a third aspect) that is different from the aspect and that emits light in a third aspect (eg, flashing orange, suggesting that the rest of the payout is being performed). You may.

In addition, a second light emitting means (for example, a reel back lamp) capable of emitting light in a second aspect (for example, a normal light emitting mode) during (for all periods or a part of the period) the payout of the game medium is being executed. ), The second light emitting means may not emit light in the second aspect during the rest of the payout by the payout means (all or part of the period). There may be.

It should be noted that the second light emitting means does not emit light in the second aspect during (all or a part of the period) the remaining execution of the payout by the payout means. A means (or a means that may emit light in a fourth aspect) that is different from the aspect and that emits light in a fourth aspect (eg, flashing orange, suggesting that the rest of the payout is being performed). You may.

Further, the second light emitting means may be a means capable of emitting light in the second aspect before the remaining execution of the payout by the payout means is started.

<Disbursement / Modification I after power failure / recovery>
FIG. 8 (3) is a diagram showing the processes such as payout and error notification before and after the power failure / recovery of the slot machine according to the modified example I in chronological order.

In this example, before the operation of pressing the settlement button 134 shown in FIGS. (3) and (a), the background display during the continuous effect is displayed on the display device during the execution of the continuous effect performed over a plurality of games. Then, the BGM (background sound, for example, a sound effect suggesting that the continuous production is being executed) is output from the speaker at a volume A louder than the volume B, and is normally output from the lamp or the reel back lamp. Light is output in a light emitting mode. In addition, since 50 medals are stored, the number 50 is displayed on the stored number display, and since the medals are not being paid out, the state of the payout device is not being paid out, and the payout number display device. The display is not executed in.

The state shown in FIGS. 8 (3) and 8 (a) is a state in which the operation of pressing the settlement button 134 is accepted during the game and the payout of the stored medals is started.

In this example, when the operation of pressing the settlement button 134 is accepted, the state of the payout device is changed from non-payout to payout, the payout device starts paying out medals, and the payout device pays out medals. During the period, the speaker (sound output means) pays out a sound (for example, a sound effect of "piro-piro ...") and a sound during settlement (second sound, for example, "payment in progress") that notifies that the medal is being settled. ”) Is output.

Further, in the stored number display, each time one medal is paid out by the payout device, the number of the stored number display indicating the stored number is subtracted by 1 and displayed as 49 → 48 → 47 → ... At the same time, the lamp (first light emitting means) outputs light in a light emitting mode during payment (first mode, for example, blinking red) for notifying that the payout is being executed (payment in progress).

Even during the medal payout period, the display device is configured to continue the background display during continuous production, and the reel back lamp is configured to continue to output the light in the normal light emitting mode.

The following states shown in FIGS. 8 (3) and 8 (b) are states in which a power failure has occurred (a state in which the energization of the slot machine 100 is cut off).

In the same state, since the supply of power to various devices is stopped, the background display during continuous production by the display device, the output of the payout sound and the settlement sound by the speaker, the light output of the light emission mode during the settlement by the lamp, and the reel back. The output of the light in the normal light emitting mode by the lamp, the display of the number of stored sheets by the stored number display, and the payout of the medal by the payout device are not executed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 8 (3) and 8 (c) are states in which power is restored (a state in which energization to the slot machine 100 is resumed).

In this example, when the power is restored, the display device starts (restarts) the background display during continuous production, and starts (restarts) the output of the light in the normal light emitting mode by the lamp or the reel back lamp, while the speaker. It is configured so that the output of the payout sound and the sound during settlement is not started (restarted).

The following states shown in FIGS. 8 (3) and 8 (d) are states in which the payout device has started paying out medals (for example, a state in which a certain time has passed since the power was restored).

In this example, when a certain time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the power restoration, the payout of medals by the payout device is started (restarted), while the payout of medals by this payout device is executed. During the period, the output of the payout sound and the checkout sound by the speaker is not started.

In addition, during the period in which the remaining payout (in this example, the payout of the remaining 47 medals) is being executed (restarted) by the payout device, the background display during continuous production by the display device and the normal by the lamp or reel back lamp. While continuing to output the light in the light emitting mode, in the storage number display, each time one medal is paid out by the payout device, the number of stored medals is 47 → 46 → 45 → ... 2 → 1 → 0. By subtracting the number of the stored number display indicating the above by 1 and displaying it, the stored number display is executed during the remaining execution of the payout by the payout device.

The following states shown in FIGS. 8 (3) and 8 (e) are states in which the payout of medals by the payout device is completed.

In this example, since all the medals have been paid out by the payout device, the state of the payout device is changed from being paid out to being not being paid out, the payout by the payout device is stopped, and the number of stored medals is displayed on the storage number display. Displays the number 0 indicating that is 0.

Further, when the payout of medals is completed, the volume of the continuous production BGM (background sound) output from the speaker at the volume A is changed to the volume B having a volume lower than the volume A. The volume of the BGM (background sound) during continuous production, which was output from the speaker at the volume A, may be changed to the volume C, which is louder than the volume A.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment has a payout means (for example, a payout device) capable of paying out a game medium (for example, a medal) and the game. It is a game table provided with a sound output means (for example, a speaker) capable of outputting a payout sound during the payout period of the medium, and the payout means is disconnected and restored during the execution of the payout of the game medium. In this case, it is a means capable of executing the rest of the payout, and the sound output means does not output the payout sound during the execution of the rest of the payout by the payout means (during the operation of the payout means) (for example, payout). It is a means (which does not output a sound signal), and the sound output means is a means capable of outputting a background sound (for example, BGM during continuous production), and the volume of the background sound after the remaining execution of the payout (for example, BGM during continuous production). For example, the volume B) is a game table characterized in that the volume B) is lower than the volume of the background sound (for example, the volume A) before the execution of the payout in which the power interruption / recovery occurs.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, the payout sound by the speaker and the operation sound of the payout by the payout means can be confirmed without BGM. Therefore, the clerk of the game store can use the payout means outside the business hours. Whether or not it is operating normally can be easily confirmed by the operation sound, and during business hours, the clerk of the amusement store can notice that an illegal payout has occurred by a fraudulent person, and the fraudulent act. Can be prevented in advance. In addition, since the volume of the background sound after the remaining execution of the payout is lower than the volume of the background sound before the execution of the payout in which the power is cut off and restored, the payout sound by the speaker or the payout by the payout means is not accompanied by BGM. After confirming the operation sound of, it is possible to grasp that the payout is completed by lowering the volume of the background sound, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the clerk.

Further, the background sound is used during (all periods) during continuous production (for example, production performed over a plurality of games, production during AT, production during bonus, production during replay establishment), or one. It may be a sound output during the period of the part).

Further, the sound output means is performing the rest of the payout by the payout means (all or a part of the period) (for example, the remaining medals 47 shown in FIGS. 8 (3) and 8 (d)). It may be a means that does not output the background sound during the period during which the payout of the sheets is being executed.

The sound output means may be a means that outputs the background sound before the remaining execution of the payout by the payout means, and does not output the background sound when the remaining execution of the payout is started. ..

Further, the sound output means is a means capable of outputting a second sound (for example, a sound during settlement) during (all or a part of the period) of settlement, and the sound output means is said. The second sound may not be output during the rest of the payout by the payout means (for all or part of the period).

When the sound output means does not output the second sound during the remaining execution of the payout by the payout means (for all or a part of the period), the sound output means is referred to as the second sound. May output a means (or a third sound) that outputs a different third sound (eg, a voice that suggests that the rest of the payout is being performed, such as "restart payout"). Means) may be used.

Further, a first light emitting means (for example, a lamp) capable of emitting light in the first aspect (for example, a light emitting mode during settlement) is provided during the payout period of the game medium, and the first light emitting means is the payout means. It may be a means that does not emit light in the first aspect during the remaining execution of the payout by (all or part of the period).

In addition, when the first light emitting means does not emit light in the first aspect during the rest of the payout by the payout means (all or a part of the period), the first light emitting means. A means (or a means that may emit light in the second aspect) that is different from the aspect and emits light in a second aspect (eg, flashing orange, suggesting that the rest of the payout is being performed). You may.

<Disbursement / Modification J after power failure / recovery>
FIG. 8 (4) is a diagram showing the processes such as payout and error notification before and after the power failure / recovery of the slot machine according to the modified example J in chronological order.

In this example, before the third stop operation shown in FIGS. (4) and (a), the normal background display is displayed on the display device, the normal BGM (background sound) is output from the speaker, and the lamp or reel back lamp. Light is normally output in a light emitting mode. In addition, since 50 medals are stored, the number 50 is displayed on the stored number display, and since the medals are not being paid out, the state of the payout device is not being paid out, and the payout number display device. The display is not executed in.

The state shown in FIGS. 8 (4) and 8 (a) is a state in which the third stop operation is accepted, a small winning combination (in this example, a bell role) is won, and medals are started to be paid out based on the small winning combination.

In this example, the state of the payout device is changed from non-payout to payout, and a certain number of medals (8 in this example, corresponding to the bell role) are paid out by the payout device, triggered by the small winning combination. At the same time as the start, during the payout period of the medal by the payout device, the payout sound (for example, the sound effect of "Piro Piro ...") and the small role (in this example, the bell role) were won from the speaker (sound output means). Is output as a winning combination stop sound (in this example, a bell stop sound).

In addition, in the payout number display, each time one medal is paid out by the payout device, the number of the payout number display indicating the number of medals to be paid out is added by one, such as 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 .... In addition to displaying, the display device displays a small role winning production animation (first animation, in this example, a bell winning production animation) that notifies that a small role (bell role in this example) has been won. It starts and outputs light from the lamp (first light emitting means) in the payout light emitting mode (third mode, for example, blinking yellow) notifying that the payout based on the small winning combination is being executed.

It should be noted that even during the medal payout period, the output of light in the normal light emitting mode of the reel back lamp is configured to continue.

The following states shown in FIGS. 8 (4) and 8 (b) are states in which a power failure has occurred (a state in which the energization of the slot machine 100 is cut off).

In the same state, since the supply of power to various devices is stopped, the display device displays the bell winning effect animation, the speaker outputs the payout sound and bell stop sound, the lamp outputs the light in the emission mode during payout, and the reel back lamp. The output of light in the normal light emitting mode, the display of the number of payouts by the payout number display, the display of the number of stored sheets by the stored number display, and the payout of medals by the payout device are not executed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 8 (4) and 8 (c) are states in which power is restored (a state in which energization to the slot machine 100 is resumed).

In this example, when the power is restored, the display device starts displaying the demo animation instead of the bell winning effect animation before the power failure, and the lamp replaces the light in the payout mode before the power failure. Then, the output of the light in the normal light emitting mode is started, and the output of the light in the normal light emitting mode by the reel back lamp is started (restarted), while the output of the payout sound by the speaker, the payout number display by the payout number display, and the storage. It is configured so that neither the display of the number of stored sheets by the number display device nor the payout of medals by the payout device is started (restarted).

The following states shown in FIGS. 8 (4) and 8 (d) are states in which the payout device has started paying out medals (for example, a state in which a certain time has passed since the power was restored).

In this example, when a certain time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the power restoration, the payout of medals by the payout device is started (restarted), while the payout of medals by this payout device is executed. During the period, the output of the payout sound by the speaker is not started.

In addition, during the period in which the payout device is executing (restarting) the rest of the payout (in this example, the rest of the eight medals for which the payout has not been completed), the display device continues to display the demo animation. At the same time, in the payout number display, each time one medal is paid out by the payout device, the number of the payout number display indicating the number of payouts is added by 1 such as 4 → 5 → 6 → 7 → 8 .... By displaying the above, the number of payouts is displayed during the rest of the payouts by the payout device.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment has a payout means (for example, a payout device) capable of paying out a game medium (for example, a medal) and the game. It is a game table provided with a sound output means (for example, a speaker) capable of outputting a payout sound during the payout period of the medium, and the payout means is disconnected and restored during the execution of the payout of the game medium. In this case, it is a means capable of executing the rest of the payout, and the sound output means does not output the payout sound during the execution of the rest of the payout by the payout means (during the operation of the payout means) (for example, payout). It is a game table characterized in that it is a means (which does not output an audio signal of sound), and the payout sound is a sound that may be output during the payout of the game medium based on a small winning combination prize. ..

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, the payout sound by the speaker and the operation sound of the payout by the payout means can be confirmed without BGM. Therefore, the clerk of the game store can use the payout means outside the business hours. Whether or not it is operating normally can be easily confirmed by the operation sound, and during business hours, the clerk of the amusement store can notice that an illegal payout has occurred by a fraudulent person, and the fraudulent act. Can be prevented in advance. In addition, since the payout sound may be output during the payout of the game medium based on the small win, it is possible to check the operation sound of the payout by the payout means even at the time of the small win, which is convenient for the clerk. It can enhance the sex.

In addition, the first animation (for example, a bell winning production animation suggesting that the bell role has been won) during (all or a part of the period) the payout of the game medium based on the small winning combination prize is being executed. The display means is provided with a display means capable of displaying (for example, a liquid crystal display device), and the display means is the first during (all or a part of the period) of the remaining execution of the payout by the payout means. It may be a means of not displaying the rest of the animation.

It should be noted that the display means does not display the rest of the first animation during (all or a part of the period) the rest of the payout by the payout means, and the display means does not display the rest of the first animation. May be a means (or may be) to perform a different animation (eg, a demo animation).

Further, a first light emitting means (for example, a lamp) capable of emitting light in a third aspect (for example, a light emitting mode during payout) is provided during the payout period of the game medium based on the small winning combination, and the first light emission is provided. The means may not emit light in the third aspect (or light emission in the third aspect) during the rest of the payout by the payout means (all or part of the period). (Means that do not) may be used.

In addition, when the first light emitting means does not emit light in the third aspect during the rest of the payout by the payout means (all or a part of the period), the third light emitting means. A means (or a means that may emit light in a fourth aspect) that is different from the aspect and that emits light in a fourth aspect (eg, flashing orange, suggesting that the rest of the payout is being performed). You may.

Further, the sound output means is a means capable of outputting a background sound (for example, a normal BGM output during a normal game), and the sound output means is executing the rest of the payout by the payout means. It may be a means that does not output the background sound for all periods or a part of the period).

The sound output means may be a means that outputs the background sound before the remaining execution of the payout by the payout means, and does not output the background sound when the remaining execution of the payout is started. ..

The configuration of the game console according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the above embodiment. Therefore, for example, the errors that can be notified by the sound output means are not limited to the door open error and the hopper empty error, but include medal insertion abnormalities 1 to 4, medal payout abnormalities 1 to 3, overflow abnormalities, RAM defects, winning abnormalities, and the like. There may be. Further, the payout error related to the payout is not limited to the hopper empty error, and may be, for example, a medal payout abnormality 1 to 3, an overflow abnormality, or the like.

Further, the "silence period" according to the present invention may be a period during which no sound is output by the sound output means. For example, a background sound or a payout sound sound signal is output, but the sound signal is temporarily generated. It may be a period of being cut off (muted).

Further, the "payout number display" according to the present invention is not limited to the subtraction display (example: 50 → 49 → ...), but may be an addition display (example: 1 → 2 → ...).

In the above embodiment, an example of the slot machine 100 using a medal (coin) as a game medium is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball (for example, a pachinko ball) is used as a game medium. It can be applied to slot machines, pachinko machines, arrange ball game machines, rock game machines, smart balls, and the like.

<Pachinko machine>
Next, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 9 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game table on which a player can obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and launches an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, and a door 108 with a ball storage plate. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side) thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation shop.

The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102, having a locking function, and rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 as a base body of a vertically rectangular gaming machine. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk at a store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 has been opened.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. A clerk at a game store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and the speaker 120, the left frame lamp 122L, the right frame lamp 122R, and the upper frame lamp 122U are provided on the front side. Is attached. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. The front frame door 106 corresponds to an example of a door body. In this embodiment, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

The door 108 with a ball storage dish is a door member mounted on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 with respect to the lower side of the main body 104 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage dish is opened by pushing an opening lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. Further, a door sensor 1082 with a ball storage dish for detecting that the door 108 with a ball storage dish has been opened is also provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate includes a ball storage plate 126 capable of storing a plurality of balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and provided with a passage for guiding the balls to the launching device 110. The ball removal button 130 for ejecting the balls stored in the ball storage dish 126 from the ball storage dish 126 by the player's operation, and the ball guided to the launching device 110 by the player's operation to the game area 124 of the game board. The ball launch handle 134, the effect button 136 that changes the effect mode of various effect devices by the operation of the player, the button lamp 138 that is built in the effect button 136 and emits the effect button 136, and the game store. It is provided with a ball lending operation button 140 that gives a ball lending instruction to the installed card unit (CR unit). Further, although not shown in FIG. 1, a return operation button for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance is also provided on the right side of the ball lending operation button 140. Further, it also has an operation key unit 190 in which a cross key and an enter button are arranged.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by a player, and a launching mallet 148 that hits a ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. To prepare for. The launching device 110 directs the ball toward the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the ball launching handle 134 is continuously launched by the player. It is equivalent to an example of a launching means.

<Reception for changing the production mode>
Next, the acceptance of changing the effect mode in the pachinko machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 14.

FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of various displays by the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the pachinko machine 100. Prior to the explanation of the reception for changing the effect mode, various display devices included in the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 10A.

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is configured by an LED in this example. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are configured by LEDs in this example.

The first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 10A indicates that the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is in progress, and the second special figure display device 214 indicates that the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is stopped. The normal map display device 210 indicates that the fluctuation of the normal map is stopped.

The normal map holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved normal map variable games, and in this example, it is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of the normal figure variable games. .. The first special figure hold lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of special figure 1 variable games held, and in this example, the special figure 1 variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). Is possible. Further, the second special figure holding lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of special figure 2 variable games held, and in this example, the special figure 2 variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do.

The first special figure holding lamp 218 shown in FIG. 10A indicates that the number of holdings of the special drawing 1 variable game is four, and the second special figure holding lamp 220 is the special figure 2 variable game. It indicates that the number of holdings is 0, and the normal figure holding lamp 216 indicates that the number of holdings of the normal figure variable game is 0.

The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for displaying various displays used for the decorative design and the effect, and is configured by the liquid crystal display device in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. And the right symbol display area 208c (hereinafter, may be collectively referred to as “decorative symbol display area 208a to 208c”) displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect.

In the special figure hold icon display area arranged at the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 can be displayed, and the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be displayed. In the variable icon display area arranged at the lower center of the above, the variable icon corresponding to the special figure being displayed can be displayed.

The four hold icons H1 to H4 displayed in the special figure hold icon display area shown in FIG. 10A indicate that the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game is four, and the variable icon display area shows. The displayed variable icon C1 indicates that the special figure 1 variable game is in progress.

In the display area arranged on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number display TR1 indicating the hold number of the special figure 1 in conjunction with the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the first special figure display device 212. Special figure 1 4th symbol display TF1 that displays fluctuation and stop of symbols in conjunction with, and special figure 2 hold number display TR2 that shows the number of holds of special figure 2 in conjunction with the 2nd special figure hold lamp 220. , Special figure 2 4th symbol display TF2 that displays fluctuation and stop of the symbol in conjunction with the 2nd special symbol display device 214, and normal figure hold that shows the number of reserved figures in conjunction with the normal figure hold lamp 216. It is possible to display the numerical display NR and the 4th symbol display NF of the general diagram, which displays the fluctuation display and the stop display of the symbol in conjunction with the normal symbol display device 210.

The special figure 1 fourth symbol display TF1 shown in FIG. 10A indicates that the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is in progress, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol display TF2 is in the state of stopping the fluctuation of the special figure 2. It is shown that there is, and the 4th symbol display NF of the normal map indicates that the fluctuation of the normal map is stopped.

Further, the special figure 1 hold number display TR1 shown in FIG. 10A shows that the number of holds of the special figure 1 variable game is four, and the special figure 2 hold number display TR2 is the special figure 2 variable game. It is shown that the holding number is 0, and the holding number display NR of the normal figure indicates that the holding number of the normal figure variable game is 0.

Further, the current effect mode can be displayed in the effect mode display area DM arranged at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the first operation (in this example, the operation) is above the effect mode display area DM. The first operation display SD1 indicating that the effect mode can be switched by the operation of the upper button of the cross key of the key unit 190 can be displayed, and the second operation (book) is below the effect mode display area DM. In the example, the second operation display SD2 indicating that the effect mode can be switched by the operation of the lower button of the cross key of the operation key unit 190 can be displayed.

The display of the effect mode display area DM shown in FIG. 10A indicates that the current effect mode is the effect mode A, and the first operation display SD1 is the first operation (in this example, the operation). It is shown that the effect mode can be switched by the operation of the upper button of the cross key of the key unit 190), and the effect mode is switched by the second operation (in this example, the operation of the lower button of the cross key of the operation key unit 190). It shows that it is possible.

The pachinko machine 100 according to this example has a plurality of types of effect modes in which at least a part of the effect modes are different from each other. For example, the effect mode A (A mode) shown in FIG. 10A is after the power is turned on. This is the default effect mode that is initially set in the above mode, and in the effect mode B (B mode) shown in FIG. This is an easy-to-use production mode. Further, the effect mode α (α mode) shown in FIG. 10 (h) is an effect mode that can be selected only in the big hit game.

The type of the effect mode is not limited to this example, and may be different in the time zone expressed by the background image or the like, for example, the morning mode, the day mode, and the night mode, or the spring mode. , Summer mode, Autumn mode, Winter mode, etc., the seasons expressed by the background image, etc. may be different, and the benefits given to the player, such as low probability mode and high probability mode. The probabilities may be different, or the characters and songs appearing in the production may be different, such as in the palace mode, the princess mode, and the grandfather mode.

<Reception of change in production mode / Display during change in Special Figure 1>
FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of the display during the change in Special Figure 1.

In this example, since the special figure 1 variable game is in progress, the variable icon is displayed in the variable icon display area 283, the variable display of the special figure 1 is executed on the first special figure display device 212, and the special figure 1 fourth is executed. The variable display of the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is executed in the symbol display TF1, and the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 1 is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

Further, by displaying the character string "A mode" in the effect mode display area DM, it is shown that the current effect mode is the effect mode A (in this example, the default effect mode), and the first effect mode is displayed. By displaying the operation display SD1 and the second operation display SD2, it is shown that the effect mode can be switched by operating the up / down buttons of the cross key of the operation key unit 190.

<Reception for changing production mode / Special figure 1 Display during change / Normal reach>
FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of the normal reach during the special figure 1 variation display.

Since this example is the normal reach during the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c correspond to the normal reach instead of the variable display of the decorative symbol described with reference to FIG. 10 (a). The variable display is executed by the symbol combination (in this example, the display of "decoration 4- (changing) -decoration 4").

Further, by displaying the character string "B mode" in the effect mode display area DM, the current effect mode is the effect mode B (in this example, the effect mode in which the advance notice effect by pre-reading the special figure is likely to appear). By displaying the first operation display SD1 and the second operation display SD2, it is shown that the effect mode can be switched by operating the up / down buttons of the cross key of the operation key unit 190. There is.

<Reception for changing production mode / Special figure 1 Display during change / SP reach>
FIG. 10 (c) is a diagram showing an example of SP (special) reach during the special figure 1 variation display.

Since this example is the SP reach during the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display corresponding to the normal reach described with reference to FIG. 10B in the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c (in this example, " In addition to decoration 4- (changing) -display of "decoration 4"), SP reach display SP (in this example, display of an image including the character string "SP reach") suggesting that it is SP reach is executed. is doing.

In addition, the display of the effect mode display area DM, the first operation display SD1, the second operation display SD2, and the display of the hold icons H1 to H4, which were displayed in the normal reach described with reference to FIG. 10B, are all displayed. It is erased and the first operation display SD1 and the second operation display SD2 are hidden.

<Reception of change in production mode / Special figure 1 Display during change / Wipe display after SP reach loss>
FIG. 10 (d) is a diagram showing an example of a wipe display after SP (special) reach loss during the special figure 1 variable display.

In this example, since the hit / fail judgment of the special figure was not won (missing), for example, after performing the SP reach described with reference to FIG. 10 (c), the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c is displayed. In addition to erasing the variation display, a wipe display WP suggesting that the winning / failing determination of the special figure was not won is displayed in the effect display area 208d.

The effect of suggesting that the winning / failing determination of the special figure is not won is not limited to this example, and for example, in addition to (or instead of) the wipe display WP, all of the decorative symbol display devices 208. The display area may be painted black, or a certain operation (for example, closing the door or moving the effect body upward) on a movable body (for example, a door that can be opened / closed or a director that can be moved up and down) (for example) is not shown. You may let me do it.

<Reception of change in production mode / Display when special figure 1 is stopped>
FIG. 10 (e) is a diagram showing an example of the display during stop in Special Figure 1.

In this example, since the special figure 1 variable game is stopped, the variable icon in the variable icon display area is erased, the variable display of the special figure 1 is stopped in the first special figure display device 212, and the special figure 1 first. 4 In the symbol display TF1, the variable display of the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped, and in the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c, in this example, the symbol combination corresponding to the loss (in this example, "decoration 4-decoration 5-" Display of "Decoration 4") is being stopped.

Further, by displaying the character string "A mode" in the effect mode display area DM, it is shown that the current effect mode is the effect mode A (in this example, the default effect mode). By hiding the operation display SD1 and the second operation display SD2 of the above, it is shown that the effect mode cannot be switched.

<Reception of change in production mode / Special figure 1 Display during change / Display during recovery after power failure / recovery>
FIG. 10 (f) is a diagram showing an example of a display during recovery when a power failure / recovery occurs in the display during change in FIG. 1.

In this example, since the special figure 1 variable game was in progress before the power was cut off and the power was restored, the variable display of the special figure 1 was continuously executed on the first special figure display device 212 even after the power was restored. FIG. 1 In the fourth symbol display TF1, the variable display of the fourth symbol in the special figure 1 is continuously executed, and in the effect display area 208d, the returning display RC suggesting that the post-recovery processing is being executed. (In this example, the character string "returning") is displayed. In addition, even if the return display RC displays a black or blue single color image, or displays an animation that increases the gauge display area or increases the% display value according to the time until the return is completed. good.

On the other hand, the variable display of the decorative symbol, the display of the effect mode display area DM, the first operation display SD1 and the second operation display SD2, which were displayed in the special figure 1 changing display described with reference to FIG. 10A. By erasing all the displays of the hold icons H1 to H4 and the variable icon C1 and hiding the first operation display SD1 and the second operation display SD2, it is shown that the effect mode cannot be switched. ..

<Reception of change in production mode / Display during change in Special Figure 2>
FIG. 10 (g) is a diagram showing an example of the display during the change in Special Figure 2.

In this example, since the special figure 2 variable game is in progress, the variable icon C1 is displayed in the variable icon display area, the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed on the second special figure display device 214, and the special figure 2 fourth is executed. The variable display of the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is executed in the symbol display TF2, and the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 2 is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

Further, by displaying the character string "A mode" in the effect mode display area DM, it is shown that the current effect mode is the effect mode A (in this example, the default effect mode), and the first effect mode is displayed. By displaying the operation display SD1 and the second operation display SD2, it is shown that the effect mode can be switched by operating the up / down buttons of the cross key of the operation key unit 190.

In addition, a right-handed display RD (in this example, a character string "right-handed" and a right-pointing arrow "→") is displayed to urge the player to hit right.

<Reception for changing production mode / Display during big hit game>
FIG. 10 (h) is a diagram showing an example of a display during a big hit game.

In this example, since the jackpot game is in progress, the display during the jackpot game suggesting that the jackpot game is in progress is executed in the effect display area 208d, and the right-handed display RD that urges the player to hit right. (In this example, the character string "right-handed" and the right-pointing arrow "→" are displayed).

Further, by displaying the character string "α mode" in the effect mode display area DM, it is shown that the current effect mode is the effect mode α (in this example, the effect mode that can be selected only in the big hit game). At the same time, by displaying the first operation display SD1 and the second operation display SD2, it is shown that the effect mode can be switched by operating the up / down buttons of the cross key of the operation key unit 190.

<Reception of change in production mode / Display of special figure 1 stopped (during change of special figure 2)>
FIG. 10 (i) is a diagram showing an example of the display during the stoppage of the special figure 1 (during the change of the special figure 2).

In this example, since the special figure 1 variable game is stopped, the variable icon C1 in the variable icon display area is erased, the variable display of the special figure 1 is stopped in the first special figure display device 212, and the special figure 1 is stopped. In the fourth symbol display TF1, the variable display of the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped, and in the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c, in this example, the symbol combination corresponding to the loss of the special figure 1 (in this example, "decoration". 4-Display of decoration 5-decoration 4 ”) is being stopped.

Further, since the special figure 2 variable game is also changing, the change display of the special figure 2 is executed on the second special figure display device 214, and the change of the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is executed on the special figure 2 fourth symbol display TF2. The display is running.

Further, by displaying the character string "A mode" in the effect mode display area DM, it is shown that the current effect mode is the effect mode A (in this example, the default effect mode). By hiding the operation display SD1 and the second operation display SD2 of the above, it is shown that the effect mode cannot be switched.

<Reception of change in production mode / Display of special figure 1 stopped (during change of special figure 2)>
FIG. 10 (j) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 2 stopped display (during special figure 1 change).

In this example, since the special figure 2 variable game is stopped, the variable icon C1 in the variable icon display area is erased, the variable display of the special figure 2 is stopped in the second special figure display device 214, and the special figure 2 is stopped. In the fourth symbol display TF2, the variable display of the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, and in the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c, in this example, the symbol combination corresponding to the loss of the special figure 2 (in this example, "decoration". 4-Decoration 5-Display of "Decoration 4") is being stopped, and in the effect display area 208d, the right-handed display RD (in this example, "right-handed") that prompts the player to hit right is executed. And the right-pointing arrow "→" are displayed).

Further, since the special figure 1 variable game is also changing, the change display of the special figure 1 is executed on the first special figure display device 212, and the change of the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is executed on the special figure 1 fourth symbol display TF1. The display is running.

Further, by displaying the character string "A mode" in the effect mode display area DM, it is shown that the current effect mode is the effect mode A (in this example, the default effect mode), and the first effect mode is displayed. By displaying the operation display SD1 and the second operation display SD2, it is shown that the effect mode can be switched by operating the up / down buttons of the cross key of the operation key unit 190.

<Reception of change in production mode / Example 1>
FIG. 11A is a diagram showing an example of a change reception of the effect mode while the special figure 1 is changing and a change reception of the effect mode while the special figure 1 is stopped in chronological order.

Prior to the explanation of the reception for changing the effect mode, the description in the drawing will be described with reference to FIG. 11A. "Operation reception" indicates whether or not the effect mode can be switched, "OK" is a state in which the effect mode can be switched, and "No" is a state in which the effect mode cannot be switched. be. Further, the "button operation" indicates an operation for switching the effect mode, and in this example, it is an operation of the up / down button of the cross key of the operation key unit 190.

The "special symbol 1 display device" indicates the first special symbol display device 212, and the "special symbol 2 display device" indicates the second special symbol display device 214. Further, the "display device" indicates a decorative pattern display device 208. Specifically, the "decorative symbol display" is a variable display / stop display / temporary stop of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the "button display" is an operation (in this example, an operation). The display / non-display of the display (for example, the display of an image imitating the appearance of the cross key of the operation key unit 190) prompting the operation of the up / down buttons of the cross key of the key unit 190 is displayed, and the "effect mode display" is the effect mode. The display / non-display of the effect mode in the display area DM is shown.

The timing T1 shown in FIG. 11 (a) is a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started when a prize is won in the special figure 1 starting port (not shown), and the special figure described with reference to FIG. 10 (a). 1 Start the display during fluctuation.

In this example, the variable display of the special figure 1 in the first special figure display device 212 and the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 1 in the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c are triggered by winning a prize in the special figure 1 starting port. To start.

Further, by displaying the character string "A mode" in the effect mode display area DM, it is shown that the current effect mode is the effect mode A (in this example, the default effect mode), and the first operation is performed. By displaying the display SD1 and the second operation display SD2, it is shown that the effect mode can be switched by operating the up / down buttons of the cross key of the operation key unit 190, and the button display (cross key of the operation key unit 190) is displayed. By displaying an image that imitates the appearance of the operation key unit 190), the operation of the cross key of the operation key unit 190 is urged.

The timing T2 shown in FIG. 11A is a state in which the effect mode is switched when the button operation (in this example, the operation of the up / down button of the cross key of the operation key unit 190) is accepted.

In this example, all the variable displays of the decorative symbol (left symbol) in the left symbol display area 208a, the decorative symbol (middle symbol) in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the decorative symbol (right symbol) in the right symbol display area 208c are displayed. continuing.

Further, in this example, in the special figure 1 variable game, the operation key unit 190 is in a state (first state) in which the variable display of all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is executed (first state). When the up / down button (operation means) of the cross key is operated, the effect mode is switched from the effect mode A to the effect mode B because it is configured to be accepted as an operation for changing the effect mode.

The timing T3 shown in FIG. 11A is a state immediately after the temporary stop of the left symbol is executed after the temporary stop of the left symbol is executed during the special figure 1 variable game, and only the variation display of the middle symbol is executed. It is in a state of being.

In this example, the button display (display of an image imitating the appearance of the cross key of the operation key unit 190) is hidden and the first operation is triggered by the temporary stop of the right symbol during the special figure 1 variable game. By hiding the display SD1 and the second operation display SD2, it is shown that the effect mode cannot be switched.

The timing T4 shown in FIG. 11A is a state in which a button operation (in this example, an operation of the up / down button of the cross key of the operation key unit 190) is accepted during the variable display of the middle symbol.

In this example, when the up / down button (operation means) of the cross key of the operation key unit 190 is operated in the state (second state) in which only the variation display of the middle symbol is executed in the special figure 1 variation game, Since it is configured not to be accepted as a change operation of the effect mode, the effect mode is maintained in the effect mode B.

According to this example, the player can enjoy a sharp game by accepting or not accepting the operation of changing the effect mode according to the display period of the variable display of the first symbol of 1. In some cases.

The timing T5 shown in FIG. 11 (a) is a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and the special figure 1 stopped display described with reference to FIG. 10 (e) is started.

In this example, the variation display of the special figure 1 in the first special figure display device 212 is stopped, and the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

Further, by displaying the character string "B mode" in the effect mode display area DM, it is shown that the current effect mode is the effect mode B, while the first operation display SD1 and the second operation display are displayed. By hiding SD2, it is shown that the effect mode cannot be switched.

The timing T6 shown in FIG. 11A is a state in which a button operation (in this example, an operation of the up / down button of the cross key of the operation key unit 190) is accepted during the stop display of the special figure 1.

In this example, if the up / down button (operation means) of the cross key of the operation key unit 190 is operated while the stop display of the special figure 1 (first symbol) is displayed, it is not accepted as an operation for changing the effect mode. Since it is configured, the effect mode is maintained in the effect mode B.

According to this example, if the operation means is operated while the stop display of the first symbol is displayed, it is not accepted as the change operation of the effect mode, so that the player's consciousness is directed to the stop display of the first symbol. You may be able to.

<Reception of change in production mode / Example 2>
FIG. 11 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a change reception of the effect mode during the SP reach special figure 1 change during the special figure 1 change display described with reference to FIG. 10 (c) in chronological order. Since the timings T1 and T2 shown in FIG. 11B are in the same state as the timings T1 and T2 shown in FIG. 11A, the same reference numerals are given in the drawings and the description thereof will be omitted.

The timing T10 shown in FIG. 11 (b) is a state in which the normal reach state is reached in the special figure 1 variable game, and the special figure 1 changing display / normal reach described with reference to FIG. 10 (b) is started.

In this example, since the special figure 1 variable game is in the normal reach state, the symbol combination corresponding to the normal reach in the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 4- (changing) -decoration 4"). Display) to execute variable display.

Further, by displaying the character string "B mode" in the effect mode display area DM, it is shown that the current effect mode is the effect mode B, and the first operation display SD1 and the second operation display SD2 are displayed. By displaying it, it is shown that the effect mode can be switched by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key of the operation key unit 190, and the button display (display of an image imitating the appearance of the cross key of the operation key unit 190) is displayed. By displaying it, the operation of the cross key of the operation key unit 190 is urged.

The timing T11 shown in FIG. 11 (b) is a state in which the normal reach state is shifted to the SP reach in the special figure 1 variable game, and the special figure 1 variable display / SP reach described with reference to FIG. 10 (c) is shown. Start.

In this example, since the normal reach state is shifted to the SP reach in the special figure 1 variable game, the symbol combination corresponding to the normal reach in the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 4- (during change)-" In addition to executing the variable display in the display of "decoration 4"), the SP reach display SP (for example, the display of an image including the character string of "SP reach") suggesting that the SP reach is executed is executed.

In addition, with the transition from the normal reach state to the SP reach, the button display (display of an image imitating the appearance of the cross key of the operation key unit 190) is hidden, and the effect mode display area DM is displayed. The first operation display SD1 and the second operation display SD2 are all hidden.

The timing T12 shown in FIG. 11B is a state in which a button operation (in this example, an operation of the up / down button of the cross key of the operation key unit 190) is accepted during the SP reach.

In this example, when the effect mode display is not displayed (second case), if the up / down button (operation means) of the cross key of the operation key unit 190 is operated, it may be accepted as an operation to change the effect mode. Since it is configured as such, the display of the effect mode display area DM, the first operation display SD1 and the second operation display SD2 are all hidden, but the effect mode is set based on the button operation. The effect mode A is changed to the effect mode C.

According to this example, the degree of freedom of the player's mode change operation may be increased by accepting the operation even if the effect mode display is not displayed. Further, by accepting the operation even if the operation display (button display) is not displayed, the degree of freedom of the player's mode change operation may be increased.

The timing T13 shown in FIG. 11 (b) is a state in which the wipe display after the SP reach loss during the special figure 1 fluctuation display is started, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display / SP reach loss described with reference to FIG. 10 (d). Start the later wipe display.

In this example, since the hit / fail judgment of the special figure was not won (missing), the variation display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c is erased, and the pass / fail judgment of the special figure is made in the effect display area 208d. Displays a wipe display WP that suggests that was not won.

The timing T14 shown in FIG. 11B is a state immediately after the temporary stop of the left symbol is executed after the temporary stop of the left symbol is executed during the special figure 1 variable game, and only the variation display of the middle symbol is executed. It is in a state of being.

In this example, the character string "C mode" is displayed in the effect mode display area DM where the effect mode was hidden, triggered by the temporary stop of the right symbol during the special figure 1 variable game. It is shown that the effect mode is the effect mode C, while the effect mode cannot be switched by hiding the first operation display SD1 and the second operation display SD2.

According to this example, it is not displayed that the display mode of the effect mode display is changed, and the effect mode display displayed after the operation of the operating means may be a display mode that reflects the operation. The player can confirm that the operation has been accepted even if the effect mode display is not displayed.

<Reception of change in production mode / Example 3>
FIG. 12 (a) shows the reception of the change of the effect mode during the remaining special figure 1 variable game after the power failure / recovery, and the next special figure 1 of the remaining special figure 1 variable game after the power failure / recovery. It is a figure which showed an example of the change reception of the production mode during a variable game in chronological order.

The timing T21 shown in FIG. 12 (a) is a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started when a prize is won in the special figure 1 starting port (not shown), and the special figure described with reference to FIG. 10 (a). 1 Start the display during fluctuation.

In this example, the variable display of the special figure 1 in the first special figure display device 212 and the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 1 in the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c are triggered by winning a prize in the special figure 1 starting port. To start.

Further, by displaying the character string "C mode" in the effect mode display area DM, it is shown that the current effect mode is the effect mode C, and the first operation display SD1 and the second operation display SD2 are displayed. By displaying it, it is shown that the effect mode can be switched by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key of the operation key unit 190, and the button display (display of an image imitating the appearance of the cross key of the operation key unit 190) is displayed. By displaying it, the operation of the cross key of the operation key unit 190 is urged.

The timing T22 shown in FIG. 12A is a state in which a power failure has occurred in the display during fluctuation in FIG. 1, and the timing T23 shown in FIG. 12B is a state in which the power is restored (recovered) from the power failure. ..

In this example, with the power recovery as an opportunity, the special figure 1 fluctuation display and the power recovery display after the power interruption are started, which are described with reference to FIG. 10 (f). Specifically, since the special figure 1 variable game was in progress before the power failure / recovery, the variable display of the special figure 1 is continuously executed on the first special figure display device 212 even after the power recovery. , In the effect display area 208d, the returning display RC (for example, the character string "returning") indicating that the processing after the power restoration is being executed is displayed.

On the other hand, the variation display of the decorative pattern, the display of the effect mode display area DM, the display of the first operation display SD1, the display of the second operation display SD2, and the button display, which were displayed before the power failure / recovery, are all erased ( By hiding the first operation display SD1 and the second operation display SD2, it is shown that the effect mode cannot be switched.

The timing T24 shown in FIG. 12A is a state in which a button operation (in this example, an operation of the up / down button of the cross key of the operation key unit 190) is accepted during the remaining special figure 1 stop display after the power is restored. ..

In this example, when there is a power failure / recovery during the display of the variation display of the special figure 1 (first symbol), the state from the recovery to the end of the display of the variation display (second state). In the above, when the up / down button (operation means) of the cross key of the operation key unit 190 is operated, the effect mode cannot be changed because it is configured so as not to be accepted as the effect mode change operation.

According to this example, by not accepting the operation during the remaining display of the fluctuation display of the first symbol after the power is restored, the player feels uncomfortable and the game clerk is called to the game table. It is possible to grasp that there was a power failure and power recovery, and the player may be able to continue the game with peace of mind by receiving an explanation from the game clerk that the operation of the game table is normal operation at the time of power recovery. ..

The timing T25 shown in FIG. 12 (a) is a state in which the remaining special figure 1 variable game after the power is restored is completed, and the special figure 1 stopped display described with reference to FIG. 10 (e) is started.

In this example, the variation display of the special figure 1 in the first special figure display device 212 is stopped, and the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

Further, by displaying the character string "A mode" in the effect mode display area DM, the current effect mode is initialized from the effect mode C before power interruption / recovery to the default effect mode A. On the other hand, by hiding the first operation display SD1 and the second operation display SD2, it is shown that the effect mode cannot be switched.

The timing T26 shown in FIG. 12A is a state in which a button operation (in this example, an operation of the up / down button of the cross key of the operation key unit 190) is accepted during the stop display of the special figure 1.

In this example, if the up / down button (operation means) of the cross key of the operation key unit 190 is operated while the stop display of the special figure 1 (first symbol) is displayed, it is not accepted as an operation for changing the effect mode. Since it is configured, the effect mode is maintained in the effect mode A.

The timing T27 shown in FIG. 12A is a state in which the special drawing 1 variable game is started when a prize is won in the special drawing 1 starting port (not shown), and the special drawing described with reference to FIG. 10A. 1 Start the display during fluctuation.

In this example, the variable display of the special figure 1 in the first special figure display device 212 and the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 1 in the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c are triggered by winning a prize in the special figure 1 starting port. To start.

Further, by displaying the character string "A mode" in the effect mode display area DM, it is shown that the current effect mode is the effect mode A, and the first operation display SD1 and the second operation display SD2 are displayed. By displaying it, it is shown that the effect mode can be switched by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key of the operation key unit 190, and the button display (display of an image imitating the appearance of the cross key of the operation key unit 190) is displayed. By displaying it, the operation of the cross key of the operation key unit 190 is urged.

The timing T28 shown in FIG. 12A is a state in which the effect mode is switched when the button operation (in this example, the operation of the up / down button of the cross key of the operation key unit 190) is accepted.

In this example, all the variable displays of the decorative symbol (left symbol) in the left symbol display area 208a, the decorative symbol (middle symbol) in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the decorative symbol (right symbol) in the right symbol display area 208c are displayed. continuing.

Further, in this example, in the special figure 1 variable game, the operation key unit 190 is in a state (first state) in which the variable display of all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is executed (first state). When the up / down button (operation means) of the cross key is operated, the effect mode is switched from the effect mode A to the effect mode B because it is configured to be accepted as an operation for changing the effect mode.

According to this example, by accepting an operation while the symbol variation display is displayed after the power is restored, the player may be able to continue the game with peace of mind after the symbol variation display is displayed even after the power is restored. ..

<Reception of change in production mode / Example 4>
FIG. 12B is a diagram showing an example of a change reception of the effect mode while the special figure 2 is changing and a change reception of the effect mode while the special figure 2 is stopped in chronological order.

The timing T31 shown in FIG. 12B is a state in which the special drawing 2 variable game is started when a prize is won in the special drawing 2 starting port (not shown), and the special drawing described with reference to FIG. 10 (g). 2 Start the display during fluctuation.

In this example, the variable display of the special figure 2 in the second special figure display device 214 and the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 2 in the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c are triggered by winning a prize in the special figure 2 starting port. To start.

Further, by displaying the character string "A mode" in the effect mode display area DM, it is shown that the current effect mode is the effect mode A, and the first operation display SD1 and the second operation display SD2 are displayed. By displaying it, it is shown that the effect mode can be switched by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key of the operation key unit 190, and the button display (display of an image imitating the appearance of the cross key of the operation key unit 190) is displayed. By displaying it, the operation of the cross key of the operation key unit 190 is urged.

The timing T32 shown in FIG. 12B is a state in which the effect mode is switched when the button operation (in this example, the operation of the up / down button of the cross key of the operation key unit 190) is accepted.

In this example, all the variable displays of the decorative symbol (left symbol) in the left symbol display area 208a, the decorative symbol (middle symbol) in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the decorative symbol (right symbol) in the right symbol display area 208c are displayed. continuing.

Further, in this example, in the state where the variable display of the special figure 2 (second symbol) is being executed (fourth state), the operation is performed while the stop display of the special figure 1 (first symbol) is being displayed. When the up / down button (operation means) of the cross key of the key unit 190 is operated, it may be accepted as an operation for changing the effect mode. Therefore, the effect mode is changed from the effect mode A to the effect mode B. I'm switching.

The timing T33 shown in FIG. 12B is a state in which the effect mode is switched when the button operation (in this example, the operation of the up / down button of the cross key of the operation key unit 190) is accepted.

In this example, the variation display of the special figure 2 in the second special figure display device 214 is stopped, and the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the hit / fail determination of the special figure 2 is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

Further, in this example, in the state where the variation display of the special figure 2 (second symbol) is not executed (fourth state), the operation is performed while the stop display of the special figure 1 (first symbol) is displayed. When the up / down button (operation means) of the cross key of the key unit 190 is operated, it may be accepted as an operation for changing the effect mode. Therefore, the effect mode is changed from the effect mode B to the effect mode α. I'm switching.

In addition, in the case of right-handed (during electric support or probable change), the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game is shorter than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game, so that the effect mode is switched even during the special figure 2 stop display. It may be possible to select an effect mode that cannot be selected while hitting right or while hitting left.

<Reception of change in production mode / Example 5>
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the reception of changing the production mode during the jackpot game before the power failure / recovery and the reception of the change of the production mode during the remaining jackpot game after the power failure / recovery in chronological order. be.

In this example, with the start of the big hit game as an opportunity, the display during the big hit game suggesting that the big hit game is in progress is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the right-handed display RD for urging the player to hit right is displayed. is doing.

Further, by displaying the character string "A mode" in the effect mode display area DM, it is shown that the current effect mode is the effect mode A, and the first operation display SD1 and the second operation display SD2 are displayed. By displaying it, it is shown that the effect mode can be switched by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key of the operation key unit 190, and the button display (display of an image imitating the appearance of the cross key of the operation key unit 190) is displayed. By displaying it, the operation of the cross key of the operation key unit 190 is urged.

The timing T41 shown in FIG. 13 is a state in which the effect mode is switched when the button operation (in this example, the operation of the up / down button of the cross key of the operation key unit 190) is accepted.

In this example, if the up / down button (operation means) of the cross key of the operation key unit 190 is operated during the jackpot game state, it may be accepted as an operation for changing the effect mode. The production mode is switched from the production mode A to the production mode B.

The timing T42 shown in FIG. 13 is a state in which a power failure occurs during the big hit game, and the timing T43 shown in the figure is a state in which the power is restored (recovered) from the power failure.

In this example, with the power recovery as an opportunity, the special figure 1 fluctuation display and the power recovery display after the power interruption are started, which are described with reference to FIG. 10 (f). Specifically, since it was a big hit game before the power was cut off and restored, the big hit game is continuously executed even after the power is restored, and the post-recovery processing is being executed in the effect display area 208d. The return display RC (for example, the character string "returning") suggesting that there is is displayed.

Further, since the effect mode is maintained in the power cut / restore during the big hit game, the effect mode B before the power cut is maintained even after the power is restored.

The timing T44 shown in FIG. 13 is a state in which the effect mode is switched when the button operation (in this example, the operation of the up / down button of the cross key of the operation key unit 190) is accepted.

In this example, when the up / down button (operation means) of the cross key of the operation key unit 190 is operated during the remaining period of the jackpot gaming state after the power failure / recovery occurs during the jackpot gaming state, the effect is described. Since it is configured so that it may be accepted as a mode change operation, the effect mode is switched from the effect mode B to the effect mode α.

According to this example, when the operating means is operated during the remaining period of the jackpot gaming state (the period from timings T43 to T44 shown in FIG. 13) after the power failure / recovery occurs during the jackpot gaming state. , Since it may be accepted as a mode change operation of the effect mode, it may be possible to increase the degree of freedom of the mode change operation of the player during the big hit game state.

As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 9) has an operating means (for example, the cross key of the operating key unit 190) capable of changing the effect mode by the operation of the player. (Up / down button) and a first symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212) capable of displaying a variable display of the first symbol (for example, special figure 1). When the operating means is operated in the first state (for example, the states from timings T1 to T3 shown in FIG. 11A), it may be accepted as a change operation of the effect mode, and the second When the operation means is operated in the state of (for example, the states from timings T3 to T5 shown in FIG. 11A), the operation means is not accepted as the change operation of the effect mode, and the first state is the first state. At least the variable display of one symbol is displayed (the state in which the variable display of all decorative symbols is executed), and in the second state, at least the variable display of the first symbol is displayed. It is a state (a state in which a variable display of a part of decorative symbols is executed), and the first state is different from the second state.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, even if the variable display of the first symbol is displayed, the player may or may not accept the change operation of the effect mode, so that the player enjoys a sharp game. You may be able to.

Further, a part of the variation display of the first symbol may be displayed in the first state, and another part of the variation display may be displayed in the second state.

With such a configuration, the player may or may not accept the operation of changing the effect mode depending on the display period of the variable display of the first symbol of 1, so that the player can enjoy the game with sharpness. May be possible.

Further, when there is a power interruption / recovery during the display of the fluctuation display of the first symbol, the state from the start of the display to the power interruption (for example, FIG. 12A) is shown. The state from timing T21 to T22) is the first state, and the state from the power recovery to the end of the display of the variation display (for example, the state from timing T23 to T27 shown in FIG. 12A) is the state. It may be in the second state.

With such a configuration, the game clerk can play the game by not accepting the operation during the remaining display of the fluctuation display of the first symbol after the power is restored, which gives the player a sense of discomfort and calls the game clerk. When it is possible to grasp that there was a power failure and power recovery on the table, and the player can continue the game with confidence by receiving an explanation from the game clerk that the operation of the game table is normal operation at the time of power recovery. There is.

Further, when the operating means is operated during the display of the variation display of the first symbol displayed after the display of the variation display after the power is restored (for example, the timing T28 shown in FIG. 12A). , May be accepted as an operation for changing the effect mode.

With such a configuration, by accepting the operation while the symbol variation display is displayed after the power is restored, the player can continue the game with confidence after the symbol variation display is displayed even after the power is restored. There is.

Further, the display means (for example, the effect mode display area DM of the decorative symbol display device 208) is provided, and the display means may display the effect mode corresponding to the effect mode (for example, display the effect mode display area DM or the first. Operation display SD1 and second operation display SD2) are displayable means, and the effect mode display is displayed in at least a part of the display period of the variation display of the first symbol. (Hereinafter referred to as "first case". When the effect mode display is displayed), and the effect mode display is not displayed in a part of the display period of the variation display of the first symbol. (Hereinafter referred to as "second case"; when the effect mode display is not displayed), and when the operating means is operated in the second case (for example, timing T12 shown in FIG. 11B). , May be accepted as an operation for changing the effect mode.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to increase the degree of freedom of the player's mode change operation by accepting the operation even if the effect mode display is not displayed.

The "effect mode display" according to the present invention is not limited to the display of the effect mode display area DM and the first operation display SD1 and the second operation display SD2, and is a display in which the effect mode can be recognized (for example,). It may be an image or sound corresponding to the effect mode) or a display recognizable that the effect mode can be changed (for example, an up / down arrow ↑ ↓ or a left / right arrow ← →).

Further, when the operating means is operated in the first case, it may be displayed that the display mode of the effect mode display is changed, and in the second case, the operating means is operated. When the display mode of the effect mode display is not changed and the effect mode display displayed after the operation is a display mode reflecting the operation (for example, FIG. 11B). There may be a timing T14) shown in.

With such a configuration, the player can confirm that the operation has been accepted even if the effect mode display is not displayed.

Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying an operation display (for example, a button display) corresponding to the operation means, and in at least a part of the display period of the variable display of the first symbol. There are cases where the operation display is displayed (for example, when the button display is displayed), and the operation display is not displayed during a part of the display period of the variation display of the first symbol (hereinafter). , "Third case". When the button display is hidden) and the operating means is operated in the third case (for example, timing T12 shown in FIG. 11B), the effect. It may be accepted as a mode change operation.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to increase the degree of freedom of the player's mode change operation by accepting the operation even if the operation display is not displayed.

The "operation display" according to the present invention is not limited to the button display consisting of an image imitating the appearance of the operation means, and is a display prompting the operation of the operation means (for example, the character string "press the effect button!"). It may be display), voice (for example, output of voice saying "press the effect button") or the like.

Further, when the operation means is operated while the stop display of the first symbol is displayed, it may not be accepted as the change operation of the effect mode.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to direct the player's consciousness to the stop display of the first symbol.

Further, in the third state, if the operation means is operated while the stop display of the first symbol is displayed, it is not accepted as the change operation of the effect mode, and the fourth state is different from the third state. If the operating means is operated while the stop display of the first symbol is being displayed in the above state, it may be accepted as an operation for changing the effect mode.

With such a configuration, the operation may be accepted even while the stop display of the first symbol is being displayed, so that the degree of freedom of the player's mode change operation may be increased.

Further, a second symbol display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 214) capable of displaying the variable display of the second symbol (for example, special figure 2) in the fourth state may be provided.

With such a configuration, the degree of freedom of the player's mode change operation may be increased by accepting the operation during the variable display of the second symbol.

Further, the decorative symbol display means (for example, the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying the variable display of the decorative symbol is provided, and the decorative symbol display means is described in the third state. It is a means capable of displaying the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the variable display of the first symbol, and the decorative symbol display means corresponds to the variable display of the second symbol in the fourth state. It may be a means capable of displaying the variable display of the decorative pattern.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to increase the degree of freedom of the player's mode change operation by accepting the operation during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Further, when the operating means is operated during the big hit game state (for example, timings T41 and T44 shown in FIG. 13), it may be accepted as a change operation of the effect mode, and the power is cut off during the big hit game state. -When the operating means is operated during the remaining period of the jackpot gaming state after the power recovery occurs (for example, the period from timings T43 to T44 shown in FIG. 13), it is accepted as an operation for changing the effect mode. May be the case.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to increase the degree of freedom of the mode change operation of the player during the big hit game state.

Further, the gaming table according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the "enclosed gaming machine" circulates and uses the gaming balls enclosed in the gaming machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured by one chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. good. Further, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. In addition, the range of the game may be further expanded by applying the content described in one configuration to the other configurations among the plurality of configurations described in the examples.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 14 corresponds to an example of the game console of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. .. Inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in which multiple types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a drive device such as a stepping motor.

In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped member at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 110 to 112, and the light emitting unit of this optical sensor is provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light receiving portion and the light receiving portion. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line. The winning line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 114.

For example, the notification lamp 123 informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in the winning combination internal lottery described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. It is a lamp to inform you. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment is lit until the bonus game is completed after the bonus notification of notifying the confirmation of the bonus. The notification lamp 123 may be turned on before the bonus notification (at the time of the bonus or immediately before the bonus notification). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be re-gamed (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, a maximum of three bets are inserted, two are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The bet button 132 also functions as an effect button capable of starting a certain effect when an operation is accepted. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a production button.

The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 130 to 132, or the actual medals can be inserted (inserted operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the insertion means that both are included. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display. The payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device for notifying information regarding the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are provided corresponding to the reels 110 to 112. .. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be pressed. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it.

Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the operation may be referred to as a first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation may be referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation may be referred to as a third stop reel.

Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110 to 112 are stopped is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. The operation order in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 as a stop operation is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 is called "forward push operation order". It is called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can grasp that the high navigation state is in the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190.

The medal return button 133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 134 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100. The medal payout outlet 155 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 160. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) is in front of the slot machine 100 (game). It has a structure that appears on the person's side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device for notifying information regarding a stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

It should be noted that the device may be configured to be capable of displaying various production images and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen may be used. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

The notification lamp 123 and the high navigation state lamp 190 are designed to notify predetermined information by causing the lamps to emit light, but the notification mode is not limited to the light emission of the lamp. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a part of the area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a slot machine having a full liquid crystal display, an area near reels 110 to 112 may be used). Hereinafter, when it is described as lighting of the notification lamp 123 or the high navigation state lamp 190, it is intended to include notification by another effect device (for example, a display device) having the same function.

<Inside the housing>
FIG. 15 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 in a state where the front door 102 is opened. The main body 101 is a box body that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and opens to the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that houses the main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided at the upper part of the back plate 242, and the main control board storage case 210 Three reels 110 to 112 are arranged below. The side plate 260 on the left side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, the side plate 260 on the left side, houses the first sub control board that houses the first sub control board constituting the first sub control unit. A case 220 is arranged. Further, an external centralized terminal plate 248 connected to the main control board and outputting information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in the bucket) is arranged on the bottom plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is arranged, and a power supply switch 244 is arranged on the front surface of the power supply device 252. The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate in the closed state.

The power supply device 252 converts an AC power supply supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each into a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500, and the like, which will be described later. It supplies to the control unit and each device. Further, a storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off is provided. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind the medal auxiliary storage 240 (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting the power cord 265, and the power cord 265 connected to the power cord 265 extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 provided in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and the effect device 160 and the effect control board (illustrated) for controlling the effect device 160 are on the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 157. Omitted), the upper speaker 272 is provided. At the lower part of the liquid crystal display device 157, a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, a passage 266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops an illegal medal or the like onto the medal tray 161 are provided. There is. Further, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 180.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game and a main effect according to a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is composed of a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used at the time of an internal lottery for a winning combination, and a reel stop. ROM 306 for storing positions, RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data. It is determined and an interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 every interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor or the like and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request. For example, when the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47/8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 starts when the power is turned on and the random number value generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when a start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main process of the main control unit described later). To start).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 is inserted from various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) for each interruption time. Medal medal reception sensor, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor to be paid out from the medal payout device 180, index sensor of reel 110, The state of the index sensor of the reel 111, the index sensor of the reel 112, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number value generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register storing the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect whether or not the medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135, and detect a start operation by the player. The stop button 137 sensor, the stop button 138 sensor, and the stop button 139 sensor are installed in the respective stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detect the input operation of the case. The checkout button 134 sensor is provided on the checkout button 134. When the checkout button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. Each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and each time the light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, L Become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 is provided in the drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, the drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and the medal payout device 180. Drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game medal insertion lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, stored number display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 for driving the display 126, the payout number display 127, and the high navigation status lamp 190) is provided.

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is slotted in an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output. Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 has a voltage value of the power supply set to a predetermined value (this implementation). In the embodiment, when the voltage is less than 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400, and enables communication with the first sub control unit 400. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400, but the first sub control A signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives a control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command. There is. This basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. is doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 stores a ROM 406 that stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various indicators, and the like. It is provided.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and sends an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and the speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via the output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and the speakers 272 and 277 in response to a command from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is provided with various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input / output interface. 123 etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided on the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, a sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 for each interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits / receives a signal to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and bases the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a timer 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the second sub control unit 500 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and the ROM 506 and the VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 516, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
Next, the symbol arrangement applied to each of the above-mentioned reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 17 (a). It should be noted that the figure is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols applied to each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in a planar development.

On each reel 110 to 112, a plurality of types (8 types in the present embodiment) of symbols shown on the right side of the figure are arranged in a predetermined number of frames (20 frames of numbers 0 to 19 in the present embodiment). Further, the numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112. For example, in the present embodiment, the frame number 19 on the left reel 110 is a "bell symbol", the frame number 19 on the middle reel 111 is a "blank symbol", and the frame number 18 on the right reel 112 is "seven 2". "Design", are arranged respectively. In the following, "Seven 1 symbol" may be referred to as "blue 7 (design)", and "seven 2 symbol" may be referred to as "red 7 (design)".

<Winning line>
Next, the winning line will be described with reference to FIG. 17 (b). FIG. 17B is a diagram showing a winning line of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

The symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 1) is on the upper stage symbol of the left reel, and on the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 2). The displayed symbol is the middle symbol on the left reel, and the symbol displayed on the lower symbol of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 3) is the lower symbol on the left reel and the upper symbol of the middle reel 111 (4 shown in the figure). The symbol displayed in the middle reel upper stage symbol, the symbol displayed in the middle stage of the middle reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure; also referred to as the symbol position 5) is the middle reel middle stage symbol. The symbol displayed on the lower part of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 6) is placed on the lower part of the middle reel and the upper part of the right reel 112 (position 7 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 7). The displayed symbol is the upper symbol on the right reel, the symbol displayed on the middle of the right reel 112 (position 8 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 8) is the middle symbol on the right reel, and the symbol displayed on the lower row of the right reel 112 (9 shown in the figure). The symbols displayed at (position; also referred to as symbol position 9) are called the lower symbols on the right reel, and each symbol of each reel 110 to 112 is vertically three on each reel 110 to 112 through the symbol display window 113. A total of nine are displayed.

In the present embodiment, one winning line 114 of the middle-stage winning line L1 composed of the left reel middle-stage symbol (symbol position 2), the middle reel middle-stage symbol (symbol position 5), and the right reel middle-stage symbol (symbol position 8) is provided. ing. The winning line 114 is a line set at a stop position of the symbol that can be visually recognized through the reel window 113, and is a symbol corresponding to the winning combination described in FIGS. 18A and 18B described later. It is a line that determines whether or not a combination is displayed. FIG. 17B shows the middle prize line L1. The valid winning line (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "valid line") is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium.

The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment can play a 3-card or 2-card bet, and when the number of inserted medals is less than 2, no winning line is valid and the number of medals is 3 or 2. The winning line L1 becomes effective when a bet is made. When the winning line is activated, the start lever 135 can be operated to start the game.

Further, the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, it is composed of a right-down winning line composed of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel lower symbol, a left reel lower symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel upper symbol. A total of three winning lines that go up to the right may be set as valid winning lines 114, or a number of winning lines according to the number of bets may be set as valid winning lines 114.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18A and 18B. The figure (a) is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination in the three-card betting game. (B) is a diagram showing the type of winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination in the two-card betting game.

The winning combination of the slot machine 100 includes a special role (special role 1, special role 2), a general role (replaying role 1 to replaying role 13, small role 1 to small role 5), and the like. The types of winning combinations are not limited to these winning combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Among the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are roles for shifting to a special gaming state in which a predetermined benefit is given to the player. Further, the re-gaming combination 1 to the re-gaming combination 13 are roles that enable re-gaming without inserting a new medal. These winning combinations may be referred to as "acting combinations". Further, the "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operating combination without the distribution of the medal (without the payout of the medal) is displayed on the valid line, for example, the special combination 1, The prizes for the special role 2 and the re-game combination 1 to the re-game combination 13 are included.

The special role 1 and the special role 2 are a combination (actuating role) that shifts to a special gaming state by winning a prize. In this example, the special role 1 is a role that can be won only in a three-card betting game, and the special role 2 is a role that can be won only in a two-card betting game. No medals will be paid out due to winning the role itself. In the corresponding symbol combination, the special role 1 (BB1) is "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2", and the special role 2 (BB2) is "BAR-BAR-Seven 1".

When the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to the internally won combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special winning combination 1, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special winning combination 1 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2). Further, when the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special winning combination 2, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special winning combination 2 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT3). ..

This flag is kept on until the internally won combination is won, and it becomes easy to win the internally won combination in the next and subsequent games. That is, even if the special role is not won in the game that is internally won in the special role 1 or the special role 2, the special role is internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role (for example, special). If the role 1 is internally won, the "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2 (BB1)" symbol combination) will be in a state where it is easy to win a prize. The special role 1 internal winning state (RT2) and the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

The main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or the special combination 2. Further, in this special gaming state, when a predetermined number of cards (in this example, 110 winning cards by BB1 and 55 winning cards by BB2) are paid out, a re-game low probability state (hereinafter, this state is referred to as RT1). There is). The special gaming state (RT4) and the re-gaming low probability state (RT1) will be described later.

The "replaying role (replaying role 1 to replaying role 13)" is a winning combination (actuating role) that allows a game to be played without inserting a medal (game medium) in the next game by winning a prize. No medals will be paid out. The corresponding symbol combinations are "replay-replay-replay" for replay 1 (normal replay), "seven 1-seven 1-seven 1" for replay 2 (directed replay 1), and replay 3 for replay. (Direction replay 2) is as shown in FIG. 18, such as "Seven 1-Seven 2-Seven 1".

"Small role (small role 1 to small role 5)" is a winning role in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbol combination is "ANY-cherry-ANY" for small role 1 (cherry), small role. The role 2 (watermelon 1) is as shown in FIG. 18, such as "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon". The corresponding payout number is also as shown in the figure. In the case of "ANY-cherry-ANY", the symbol of the middle reel 111 may be "cherry", and the symbols of the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 may be any symbol.

<Reel stop control>
Next, the outline of the stop control of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. For reel stop control, one of a plurality of types of reel stop control data determined in advance is selected based on a predetermined condition (for example, the result of an internal lottery process of a winning combination described later), and the selected reel stop is performed. Perform based on control data.

In this embodiment, so-called pull-in control (frame slip control) is performed. The pull-in control is to shift the stop position of the reels 110 to 112 within a certain number of frames (number of symbols) range (pull-in range; here, maximum 4 frames) after each stop button 137 to 139 is operated by the player. Refers to control. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. Each reel stop data has a permissible control that allows a predetermined combination of winning combinations to be displayed together on the winning line, and a prohibition control that does not display all the symbol combinations of any winning combination on the winning line. It is roughly divided into.

Examples of allowable control are, for example, when an internal winning combination is internally won or when a special winning combination is being internally won (the flag is being carried over), and the timing at which the player operates each stop button 137 to 139. Even if it is bad, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning combinations are displayed together within the range of the above number of frames. However, since it is only "allowed", the symbol combinations may not be aligned depending on the timing of operating each stop button 137 to 139.

For example, when the small winning combination 2 (watermelon 1) is internally won, the watermelon symbol is arranged in more than 4 frames, so if the timing of operating the stop buttons 137 to 139 is not suitable, the watermelon symbol will be a winning line. Does not stop at.

However, depending on the arrangement of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 and the number of frames drawn in, 100% may be aligned. For example, since the arrangement interval of the replay symbols corresponding to the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is a maximum of 4 frames, if the replay combination 1 is internally won, 100% of the prizes will be won regardless of the timing.

On the other hand, as an example in which the prohibition control is performed, for example, the internal lottery result is lost and the special role is not being internally elected (the flag is being carried over), and the timing at which the player operates each stop button 137 to 139. Even if it is good, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning combinations are not displayed together within the range of the above number of frames.

<Type of game state>
Next, the types and transitions of the gaming states of the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 19A is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100.

The main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a replay low probability state (RT1), a replay high probability state special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a replay high probability state special role 2 internal winning. It has a state (RT3) and a special gaming state (RT4). In the present embodiment, the game states roughly divided into these four are referred to as RT-type game states. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 also controls a state related to the so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter referred to as an AT system game state), and according to the AT system game state determined by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 is designed to set the gaming state. The game state of the AT system will be described later with reference to FIG. 19 (b).

The re-game low probability state (RT1) is a state in which the probability of operation of the condition device related to the re-game combination does not change (default state), a special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a special combination 2 internal winning state. (RT3) and the special gaming state (RT4) are also states in which the probability of operation of the conditional device related to the replaying combination varies from the default state.

<Lottery table>
FIG. 20A is a diagram showing a lottery table used for the internal lottery process of the winning combination. The horizontal axis represents each game state (RT-type game state), and the vertical axis shows the lottery value of each winning combination.

The internal winning probability of the winning combination in each gaming state described below is a random number obtained at the time of the internal lottery from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306, numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each winning combination. It is obtained by dividing by the numerical data (for example, 65535) in the numerical range. For example, in the re-game low probability state (RT1), the lottery value of the small winning combination 2 is 512, and the winning probability of the small winning combination 1 is 512/65536 × 100 ≈0.8%. The lottery data is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each numerical range is associated with each combination or loss.

It is determined which combination the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is the value corresponding to the lottery data, and the internal lottery combination is determined. For this lottery data, settings 1 to 6 having different winning probabilities for at least one combination are prepared, and a game store clerk or the like can arbitrarily select and set any of the set values. The internal winning probability shown in this figure is an example and is not limited to this probability.

Hereinafter, the game state of the RT system of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The re-game low probability state is a game state in which the internal winning probability of the re-game is the lowest among other game states (for example, a game state excluding a special game state) (disadvantageous to the player), and is referred to as a normal game state. There is also. In the re-game low probability state, the winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column of "RT1" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 20 (a).

Re-game The winning combination that is internally won in the low probability state is special role 1 (condition device No. 1. only for 3-card betting game), special role 2 (not shown, only for 2-card betting game), and re-game combination 1 (replaying game). Conditional device No. 2), re-gaming combination 2,4 to 10 (conditional device No. 3), re-gaming combination 3,4,6,8,10 to 13 (conditional device No. 4), small combination 1 to small There is a role 5 (condition device Nos. 5 to 9). If the winning combination is not won, it will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed. In addition, the fact that the symbol combination related to the winning is not stopped on the winning line may be referred to as "missing". In addition, the fact that the winning combination was not won may be expressed as "winning the loss".

Here, "re-game role 2, 4 to 10" means re-game role 2, re-game role 4, re-game role 5, re-game role 6, re-game role 7, re-game role 8, re-game role 9 , And the replaying combination 10 are internally elected at the same time. In this case, it is determined which combination of symbols is displayed according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct answer operation order which is a predetermined operation order (in this example, when the stop operation is performed by reverse pressing), the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 2 is obtained. It is displayed on the winning line, and in other cases, depending on the stop operation timing of each reel 110 to 112, the re-gaming combination 4, the re-gaming combination 5, the re-gaming combination 6, the re-gaming combination 7, the re-gaming combination 8. The symbol combination corresponding to any one of the replay combination 9 and the replay combination 10 is displayed on the winning line. In addition, a combination in which the winning combination is determined by the operation order, such as this "replaying combination 2, 4 to 10", may be referred to as a "pushing order combination".

In addition, "re-game combination 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13" means re-game combination 3, re-game role 4, re-game role 6, re-game role 8, re-game role 10, re-game role 11. , Re-game combination 12, and re-game combination 13 are internally elected at the same time. In this case, it is determined which combination of symbols is displayed according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct answer operation order which is a predetermined operation order (in this example, when the stop operation is performed by reverse pressing), the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 3 is obtained. It is displayed on the winning line, and in other cases, depending on the stop operation timing of each reel 110 to 112, the re-gaming combination 4, the re-gaming combination 6, the re-gaming combination 8, the re-gaming combination 10, the re-gaming combination A symbol combination corresponding to any of 11, the re-game combination 12, and the re-game combination 13 is displayed on the winning line.

When the "small winning combination 4" is internally won, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (bell) is displayed on the winning line according to the operation order of the player (FIG. 20 (FIG. 20). a) See the remarks column). More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order, "Bell-bell-bell" is displayed on the winning line and 11 medals are paid out (11 medals are paid out). Bell prize). On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed according to the correct answer operation order, "Bell-bell-bell" is not displayed on the winning line (loss).

In addition, when "small role 4" is composed of "small role 4a" and "small role 4b" and the "small role 4a" is internally won, "bell-bell-bell" is selected according to the operation order of the player. Is determined whether or not is displayed on the winning line, but if the "small winning combination 4b" is internally won, "bell-bell-bell" is displayed on the winning line regardless of the operation order. It may be configured to be.

Here, with reference to FIG. 20 (b), the operation order of the correct answer of "small combination 4" will be described in detail. To be precise, "small role 4" is "small role 4LCR", "small role 4LRC", "small role 4CLR", "small role 4CRL", "small role 4RLC", and "small role 4RCL". It is set to be subdivided into, and different operation orders of correct answers are assigned corresponding to each of the subdivided "small roles 4". The range of lottery data associated with each of the six subdivided "small winning combinations 4" is the same.

For example, when the "small winning combination 4LCR" is internally won among the "small winning combination 4", the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The stop operation is a correct operation, and the other stop operations are incorrect operations. Further, when the "small winning combination 4 CRL" is internally won among the "small winning combination 4", the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110. The stop operation is the correct operation.

FIG. 19A shows that when the special combination 1 is internally elected (when the condition (A) is satisfied), the system shifts to the special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2) described later. It is shown that when the special role 2 is internally elected (when the condition (B) is satisfied), the state shifts to the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) described later.

<Special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), special role 2 internal winning state (RT3)>
The special role internal winning state (RT2) and the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as "special role internal winning state") are the replay low probability state (RT1). ), The internal winning probability of the re-game combination is higher than that of), and the internal winning flag corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is set to ON, and the player stops the operation at a predetermined timing. By doing so, it is possible to display the symbol combination corresponding to the special role corresponding to this flag.

In the special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), the winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column of "RT2" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. In RT3), the winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column of "RT3" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 20A. The prize-winning roles that are internally won in the special role internal winning state include replaying role 1, replaying role 2,4 to 10, replaying role 3,4,6,8,10 to 13, small role 1 to small role 4 There is. If the winning combination is not won, it will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed. Further, in FIG. 19A, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is displayed in the special role internal winning state (when the condition (C) is satisfied), the special game described later is performed. It has been shown to transition to state (RT4).

<Special game state (RT4)>
The special gaming state (RT4) is the most advantageous gaming state among all the gaming states. In the special gaming state, the winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column of "RT4" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 20 (a). In the special game state, the winning combination that is internally won is only the small combination 5. In addition, if the winning combination is not won, it will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed.

FIG. 19 (a) shows that in the special game state (RT4), when the specified number of sheets is paid out (when the condition (D) is satisfied), the game shifts to the re-game low probability state (RT1). ing. Specifically, in the case of shifting to the special gaming state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1, if more than 110 medals are paid out, the replay low probability state (RT1) Move to. In addition, when the special gaming state is entered based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 2, when more than 55 medals are paid out, the re-gaming low probability state (RT1) is entered. ..

In this embodiment, the special game state ends when a predetermined number of payouts are executed, but for example, a game ends when a predetermined combination (for example, a single bonus) is won, or a predetermined number of times (for example, a predetermined number of times). It may be terminated when there is a prize (for example, 8 times) or when a predetermined number of times (for example, 6 times) of games are played. That is, the condition (D) shown in FIG. 19A is not limited to this example.

<Transition of AT-based game state>
Next, the game state of the AT system will be described with reference to FIG. 19 (b). FIG. 19B is a transition diagram of the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100.

As shown in the figure, the AT-type game states are roughly classified into a low navigation state and a high navigation state. The low navigation state is a state in which the probability that the operation navigation is executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode. The high navigation state is a state in which the probability that the operation navigation is executed is higher than that in the low navigation state, and is also referred to as an AT mode. Here, the operation navigation is internally elected as a push order combination (in this example, a replay combination 2,4 to 10, a replay combination 3,4,6,8,10 to 13, or a small combination 4). In this case, it refers to the effect of notifying the operation order of the correct answer. That is, the operation navigation refers to an effect of notifying the content of the stop operation for acquiring a medal, the content of the stop operation for shifting to an advantageous gaming state or maintaining an advantageous gaming state.

Here, the operation navigation will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 (b) and 21. In the present embodiment, the operation navigation is executed by using the payout number display device 127 and the effect image display device 157. FIG. 20B is a diagram illustrating a correct operation order of the push order combination of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 21 corresponds the display data with the lighting mode of the payout number display 127. It is a figure.

For example, the display data 01 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is set to the left reel 110, the display data 02 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is set to the middle reel 111, and the display data 03 is data suggesting a stop operation. , The data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112.

Therefore, in the AT mode, when the "re-game combination 2,4 to 10" or the "re-game combination 3,4,6,8,10 to 13" is internally won, the first stop reel is set to the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is the correct answer, the display data 03 suggesting that the first stop operation is on the right is selected, and the payout number display 127 displays the lighting mode corresponding to the display data 03 and displays the effect image. The device 157 displays an image (for example, the character "--1") suggesting that the first stop reel is the right reel 112.

Further, the display data 04 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112, and the display data 05 is the first stop reel. The left reel 110, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, the third stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the display data 06 is the first stop reel as the middle reel 111 and the second stop reel. In the data and display data 07 suggesting a stop operation in which the left reel 110 and the third stop reel are the right reel 112, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left. The data suggesting a stop operation with the reel 110 and the display data 08 are data suggesting a stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112, the second stop reel as the left reel 110, and the third stop reel as the middle reel 112. The display data 09 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110.

Therefore, when the small winning combination 4CLR of "small winning combination 4" is internally won in the AT mode, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is the correct answer, display data 06 suggesting that the first stop operation is in the middle, the second stop operation is on the left, and the third stop operation is on the right is selected, and the display data 06 is displayed on the payout number display 127. The lighting mode corresponding to is displayed, and the effect image display device 157 suggests that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The image to be reeled (for example, the character "213") is displayed.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to determine whether the internal winning combination is the replaying combination or the small winning combination 4 based on the lighting mode of the payout number display 127. However, for example, the operation to stop the correct answer of the small winning combination 4 may be set to three options as in the replaying combination, and the small winning combination 4 may also be configured to be notified using the display data 01 to 03. In this case, the internal winning combination cannot be determined only by the lighting mode. Further, the operation of stopping the correct answer of the re-game combination may be set to 6 options as in the small combination 4, and the re-game combination may also be configured to be notified using the display data 04 to 09. Even in this case, the internal winning combination cannot be determined only by the lighting mode.

In the present embodiment, the low navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of operation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of operation navigation is higher than that in the low navigation state. The state in which the operation navigation is not executed and the high navigation state may be set as the state in which the operation navigation is executed. When the stop operation is performed according to the operation content of the operation navigation, a favorable result is brought to the player, so that the high navigation state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state. Here, the advantage is specifically the total number of game media paid out by the game console with respect to the total number of game media used by the player as the number of bets when the game is played for a predetermined period. The ratio, the so-called payout rate (ball payout rate).

In the present embodiment, when a certain condition is satisfied in the low navigation state (for example, when a winning combination other than loss is won), the game shifts to the normal state in the high navigation state. After that, as shown in FIG. 19 (c), for example, the transition is made in the order of the finalized notification state → AT1 state → judge state, and the judge state is changed to the normal gaming state or AT2 state via the pullback state. There are routes and routes that directly shift from the judge state to the AT2 state. In the present embodiment, when the transition of the AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state) is determined, a predetermined number (for example, 50 games or the like) is given to the number of games in the AT mode (hereinafter referred to as the number of AT games). Further, although the details will be described later, when a certain condition is satisfied in the high navigation state, the state shifts to the LMT (limit) state.

<AT system state transition>
FIG. 19B is a diagram showing an effect state in each game state of the AT system. As shown in FIG. 19B, each game state of the AT system is further subdivided and managed, and this is called an effect state. Specifically, the low navigation state effect state has a normal state, and the high navigation state effect state has a normal state, a confirmed notification state, a judge state, a pullback state, an AT1 state, an AT2 state, and an LMT (limit) state. .. In addition, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state are, in principle, states in which the number of balls to be ejected increases.

Here, the limit state means, in principle, the remaining 20 games or less in the high navigation state, that is, the production state from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state (from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state). It is possible that the production state of is not the limit state, but this case will be described later). In the present embodiment, when the remaining 20 games or less in the high navigation state, an ending effect (hereinafter, may be referred to as “ED effect”) suggesting the end of the high navigation state is executed.

<Direction table>
Next, the effect table provided in the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22A illustrates an image of an effect table included in the first sub-control unit 400. The storage means (for example, ROM 406 or RAM 408 shown in FIG. 16) of the first sub-control unit 400 stores an effect table provided for each effect state.

The first sub-control unit 400 has an effect information (for example, an effect state, a high navigation state counter, etc.) included in the command received from the main control unit 300 in the command process (step S3604) of the first sub-control unit main process described later. The effect state counter, etc.) is acquired, and in the subsequent effect control process (step S3605), the effect table corresponding to the effect state, etc. is referred to, and the effect according to the effect state counter, etc. is performed. For example, when the current effect state is the AT1 state, the effect table corresponding to the AT1 state (AT1 state effect table) is referred to, and processing such as reading the effect data for executing the AT1 effect described later from the ROM 406 is performed. If it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

Further, when the current effect state is the judge state, the effect table corresponding to the judge state (judgment state effect table) is referred to, and processing such as reading the effect data for executing the judge effect described later from the ROM 406 is performed. If it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

FIG. 22B is a diagram showing an example of a judge state effect table. When the effect state included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is the judge state, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to, for example, the judge state effect table as shown in FIG. 22B, and is present. Judge production corresponding to points and production status counters is performed.

Specifically, when the effect is controlled according to the judge state effect table shown in FIGS. 22 (b) and 22 (1), when the point is 1, the enemy character is A → A → A → B (expectation is A). A judge effect that changes in the order of <B) is performed, and when the point is 2, a judge effect that changes the enemy character in the order of A → A → B → B is performed. Further, when the effect control is performed according to the judge state effect table shown in FIGS. 22 (b) and 22 (2), when the value of the effect state counter is N (the number of remaining games in the judge state is N), the effect mode is D1. A judge effect is performed by changing the number of -1 → D2-1 → D3-1 → ..., and when the value of the effect state counter is N-1 (the number of remaining games in the judge state is N-1), the effect mode is set. Judge production is performed by changing the turn of D1-2 → D2-2 → D3-2 → ....

Further, when the current effect state is the LMT state, the effect table corresponding to the LMT state (LMT state effect table) is referred to, and processing such as reading the effect data for executing the LMT effect described later from the ROM 406 is performed. If it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

FIG. 22 (c) is a diagram showing an example of an LMT state effect table. When the effect state included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is the LMT state, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the LMT state effect table as shown in FIG. 22 (c) and sets the counter to the counter. It is determined whether or not the corresponding trigger (start condition, end condition, etc. of the production) has arrived, and when the trigger has arrived, the production corresponding to the counter is performed.

Specifically, when performing effect control according to the LMT state effect table shown in FIGS. 22 (c) and 22 (1), the value of the effect state counter is 1 (the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 1), and the start lever 135. When the pressing operation (rebaon) of is accepted, the lottery table for the setting suggestion effect A shown in FIGS. 22 (c) and 22 (2) is used to respond to the current set value from among a plurality of types of effects A1 to A3. A predetermined effect is selected, processing such as reading the effect data for executing the effect from the ROM 406 is performed, and the setting suggestion effect A (for example, display of a character image) is executed.

Further, when the value of the effect state counter is 0 (the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 0) and the third stop operation is accepted, the lottery table for the setting suggestion effect B shown in FIGS. 22 (c) and 22 (2) is displayed. A predetermined effect is selected from a plurality of types of effects B1 to B10 according to the current set value, and processing such as reading the effect data for executing the effect from the ROM 406 is performed, and the setting suggestion effect B is performed. (For example, the background image of the end screen) is executed.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the case of a two-card betting game, when a control for continuously displaying a specific scene (not displaying a subsequent scene) is performed in the interlocking effect, the effect state is performed by the main control unit 300. Since the value of the counter is not updated, the first sub-control unit 400 continuously displays the scene corresponding to the value of the same effect state counter. The control method for continuously displaying a specific scene (not displaying a subsequent scene) in the interlocking effect is not limited to this example, and is interlocked with, for example, from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400. It may be configured not to send a command for displaying a subsequent scene in the production.

The effect mode, type, determination method, etc. of the setting suggestion effect are not limited to this example, and are, for example, according to the current effect state counter (the number of remaining games in the LMT state) as shown in FIG. 22 (d). The execution probability of the setting suggestion effect may be changed. For example, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect may be higher or lower when the effect state counter (the number of remaining games in the LMT state) is larger than when it is small.

<Operation of slot machine>
Based on the above features, the processes of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, with reference to FIG. 23, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 23 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt prohibition is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the operation is permitted to the WDT 314, and the initial setting is performed. Set the value, etc.

In step S102, the bet number setting / start operation acceptance process is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not a medal has been inserted, and preparations are made for sending an insertion command indicating that a medal has been inserted. If the player wins the re-game combination in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so that the player does not need to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if the start lever 135 is operated, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, a winning line confirmation process is performed in which the number of inserted medals is determined and a valid winning line is determined.

In step S104, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is acquired, and a winning combination internal lottery process is performed. In the winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current gaming state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the acquired random number value, and the result of this internal lottery is shown. Preparations are made for transmitting the internal lottery command to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result of the internal lottery, if any of the winning combinations (including the operating combination) is internally won, the flag of the winning combination is turned on.

In step S105, a reel stop data selection process for selecting reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery process. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. Further, in step S105, preparations are made for transmitting a reel stop data command including information regarding the selected reel stop data to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S106, the effect state control process A related to the control of the game state of the AT system described above is executed based on the start lever operation. In step S107, the effect processing is executed. In this effect processing, various effects are controlled.

In step S108, the reel rotation start processing is executed, and the rotation of all reels 110 to 112 is started.

In step S109, the reel stop control process is performed. In the reel stop control process, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any of the stop buttons is pressed, the reel stop data stop table is displayed in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Refer to it and stop any of the reels 110 to 112 according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop table. When all reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S110. In this step S109, the stop button reception command relating to the stop buttons 137 to 139 for which the stop operation was performed for each stop operation (specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command and the second stop operation). Prepare to send the stop button reception 2 command for the third stop operation, and the stop button reception 3 command for the third stop operation) to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel. Reel stop command related to the stop position (specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop for the third stop operation) 3 Command) is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S110, a winning determination process for determining a winning is performed. In this winning combination processing, when a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the player has won the small role 3 (bell). Further, in this step S110, preparations are made for transmitting a winning determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S111, a medal granting process is performed. In the medal granting process, if a winning combination with a payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S112, the game state control process is performed. In the game state control process, processing related to the transition of each game state of the RT system is performed, and the game state is transferred when the start condition or the end condition is satisfied. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command including information indicating the game state of the current RT system.

In step S113, the effect state control process B related to the control of the game state of the AT system described above is executed. In step S114, the high navigation state end processing related to the end of the high navigation state is executed.

With the above, one game is completed. After that, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-mentioned process. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S2006 in FIG. 24) of the main control unit timer interrupt process described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 24. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger for the main control unit timer interrupt. The process is started in a predetermined cycle.

In step S2001, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S2002, WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the count value of WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and WDT interruption does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the timer of the main control unit.

In step S2003, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each of the various sensors 318. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S2004, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed. In step S2005, the timer update process is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated in each time unit.

In step S2006, the command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S2007, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S2008, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S2003, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out to monitor the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc., and if an error is detected, (Not shown) Error processing is executed. Further, the medal selector 170 (medal blocker in which the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 operates), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) displays are set according to the current gaming state.

In step S2009, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S2011, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S2010.

In step S2010, various processes for terminating the timer interrupt end process are performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S2001 is set in each of the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S2011, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit>
Next, the process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 25. Note that FIG. 25A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 25B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 25C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 25 (a).

When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S3001. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing the internal winning information, which is information representing the result of the internal winning, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information representing the gaming state.

In step S3002, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S3003. In step S3003, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S3004, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S3005, the effect control process is performed. Here, the production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing a process such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing an effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S3006, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is an instruction to the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read in step S3005, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 418. In step S3007, the lamp control process is performed based on the process result of step S3005. For example, if there is an instruction to various lamps 420 in the effect data read in step S3005, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S3008, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to the shutter 163 in the effect data read in step S3005, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. In step S3009, information output processing is performed in which a command is set to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S3005, a setting is made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S3002.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 25 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S3101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 25 (c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S3201, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S3002 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 25A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S3002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S3202, a command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S3009, an effect random number value is updated, and the like are performed.

<Processing of the second sub-control unit>
Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 26. Note that FIG. 26A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 26B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 26C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 26D is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S4001 of FIG. 26A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S4001. In this initialization process, input / output port initial setting, initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 508, initialization process of the storage area in the VRAM 536, and the like are performed.

In step S4002, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S4003. In step S4003, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S4004, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S4005, the effect control process is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S4004, the process corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading the effect data for controlling the image of the background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading out the production data from ROM 506 other than this is included, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S4006, image control processing (details will be described later) is performed based on the processing result of step S4005. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S4005, the image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding a display image (notification image, background image) is executed. When this image control process is completed, the process returns to step S4002.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 26 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S4101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 26 (c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S4201, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S4002 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 26A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S4002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S4202, the effect random number value is updated.

Next, the image control process of step S4006 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 26 (d). The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S4301, an instruction to transfer image data is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 536 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 536), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 534 based on a table such as position information, and then an image from ROM 506 to VRAM 536. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 534 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536 based on the instructions set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S4302, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 534 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S4303. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it.

In step S4303, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 536 in step S4301, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 536, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), transparency, etc.) are instructed to VDP534. The VDP 534 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S4304, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S4305, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 534 based on the end of drawing the image is input, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S5306, and if not, the generation end interrupt signal. Wait for to be entered.

In step S4306, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

<Operation means>
Next, the operation means provided in the game console according to the present embodiment will be described.

The game console according to the present embodiment is configured to have a plurality of operating means including a first operating means, a second operating means, and the like.

Here, the operating means is a means capable of a certain operation, and the operating means is provided at a position where the player can operate, and at least an operating means that can be operated by the player or a player. Is provided in an inoperable position, and at least an operation means that can be operated by a clerk of a game store is included.

Examples of the operating means that can be operated by the player include a start lever 135, a stop button 137 to 139, a bet button 130, a bet button 131, an effect button (bet button) 132, and a medal return button described with reference to FIG. 133, in addition to the checkout button 134, direction keys (up arrow key, down arrow key, right arrow key, left arrow key), enter key, chance button, touch panel and the like can be mentioned.

As the operation means that can be operated by the clerk of the game store, for example, in addition to the power switch 244 that can be operated by opening the front door 102 described with reference to FIG. 15, the operation of setting change and setting confirmation can be performed. There are setting keys that can be started and setting switches that can be used to change settings and check settings.

The operation means may be composed of a plurality of operation units (for example, four up / down / left / right direction keys and one decision key). In this case, all of the plurality of operation units (for example, up / down / left / right 4). One direction key and one decision key may be defined as one operation means, or at least one of a plurality of operation units (for example, four direction keys up / down / left / right and one decision key) may be defined. At least one of them) may be defined as an operating means.

<Cancellation of production by betting operation>
Next, the cancellation of the effect by the bet operation will be described.

FIG. 27 (A) is a diagram showing changes in the image display and the mode of the sound in chronological order when the player selects the BGM sound by using the operating means during the AT game. Further, FIGS. 27 (B) to 27 (6) are views showing an example of an image display displayed during each period indicated by the reference numerals (0) to (6) in FIG. 27 (A). Is.

In this example, an example in which the player selects the BGM voice during the AT game by using the operating means during the AT game will be described, but the game state is not limited to the AT game and may be a bonus game or the like. Further, the items that can be selected by the player are not limited to the type of sound, for example, the type of image (for example, background image, character image, etc.) displayed by using the liquid crystal display device 157, the type of privilege, and the type of item. , The type of production, the type of production means, and the like. Further, the voice that can be selected by the player is not limited to the BGM voice, and may be a sound effect or the like.

In this example, since the game state is an AT game, as shown in FIG. 27 (B), an AT background image suggesting that the AT game is in progress is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. In front of this background image during AT, a number display (in this example, the character display of "total 260") indicating the total number of medals acquired during the AT game is displayed.

The game console according to this example has a BGM selectable state (first state) in which the player can select the BGM sound and a BGM non-selectable state (second state) in which the player cannot select the BGM sound. It is possible to move to the state).

In the BGM selectable state (first state), operations of the direction keys (up direction key, down direction key) and the bet button 132 (first operation means) (not shown) can be accepted.

When the up arrow key is operated during the BGM selectable state (first state), the BGM sound output from the speaker is switched in the order of, for example, BGM1 → BGM2 → BGM3 → BGM1 → ..., and the BGM sound is switched. Can be freely selected. Even if the operation of the up arrow key is not accepted, the BGM voice is automatically (operated) when a certain time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses during the period of the BGM selectable state (first state). It may be configured to switch (without depending on the operation of the means).

When the down arrow key is operated during the BGM selectable state (first state), the BGM sound output from the speaker is switched in the order of BGM1 → BGM3 → BGM2 → BGM1 → ..., and the BGM sound is free. It is possible to select to. Even if the operation of the down arrow key is not accepted, the BGM voice is automatically (operated) when a certain time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses during the period of the BGM selectable state (first state). It may be configured to switch (without depending on the operation of the means).

Further, if the bet button 132 (first operating means) is operated during the period of the BGM selectable state (first state), the BGM selectable state (first state) is changed to the BGM non-selectable state (first state). The control (first control) for shifting to the second state) is executed, and the BGM voice selected in the BGM selectable state (first state) is set (stored) as the BGM voice selected by the user.

Even if the previous game is a replay (even if the bet operation in the game is unnecessary), the bet button 132 (first operation means) is pressed during the BGM selectable state (first state). When operated, the control (first control) for shifting from the BGM selectable state (first state) to the BGM non-selectable state (second state) may be executed.

On the other hand, in the BGM non-selectable state (second state), the operation of the settlement button 134 (second operating means) can be accepted, but the direction keys (up direction key, down direction key) and the bet button 132 ( The operation of the first operating means) is invalid and cannot be accepted. Therefore, in the BGM non-selectable state (second state), the player cannot freely select and switch the BGM voice.

When the settlement button 134 (second operating means) is operated during the period of the BGM non-selectable state (second state), the BGM non-selectable state (second state) is changed to the BGM selectable state (first). The control (second control) to shift to the state of) is executed.

Hereinafter, the BGM selectable state (first state) and the BGM non-selectable state (second state) will be specifically described.

<BGM selectable state (first state)>
The states shown in FIGS. 27 (A) (0) and (B) (0) are the BGM selectable state (first state), and the BGM1 sound is set as the initial setting of the BGM sound. Is.

In this example, since the BGM1 sound is set as the initial setting of the BGM sound, the BGM1 image (in this example, “BGM1”” indicating that the BGM sound is the BGM1 sound is set in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. An image including a character string) is displayed, and BGM1 sound is output from the speaker at a volume A.

Further, since the same state is the BGM selectable state (first state), the BGM selectable image (in this example, the arrow pointing upward) indicating that the BGM sound can be selected above and below the BGM1 image. Down arrow) is displayed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 27 (A) (1) and (B) (1) are the BGM selectable state (first state), in which the BGM sound is switched from the BGM 1 sound to the BGM2 sound. be.

In this example, during the period of the BGM selectable state (first state), the upward key is operated at the timing shown in FIGS. 27 (A) and 27 (a), and the BGM voice is switched from the BGM 1 voice to the BGM2 voice. Therefore, a BGM2 image (in this example, an image including the character string "BGM2") indicating that the BGM sound is the BGM2 sound is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and the volume is displayed from the speaker. BGM2 audio is output at A.

Even if the operation of the up arrow key or the down arrow key is not accepted, if a certain time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses during the period of the BGM selectable state (first state), the BGM voice is heard. It may be configured to switch automatically (regardless of the operation of the operating means) (hereinafter, the same applies).

Further, since the same state is the BGM selectable state (first state), the BGM selectable image (in this example, the arrow pointing upward) indicating that the BGM sound can be selected above and below the BGM2 image. Down arrow) is displayed.

Further, in this example, since the bet button 132 (first operating means) was operated at the timing shown in FIGS. 27 (A) and 27 (b) during the BGM selectable state (first state), the bet button 132 (first operating means) was operated. The control (first control) for shifting from the BGM selectable state (first state) to the BGM non-selectable state (second state) is executed, and the BGM selectable state (first state) is selected. The BGM2 voice is set (stored) as the BGM voice selected by the user.

As shown in FIGS. 27 (B) and 27 (2'), when the bet button 132 (first operating means) is operated at the timing shown in FIGS. 27 (A) and 27 (b), a privilege to the player is provided. A cut-in image (in this example, an image including the character string "super heat!") Suggesting the addition of the above may be displayed. In this case, the bet button is displayed at the timing of FIGS. 27A and 27F described later. Even if 132 (first operating means) is operated, the cut-in image may not be displayed.

<BGM unselectable state (second state)>
The states shown in FIGS. 27 (A) (2) and (B) (2) are BGM non-selectable states (second state).

In this example, since the BGM sound is set to the BGM2 sound in the previous BGM selectable state (first state), the BGM2 indicating that the BGM sound is the BGM2 sound in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. An image (in this example, an image including a character string of "BGM2") is displayed, and BGM2 sound is output from the speaker at a volume A.

Further, since the same state is a BGM non-selectable state (second state), a BGM selectable image (upward arrow and downward arrow indicating that BGM sound can be selected can be selected above and below the BGM2 image). Arrow) is not displayed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 27 (A) (3) and (B) (3) are the timings shown in FIGS. 27 (A) and 27 (c) during the period of the BGM non-selectable state (second state). The direction keys (up arrow keys and down arrow keys) are operated with.

Since the same state is a BGM non-selectable state (second state), the operations of the direction keys (up direction key, down direction key) and the bet button 132 (first operation means) are invalid and accepted. Therefore, even if the direction key is operated, the BGM voice is not switched, and the player cannot switch the BGM voice.

Further, in this example, the settlement button 134 (second operating means) was operated at the timing shown in FIGS. 27 (A) and 27 (d) during the BGM selectable state (second state). Control to shift from the BGM selectable state (second state) to the BGM selectable state (first state) (second control) is being executed, and control related to settlement (payment of bet credits, payout of bet credits, etc.) is being executed. Withdrawal of remaining credits) is being executed.

According to this example, when the player unintentionally operates the bet button 132 (first operating means), the BGM can be selected by operating the settlement button 134 (second operating means). In addition to returning to the state (first state), control related to settlement (fourth control) can also be executed.

<BGM selectable state (first state)>
The states shown in FIGS. 27 (A) (4) and (B) (4) are BGM selectable states (first state), and BGM2 sounds are set as BGM sounds.

In this example, since the BGM2 sound is set as the BGM sound in the previous BGM selectable state (first state), the BGM2 indicating that the BGM sound is the BGM2 sound in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. An image (in this example, an image including a character string of "BGM2") is displayed, and BGM2 sound is output from the speaker at a volume B having a volume higher than the volume A.

In this example, when a predetermined time (40 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the third stop of the previous game, the sound output from the speaker is changed from volume A to volume B (> volume A), and the volume is increased. However, the present invention is not limited to this example, and the volume may not be changed or the volume may be decreased.

Further, since the same state is the BGM selectable state (first state), the BGM selectable image (in this example, the arrow pointing upward) indicating that the BGM sound can be selected above and below the BGM2 image. Down arrow) is displayed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 27 (A) (5) and (B) (5) are BGM selectable states (first state), in which the BGM sound is switched from the BGM2 sound to the BGM3 sound. be.

In this example, during the period of the BGM selectable state (first state), the upward key is operated at the timing shown in FIGS. 27 (A) and 27 (e), and the BGM sound is switched from the BGM2 sound to the BGM3 sound. Therefore, a BGM3 image (in this example, an image including the character string "BGM3") indicating that the BGM sound is the BGM3 sound is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and the volume is displayed from the speaker. BGM3 audio is output at a volume A lower than B.

In this example, since the BGM voice is switched, the volume is changed from the volume B to the volume A (<volume B), and the volume is reduced. However, the present invention is the present invention. The volume may not be changed, or the volume may be set to the default value.

Further, since the same state is the BGM selectable state (first state), the BGM selectable image (in this example, the arrow pointing upward) indicating that the BGM sound can be selected above and below the BGM3 image. Down arrow) is displayed.

Further, in this example, since the bet button 132 (first operating means) was operated at the timing shown in FIGS. 27 (A) and 27 (f) during the BGM selectable state (first state), the bet button 132 (first operating means) was operated. The control (first control) for shifting from the BGM selectable state (first state) to the BGM non-selectable state (second state) is executed, and the BGM selectable state (first state) is selected. The BGM3 voice is set (stored) as the BGM voice selected by the user.

<BGM unselectable state (second state)>
The states shown in FIGS. 27 (A) (6) and (B) (6) are BGM non-selectable states (second state).

In this example, since the BGM sound is set to the BGM3 sound in the previous BGM selectable state (first state), the BGM3 indicating that the BGM sound is the BGM3 sound in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. An image (in this example, an image including a character string of "BGM3") is displayed, and BGM3 sound is output from the speaker at a volume A.

Further, since the same state is a BGM non-selectable state (second state), a BGM selectable image (upward arrow and downward arrow indicating that BGM sound can be selected can be selected above and below the BGM3 image). Arrow) is not displayed.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 14) according to the present embodiment has a first operating means (for example, a bet button 132 shown in FIG. 14) and a second operation. The means (for example, the settlement button 134 shown in FIG. 14) and the control means (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 16) capable of shifting to any one of a plurality of states are provided. The state of the game console, one of the plurality of states, is a first state (for example, a BGM selectable state shown in FIG. 27) capable of accepting the operation of the first operating means, and is described above. One of the plurality of states is a second state in which the operation of the second operating means can be accepted (for example, the BGM non-selectable state shown in FIG. 27), and the period of the first state. When the first operating means is operated during the operation, the first control can be executed, and when the second operating means is operated during the period of the second state, the second control is performed. It is feasible and when the second operating means is operated during the period of the second state, a fourth control (for example, control related to settlement (payment of bet credits, payout of remaining credits, etc.)). ) May be executed, and the first control determines a specific option from among a plurality of options (for example, BGM) for shifting the first state to the second state. The second control is a control for shifting the second state to the first state (for example, releasing a specific option determined from a plurality of options (for example, BGM)). Control), and the fourth control is a game table characterized in that it is a control different from the second control.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, when the player unintentionally operates the first operating means, the second operating means returns the game to the first state. , A fourth control can also be performed.

Further, if the first operating means is operated during the period of the first state, a third control (for example, a control relating to a medal bet) may be executed, and the third control may be executed. , The control may be different from the first control.

With such a configuration, the operation of the first operating means can execute the third control together with the first control, and the convenience of the player can be enhanced.

Further, when the fourth control is executed, the execution result of the third control may be canceled.

With such a configuration, the execution of the third control not intended by the player can be canceled by the player himself, and the convenience of the player can be enhanced.

Further, a display means capable of displaying the selection effect display (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 14) is provided, and in the first state, the options (for example, BGM sound) in the selection effect display can be changed. It is a state, and the second state may be a state in which the options in the selection effect display cannot be changed.

With such a configuration, when the selection is fixed by a certain option that the player does not intend, the player can cancel the option and make the option reselectable, which is convenient for the player. Can be enhanced.

Further, when the third operating means is provided with a third operating means (for example, a direction key) and the third operating means is operated during the period of the first state, the option selected in the selection effect display is different. When the option is changed and the third operating means is operated during the period of the second state, the option selected in the selection effect display may not be changed to another option.

With such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the options can be changed by operating the third operating means.

Further, when a certain time elapses during the period of the first state, the option selected in the selection effect display is changed to another option, and a certain time elapses during the period of the second state. Then, the option selected in the selection effect display may not be changed to another option.

With such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the options can be changed over time.

<Demo display, game information display>
Next, the demo display and the game information display will be described. FIG. 28A is a diagram showing an example of a demo display, and FIG. 28B is a diagram showing an example of a game information display.

The demo display is a display displayed during non-game, and in this example, a character image of a certain character (Yoshimune) and a game information icon indicating that it is possible to shift to the game information display (in this example, " It is composed of an image) including a character string of "game information".

The demo display is not limited to this example, and for example, a special moving image may be displayed, an advertisement display related to the game store (announcement of an event or new machine installation, etc.) may be displayed, or the game machine may be displayed. You may display advertisements (announcement of new products, etc.).

The game information display is a display displayed during non-game, and is a display in which information related to the game is displayed. In this example, the payout table icon indicating that the display can be shifted to the payout table display (this example). Then, it is composed of an image including the character string of the "payout table"), a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination, a display of the number of payouts, and an operation image showing that it is possible to move the page and end the game information display. To.

The game information display is not limited to this example, and for example, the game method (tutorial) of the game table, the type of the game state, the content explanation, and the like may be displayed.

In this example, if the bet button 132 (first operating means) is operated while the demo display is displayed, the demo display can be switched to the normal background display, and the chance button (not shown) is displayed while the demo display is displayed. When (second operating means) is operated, it is possible to shift from the demo display to the game information display. Further, if the chance button (second operating means) is operated while the game information display is being displayed, the game information display can be switched to the demo display.

Hereinafter, an example of transition between the demo display and the game information display will be specifically described.

<Normal background display → Demo display>
First, an example of shifting from the normal background display to the demo display will be described.

FIG. 29A is a diagram showing an example of shifting from the normal background display to the demo display.

In this example, in a certain game, the third stop operation is performed at the timing shown in FIGS. (A) and (1) while the normal background display is being displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and the game is completed. Later, at the timing shown in FIGS. (A) and (2), the second time (40 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the third stop operation, so the normal background display is changed to the demo display, and the liquid crystal display is displayed. The display of the demo display is started in the display area of the device 157.

Further, in this example, after the display of the demo display is started, the first time (300 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the start of the demo display at the timing shown in FIGS. (A) and (3). The volume of the sound output from the speaker (for example, BGM sound) is changed from the player set volume to the player set volume while the demo display is continued in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

Here, the player set volume is the volume set by the player on the volume setting screen or the like, and the game store set volume is the volume set by the game store clerk or the like on the volume setting screen or the like. be.

<Demo display → Game information display → Demo display>
Next, an example of shifting from the demo display to the game information display and then switching to the demo display again will be described.

FIG. 29B is a diagram showing an example of shifting from the demo display to the game information display and then switching to the demo display again. The states shown in FIGS. 29 (B) (1) to (B) (2) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 29 (A) (1) to (A) (2). Is omitted.

In this example, since the chance button (second operation means) is operated at the timing shown in FIGS. (B) and (3) during the display of the demo display, the demo display is switched to the game information display. There is.

Further, in this example, since the chance button (second operating means) is operated at the timing shown in FIGS. (B) and (4) during the display of the game information display, the game information display is displayed again. It has moved to the demo display.

According to this example, if the chance button (second operation means) is operated after confirming the game information display while the demo display is being displayed, the demo display can be switched to again, so that the game information display can be performed. A player who wants to enjoy the demo display again after confirming the above can restart the demo display by his / her own operation, and can increase the satisfaction and the degree of freedom of the player.

Further, in this example, after restarting the display of the demo display, the first time (300 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the restart of the demo display at the timing shown in FIGS. (B) and (5). The volume of the sound output from the speaker (for example, BGM sound) is changed from the player set volume to the player set volume while the demo display is continued in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

According to this example, when the player intends to continue the game but wants to temporarily leave the seat due to the toilet or meal, the demo display can be changed to the game information display by his / her own operation. The setting can be maintained as the volume setting by the player.

<Demo display-> Normal background display-> Demo display>
Next, an example of shifting from the demo display to the normal background display and then switching to the demo display again will be described.

FIG. 30A is a diagram showing an example of shifting from the demo display to the normal background display and then to the demo display again. The states shown in FIGS. 30 (B) (1) to (B) (2) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 29 (A) (1) to (A) (2). Is omitted.

In this example, since the bet button 132 (first operating means) is operated at the timing shown in FIGS. (A) and (3) during the display of the demo display, the demo display is switched to the normal background display. ing.

Further, in this example, after the display of the normal background display is started, the second time (40 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the start of the normal background display at the timing shown in FIGS. (A) and (4). Therefore, the normal background display has been switched to the demo display again.

Further, in this example, after restarting the display of the demo display, the first time (300 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the restart of the demo display at the timing shown in FIGS. (A) and (5). The volume of the sound output from the speaker (for example, BGM sound) is changed from the player set volume to the player set volume while the demo display is continued in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

According to this example, if the bet button 132 (first operating means) is operated while the demo display is displayed, it is possible to shift to the normal background display, so that the player who wants to start the game as soon as possible can use it. The demo display can be interrupted and the game can be started by one's own operation, and the satisfaction and the degree of freedom of the player can be increased.

<Demo display-> Game information display-> Normal background display-> Demo display>
Next, an example of shifting from the demo display to the game information display, further shifting to the normal background display, and then shifting to the demo display again will be described.

FIG. 30B is a diagram showing an example of shifting from the demo display to the game information display, further shifting to the normal background display, and then shifting to the demo display again. The states shown in FIGS. 30 (B) (1) to (B) (3) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 29 (B) (1) to (B) (3). Is omitted.

In this example, since the bet button 132 (first operating means) is operated at the timing shown in FIGS. (B) and (4) during the display of the game information display, the game information display is changed to the normal background display. It is migrating.

Further, in this example, after the display of the normal background display is started, the second time (40 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the start of the normal background display at the timing shown in FIGS. (B) and (5). Therefore, the normal background display has been switched to the demo display again.

Further, in this example, after restarting the display of the demo display, the first time (300 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the restart of the demo display at the timing shown in FIGS. (B) and (5). The volume of the sound output from the speaker (for example, BGM sound) is changed from the player set volume to the player set volume while the demo display is continued in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

According to this example, when the bet button 132 (first operating means) is operated after confirming the game information display during the display of the demo display, it is possible to shift to the normal background display, so that the game information can be displayed. A player who wants to start the game as soon as possible after confirming the display can start the game by his / her own operation, and can increase the satisfaction and the degree of freedom of the player.

<Demo display → Game information display → Setting confirmation display → Demo display>
Next, an example of shifting from the demo display to the game information display, further shifting to the setting confirmation display, and then shifting to the demo display again will be described.

FIG. 31A is a diagram showing an example of shifting from the demo display to the game information display, further shifting to the setting confirmation display, and then shifting to the demo display again. The states shown in FIGS. 31 (A) (1) to (A) (3) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 29 (B) (1) to (B) (3). Is omitted.

The game console according to this example is provided with a third operating means (in this example, a setting key capable of starting a setting change or setting confirmation operation) arranged at a position where the player cannot operate. ..

In this example, while the game information display is being displayed, the first clerk operation (in this example, after opening the front door 102, the setting key (third operation) is performed at the timing shown in FIGS. (A) and (4). Since the operation) of rotating the means) in the predetermined insertion hole by 90 degrees in the positive direction is performed, the game information display is shifted to the setting confirmation display in which the set value can be confirmed.

Further, in this example, while the setting confirmation display is displayed, the second clerk operation (in this example, the setting key (third operation means) is rotated 90 degrees in the opposite direction to remove it from the insertion hole, and then the front surface. Since the operation of closing the door 102) has been performed, the setting confirmation display has been changed to the demo display.

According to this example, since the display of the game console can be displayed as a demo after the setting is confirmed, the setting confirmation work of the game console can be performed until just before the opening of the game store, and the convenience of the clerk of the game store can be improved. can.

When the first clerk operation is performed, the setting confirmation display is started, and at the same time, the display of the door opening display notifying the opening of the front door 102 is started, and when the second clerk operation is performed. , The display while the door is open may be erased at the start of the demo display.

<Transformation example of transition to demo display>
Next, a modified example of the transition to the demo display will be described. FIG. 31B is a diagram showing an example of shifting to the demo display again triggered by the operation (settlement operation) by the settlement button 134.

In this example, since the chance button (second operating means) is operated at the timing shown in FIGS. (B) and (1) during the display of the demo display, the demo display is switched to the game information display. There is.

Further, in this example, since the settlement button 134 is operated at the timing shown in FIGS. (B) and (2) while the game information display is being displayed, control related to settlement (payment of bet credits and remaining) While paying out credits), the game information display is switched to the demo display again.

Further, in this example, the chance button (second operating means) was operated at the timing shown in FIGS. (B) and (3) during the display of the demo display, but the game information display was not performed. The demo display is continuing.

According to this example, if the checkout button 134 is operated after confirming the game information display while the demo display is being displayed, the demo display can be switched to again. Therefore, the demo display is displayed after the game information display is confirmed. The player who wants to enjoy the game again can restart the demo display by his own operation, and can increase the satisfaction and the degree of freedom of the player. Further, since the control related to the settlement (payment of bet credits and withdrawal of the remaining credits) is started by operating the settlement button 134, the convenience of the player can be enhanced.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 14) according to the present embodiment has a first operating means (for example, a bet button 132 shown in FIG. 14) and a second operation. A gaming table equipped with a means (for example, a chance button), a display means capable of displaying a demo display (for example, the demo display shown in FIG. 28 (A)) (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 14). When the first operating means is operated while the demo display is being displayed, the demo display can be switched to the normal background display, and the second operating means is operated while the demo display is being displayed. Then, it is possible to shift from the demo display to the game information display (for example, the game information display shown in FIG. 28B), and when the second operating means is operated while the game information display is displayed, It is a game table characterized in that it is possible to shift from the game information display to the demo display.

In the conventional game console, if there is any operation while displaying the demo display, it will shift to the normal background display, so if you accidentally shift to the normal background display due to an erroneous operation while displaying the demo display. , In order to enjoy the demo display again, it was necessary to wait for a predetermined time until the demo display was resumed. However, according to the game console according to the present embodiment, if the second operation means is operated after confirming the game information display during the display of the demo display, it is possible to shift to the demo display again. A player who wants to enjoy the demo display again after confirming the game information display can restart the demo display by his / her own operation, and can increase the satisfaction and freedom of the player.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 14) according to the present embodiment has a first operating means (for example, a bet button 132 shown in FIG. 14) and a second operating means (for example, a pachinko machine). A game table provided with a chance button), a display means capable of displaying a demo display (for example, the demo display shown in FIG. 28 (A)) (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 14), and the demo. When the first operating means is operated while the display is displayed, the demo display can be shifted to the normal background display, and when the second operating means is operated while the demo display is displayed, the demo display can be switched to the normal background display. It is possible to shift from the demo display to the game information display (for example, the game information display shown in FIG. 28B), and when the second operating means is operated while the game information display is being displayed, the game information display is performed. When the first operating means is operated during the display of the game information display, it is possible to shift from the game information display to the normal background display. It is a game table.

In the conventional game console, if there is any operation while displaying the demo display, it will shift to the normal background display, so if you accidentally shift to the normal background display due to an erroneous operation while displaying the demo display. , In order to enjoy the demo display again, it was necessary to wait for a predetermined time until the demo display was resumed. However, according to the game console according to the present embodiment, if the second operation means is operated after confirming the game information display during the display of the demo display, it is possible to shift to the demo display again. A player who wants to enjoy the demo display again after confirming the game information display can restart the demo display by his / her own operation, and can increase the satisfaction and freedom of the player.

Also, after confirming the game information display while the demo display is being displayed, if the first operating means is operated, it is possible to shift to the normal background display, so the game starts as soon as possible after confirming the game information display. The player who wants to start the game can start the game by his / her own operation, and the satisfaction and the degree of freedom of the player can be further increased.

Further, the sound output means (for example, a speaker) is provided, and when a certain time (for example, 300 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the display of the demo display, the volume setting of the sound output means is changed to the volume setting by the game store. It may be changed.

With such a configuration, if the player intends to continue the game but wants to temporarily leave the seat due to the toilet or meal, the demo display can be shifted to the game information display by his own operation. , The volume setting can be maintained as the volume setting by the player.

Further, while the game information display is being displayed, the volume setting of the sound output means may not be changed to the volume setting by the game store.

With such a configuration, if the player intends to continue the game but wants to temporarily leave the seat due to the toilet or meal, the demo display can be shifted to the game information display by his own operation. , The volume setting can be maintained as the volume setting by the player.

Further, when a third operating means (for example, a setting key) arranged at a position where the player cannot operate is provided and the third operating means is operated while the game information display is displayed, the third operating means is operated. It is possible to shift from the game information display to the setting confirmation display, and even if the setting confirmation display can be shifted to the demo display when the third operation means is operated again during the display of the setting confirmation display. good.

With such a configuration, the display of the game console can be displayed as a demo after the setting is confirmed, so that the setting confirmation work of the game console can be performed until just before the opening of the game store, which enhances the convenience of the clerk of the game store. be able to.

<Interlocking production and non-interlocking continuous firing>
Next, the interlocking effect and the non-interlocking effect will be described.

The game console according to the present embodiment is configured to have a plurality of effect means including a first effect means, a second effect means, and the like.

Here, the effect means is a means capable of producing a certain effect, and the effect means can be a display means capable of displaying, a sound output means capable of outputting sound, or a means capable of outputting light. Light emitting means (light output means), movable means capable of a certain operation (movement), and the like are included.

Examples of the display means capable of displaying include a liquid crystal display device 157 described with reference to FIG. 14, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, and a reel (drum). Examples include a display device consisting of a projector and a screen, a touch panel, and the like.

Examples of the sound output means capable of outputting sound include speakers 272 and 277 described with reference to FIG. 16, musical instruments (percussion instruments and the like), bells and the like. Examples of the light emitting means capable of outputting light include various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp 123, etc.) described with reference to FIG. 16, and LEDs and the like. Can be mentioned. As the movable means capable of a certain movement (movement), for example, in addition to the reels 110 to 112 and the shutter 163 described with reference to FIG. 14, means capable of rotation, vibration, vertical movement, swing, and the like are available. included.

Further, each effect means is configured to have a plurality of elements including a first element, a second element, and the like. For example, the display means has elements such as display mode (display pattern), resolution, brightness (brightness), color, number of pixels, size of display area, and the sound output means is voice, volume, sound quality, frequency. The light emitting means has elements such as light emitting pattern, light emitting color, and brightness (brightness), and the movable means has operating patterns (opening / closing, rotation, vibration, etc.), operating speed, movable range, etc. Has the element of.

The game console according to this example has a lamp (first effect means, light emitting means) capable of executing a light emission effect (first effect) and a speaker (second effect) capable of performing a sound effect (second effect). It is provided with a liquid crystal display device 157 (third effect means, display means) capable of executing a background effect (third effect).

The light emitting effect (first effect) is an effect executed by using a lamp (first effect means, light emitting means) or the like, and is, for example, a certain emission color (for example, red or blue) or a certain emission. An effect such as outputting light from a lamp by a pattern (for example, lighting or blinking) is applicable. The first effect is not limited to the effect of outputting light from the lamp, and may be, for example, an effect of outputting light from another light emitting means such as an LED in place of (or in addition to) the lamp. good.

The voice effect (second effect) is an effect executed by using a speaker (second effect means, sound output means) or the like, and is, for example, a certain sound (for example, music, BGM, etc.), a certain volume. (For example, the volume set by the player, the volume set by the clerk of the game store, etc.) corresponds to the effect of outputting the sound from the speaker. The second effect is not limited to the effect of outputting sound from the speaker, and is, for example, an effect of outputting sound from another sound output means such as a musical instrument or a bell in place of (or in addition to) the speaker. There may be.

The background effect (third effect) is an effect executed by using a liquid crystal display device 157 (third effect means, display means) or the like, and is, for example, a certain display pattern (for example, a moving image, a still image, or the like). ), An effect of performing a certain display (for example, a background image display) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 with a certain color (for example, color, monochrome, etc.) is applicable. The third effect is not limited to the effect of displaying the background image, for example, a bonus effect performed during a bonus game, a continuous effect performed over a plurality of games, a special effect performed when a special condition is satisfied, and a demo. It may be a production or the like.

Hereinafter, specific examples of the interlocking effect and the non-interlocking effect will be described.

<Production in which the emission color of the lamp is not linked to the audio production>
Next, an effect in which the emission color of the lamp is not linked to the sound effect will be described. FIG. 32 (A) is a diagram showing an example in which the emission colors of the lamps do not interlock when the modes of the light emission effect by the lamp and the sound effect by the speaker, which are executed in parallel, are changed.

The light emission effect (first effect) is an effect including at least a light emission pattern (first element) and a light emission color (second element), and in this example, the first light emission effect (first aspect). One effect) and the fourth light emission effect (the first effect of the fourth aspect) can be executed.

In the first light emitting effect, the lamp (first effect means, light emitting means) is operated by the light emitting pattern of the first pattern (for example, a light emitting pattern in which the lamp is blinked by repeating turning on for 5 seconds and turning off for 2 seconds). At the same time, it is an effect of emitting light in the first color (for example, blue).

In the fourth light emitting effect, the lamp (first effect means, light emitting means) is operated with a light emitting pattern of a fourth pattern (for example, a light emitting pattern in which the lamp is blinked by repeating turning on for 2 seconds and turning off for 1 second). At the same time, it is an effect of emitting light in the first color (for example, blue).

The audio effect (second effect) is an effect that includes at least audio and volume as elements, and in this example, the second audio effect (second effect of the second aspect) and the fifth audio effect (second effect). The second effect of the five aspects) is feasible.

In the second sound effect, the speaker (second effect means, sound output means) outputs the sound of the first pattern (BGM1 sound in this example) at the player set volume (volume set by the player). It is a production to make you. The fifth voice effect is an effect of outputting the sound of the fourth pattern (BGM2 sound in this example) from the speaker (second effect means, sound output means) at the player set volume.

The background effect (third effect) is an effect that includes at least a display pattern and a color as elements, and in this example, the third background effect can be executed.

The third background effect is to display a display pattern (in this example, a background image display) in the first color (for example, color) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 (third effect means, display means). It is a production.

As shown in FIG. 32 (A), in this example, the first light emission effect (first effect of the first aspect) and the second audio effect (second effect of the second aspect) are parallel to each other. When the first condition is satisfied (in this example, when a music selection operation by a certain operation means is accepted), the first pattern of voice (BGM1 voice) is played from the speaker. The second audio effect (second effect of the second aspect) to output at the user-set volume is the fifth audio effect (fifth) to output the fourth pattern of sound (BGM2 sound) from the speaker to the player-set volume. It is possible to change to the second production of the five aspects), and
Further, when the first condition is satisfied (in this example, when the music selection operation by a certain operation means is accepted), the lamp is operated with the light emission pattern of the first pattern, and the first color (blue). ) Is the first emission effect (the first effect of the first aspect), in which the lamp is operated with the emission pattern of the fourth pattern and the fourth emission is emitted with the first color (blue). It can be changed to the effect (the first effect of the fourth aspect).

Here, the light emission pattern (first element) in the fourth light emission effect (first effect of the fourth aspect), that is, the light emission pattern of the fourth pattern is the fifth audio effect (fifth aspect). It is an element that synchronizes with the second production of. In other words, when the fifth audio effect that outputs the sound of the fourth pattern from the speaker is started when the first condition is satisfied, the light emission pattern in the light emission effect is also the fourth of the fifth audio effect. It becomes the fourth pattern in conjunction with the voice of the pattern.

The light emission pattern (first element) in the fourth light emission effect (first effect of the fourth aspect) may be any light emission pattern in which the sound of the fourth pattern and the timing of change are linked. The aspect of the pattern is not particularly limited.

On the other hand, the emission color (second element) in the fourth light emission effect (first effect of the fourth aspect), that is, the first color (blue) is the fifth audio effect (the fifth aspect). It is an element that does not synchronize with the second production). In other words, when the fifth audio effect that outputs the sound of the fourth pattern from the speaker is started when the first condition is satisfied, the emission color in the light emission effect is the fourth of the fifth audio effect. It is maintained in the first color without interlocking with the sound of the pattern.

<Production in which the emission color of the lamp is linked to the background effect>
Next, an effect in which the emission color of the lamp is linked to the background effect will be described. FIG. 32B is a diagram showing an example in which the emission color of the lamp is linked to the background effect when the mode of the light emission effect by the lamp and the background effect by the liquid crystal display device 157, which are executed in parallel, is changed. be.

The light emission effect (first effect) is an effect including at least a light emission pattern (first element) and a light emission color (second element), and in this example, the first light emission effect (first aspect). One effect) and the seventh light emission effect (the first effect of the seventh aspect) can be performed.

In the first light emitting effect, the lamp (first effect means, light emitting means) is operated by the light emitting pattern of the first pattern (for example, a light emitting pattern in which the lamp is blinked by repeating turning on for 5 seconds and turning off for 2 seconds). At the same time, it is an effect of emitting light in the first color (for example, blue).

In the seventh light emitting effect, the lamp (first effect means, light emitting means) is operated with a light emitting pattern of a fourth pattern (for example, a light emitting pattern in which the lamp is blinked by repeating turning on for 2 seconds and turning off for 1 second). At the same time, it is an effect of emitting light in a seventh color (for example, green).

The audio effect (second effect) is an effect that includes at least audio and volume as elements, and in this example, the second audio effect (second effect of the second aspect) can be executed.

In the second sound effect, the speaker (second effect means, sound output means) outputs the sound of the first pattern (BGM1 sound in this example) at the player set volume (volume set by the player). It is a production to make you.

The background effect (third effect) is an effect that includes at least a display pattern and a color as elements, and in this example, the third background effect and the sixth background effect can be executed.

In the third background effect, a display pattern (in this example, a background image display) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 (third effect means, display means) in the first color (for example, color). The sixth background effect is a display pattern (in this example, a background image display) in a seventh color (for example, monochrome) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 (third effect means, display means). ) Is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 32 (B), in this example, the first light emission effect (first effect of the first aspect) and the third background effect (third effect of the third aspect) are parallel to each other. When the second condition is satisfied (in this example, when the operation by the start lever 135 is accepted), the background image display of the first color (color) is displayed. The background effect (third effect of the third aspect) can be changed to the sixth background effect (third effect of the sixth aspect) for displaying the background image display of the seventh color (monochrome). ..

Further, when the second condition is satisfied (in this example, when the operation by the start lever 135 is accepted), the lamp is operated with the light emission pattern of the first pattern and emits light with the first color (blue). The first light emission effect (first effect of the first aspect) is a seventh light emission effect (first effect) in which the lamp is operated with the light emission pattern of the fourth pattern and emits light in the seventh color (green). It is possible to change to the first effect of the seven aspects).

Here, the light emission pattern (first element) in the seventh light emission effect (first effect of the seventh aspect), that is, the light emission pattern of the fourth pattern is the sixth background effect (sixth aspect). It is an element that is not synchronized with the third production of. In other words, when the sixth background effect for displaying the background image display of the seventh color (monochrome) is started by satisfying the second condition, the light emission pattern in the light emission effect is the sixth background effect. It changes from the first pattern to the fourth pattern without interlocking.

On the other hand, the emission color (second element) in the seventh emission effect (first effect of the seventh aspect), that is, the seventh color (green) is the background image display of the seventh color (monochrome). It is an element synchronized with the sixth background effect (the third effect of the sixth aspect) for displaying. In other words, when the sixth background effect for displaying the background image display of the seventh color (monochrome) is started by satisfying the second condition, the emission color in the light emission effect is also the sixth background effect. It changes from the first color (blue) to the seventh color (green) in conjunction with the color.

The emission color (second element) in the seventh light emission effect (first effect of the seventh aspect) is the seventh color of the sixth background effect (third effect of the sixth aspect). It suffices as long as it is an emission color in which the timing of change is synchronized with, and the colors of both may be the same or different.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 14) according to the present embodiment includes a first effect means (for example, a lamp or an LED) capable of performing the first effect. A gaming table including a second effect means (for example, a speaker) capable of performing a second effect, wherein the first effect is a first element (for example, a light emitting pattern) and a second. It is an effect including at least an element (for example, a light emitting color), and is the first effect of the first aspect (for example, the first light emission effect shown in FIG. 32 (A)) and the second aspect of the second aspect. When the first condition is satisfied in a state where the effect (for example, the second sound effect shown in FIG. 32 (A)) is executed in parallel (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”), for example, FIG. 32. (A) When the music selection operation shown in (1) is accepted), the second effect of the second aspect is shown in the second effect of the fifth aspect (for example, FIG. 32 (A)). It is possible to change to the fifth audio effect (shown), and in the first case, the first effect of the first aspect is the first effect of the fourth aspect (for example, FIG. 32 (A)). The first element in the first effect of the fourth aspect is an element synchronized with the second effect of the fifth aspect, which can be changed to the fourth light emission effect (shown in). The second element (for example, the first color which is a light emitting color) in the first effect of the fourth aspect is an element which is not synchronized with the second effect of the fifth aspect. It is a game table to play.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, when the production modes of the first effect and the second effect executed in parallel are changed, the first effect and the second effect are synchronized with each other. Since there are elements that are not synchronized with the elements, it is less likely that you will feel a sense of discomfort due to the gap between the effects, compared to the effects that completely synchronize the first and second effects, and the first and second effects will not be felt. The effect of the production can be enhanced.

Further, in the first case, the effect mode of the second effect may be changed after the effect mode of the first effect is changed.

With such a configuration, there is a difference in the time required to change the production of the first production means and the second production means, but by intentionally providing elements that are not synchronized, it is difficult to feel a sense of discomfort due to the difference between the productions. can.

Further, a third effect means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 14) capable of executing the third effect is provided, and the first effect of the first aspect (for example, FIG. 32B) is shown. The second condition is satisfied in a state where the first light emitting effect) and the third effect of the third aspect (for example, the third background effect shown in FIG. 32B) are executed in parallel. In the case (hereinafter referred to as "second case"; for example, when the operation of the start lever 135 shown in FIGS. 32 (B) (1) is accepted), the third effect of the third aspect is the third effect. It is possible to change to the third effect of the sixth aspect (for example, the sixth background effect shown in FIG. 32B), and in the second case, the first effect of the first aspect is The first effect of the seventh aspect can be changed to the first effect (for example, the seventh light emission effect shown in FIG. 32B), and the first element in the first effect of the seventh aspect is The element that is not synchronized with the third effect of the sixth aspect, and the second element (for example, the seventh color that is the emission color) in the first effect of the seventh aspect is the sixth. It may be an element synchronized with the third effect of the aspect of.

With such a configuration, when the production modes of the first effect and the third effect that are executed in parallel are changed, the elements and the synchronization between the first effect and the third effect are synchronized. Since there are elements that do not allow the first and third effects to be completely synchronized, it is less likely that you will feel a sense of discomfort due to the gap between the effects, and the effects of the first and third effects will be achieved. Can be enhanced.

Further, in the second case, after the production mode of the first effect is changed (for example, the music selection operation shown in FIGS. 32 (A) (2) and (A) (3) is accepted. After a certain period of time has elapsed from the above, after a certain period of time has elapsed since the operation of the start lever 135 was received, as shown in FIGS. (B) (2) and (B) (3). The production mode of the third effect may be changed.

With such a configuration, there is a difference in the time required to change the production of the first production means and the third production means, but by intentionally providing elements that are not synchronized, it is difficult to feel a sense of discomfort due to the difference between the productions. can do.

Further, the first effect means is a light emitting means (for example, a lamp or an LED), and the first element in the first effect is one of the light emitting pattern and the light emitting color of the light emitting means. The second element in the first effect may be the other of the light emission pattern and the light emission color.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to feel a sense of discomfort due to the discrepancy between the light emitting means and the other effect means, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect of the effect using the light emitting means.

Further, the second effect means is a sound output means (for example, a speaker), and the second effect of the second aspect is an effect of outputting at least a certain BGM from the sound output means. The second effect of the fifth aspect may be an effect of outputting at least a BGM different from the certain BGM from the sound output means.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to feel a sense of discomfort due to the discrepancy between the sound output means and other production means, and it is possible to enhance the production effect of the production using the sound output means.

Further, the third effect means is a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), and the third effect of the third aspect displays at least a certain background display on the display means. The third effect of the sixth aspect may be an effect of displaying at least a background display different from the certain background display on the display means.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to feel a sense of discomfort due to the discrepancy between the display means and other production means, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the production using the display means.

Further, the operation means may be provided, and the first condition may be a condition that is satisfied when the operation of the operation means (for example, a direction key capable of selecting a musical piece) is accepted, or the operation means is provided. The second condition may be a condition that is satisfied when the operation of the operating means (for example, the start lever 135) is accepted.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

The slot machine of the present embodiment starts rotation when a predetermined number of game media are loaded and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the acceptance of the rotation start instruction operation, the winning or not of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops the rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped match the predetermined payout conditions, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if they do not match, the game medium is used. It is a game table that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

Hereinafter, the slot machine according to the embodiment of the game console of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

The slot machine of the basic embodiment described below starts rotation when a predetermined number of game media are loaded and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. At the same time, based on the acceptance of the rotation start instruction operation, the winning or not of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels receives a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation to individually rotate the reels. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the symbol combination when the plurality of reels are stopped match the predetermined payout conditions, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if they do not match, the game medium is paid out. It is a game table that advances a series of games that end without paying out the game medium.

First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34. FIG. 33 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of a winning line.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33 corresponds to an example of the game console of the present invention, and has a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front side of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. Be prepared. Inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) with multiple types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a drive device such as a stepping motor.

In the basic embodiment, each symbol is printed on a strip-shaped member in an appropriate number at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 110 to 112. From the player's point of view, three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the display window 113, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. More specifically with reference to FIG. 34, the symbol displayed on the upper stage (position 1 shown in the figure) of the left reel 110 is displayed on the upper stage design of the left reel and the middle stage (position 2 shown in the figure) of the left reel 110. The symbol to be displayed is displayed on the left reel middle stage symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the figure) is displayed on the left reel lower stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (position 4 shown in the figure). The symbol is the upper symbol of the middle reel, the symbol displayed in the middle of the left reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure) is the middle symbol of the middle reel, and the symbol displayed in the lower row of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure). The symbol displayed on the lower part of the middle reel and the upper part of the right reel 112 (position 7 shown in the figure) is the symbol on the upper part of the right reel, and the symbol displayed on the middle part of the right reel 112 (position 8 shown in the figure) is the right reel. The symbols displayed in the middle symbol and the lower symbol of the right reel 112 (position 9 shown in the figure) are called the lower symbols of the right reel, respectively, and each symbol of each reel 110 to 112 is connected to each reel 110 to 112 through the display window 113. Three in each vertical direction, a total of nine are displayed. Then, by rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the basic embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 110 to 112, a backlight for illuminating each symbol displayed on the display window 113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 110 to 112, and the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. Based on the detection result of this optical sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line. The winning line is a line for determining whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination described in FIG. 37, which will be described later, is displayed. In the basic embodiment, the left reel middle symbol, the middle reel middle symbol, and the right. Only one line of the middle-stage winning line L1 composed of the reel middle-stage symbols is provided. FIG. 34 shows this winning line L1. The valid winning line (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "valid line") is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33 requires three medals, and when the number of inserted medals is less than 3, no winning line is valid, and when three medals are bet, the winning line L1 is set. validate. When the winning line is activated, the start lever 135 can be operated to start the game. The number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, it is composed of a right-down winning line composed of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel lower symbol, a left reel lower symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel upper symbol. A total of three winning lines that rise to the right may be set as valid winning lines, or a number of winning lines according to the number of bets may be set as valid winning lines. The area on the winning line L1 (the area consisting of the numbers 2, 5 and 8 in FIG. 34) may be referred to as the effective line area S1. Further, the area other than the effective line area S1 of the symbol display window 113 (the area consisting of the numbers 1, 3, 4, 6, 7 and 9 in FIG. 34) may be referred to as the non-effective line area S2.

For example, the notification lamp 123 has been internally elected to a specific winning combination (specifically, special role 1 and special role 2) in the internal lottery described later, or the special role internal winning state or special game described later. It is a lamp that informs the player that it is in a state. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. When the re-game lamp 122 wins a re-game combination (details will be described later), which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, the re-game is replayable (no medal is required). It is a lamp that informs the player. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 130 and 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the basic embodiment, one bet button 130 is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, and three bet buttons 132 are inserted each time the bet button 132 is pressed (upper limit of three). Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 121 lights up.

The chance button 190 is a button for directing.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by using the bet buttons 130 and 132, or the actual medals can be inserted (inserted operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the insertion means that both are included. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during the special game state) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize. In the following, it may be expressed that it is given to the player in the same meaning as being paid out to the player. In the basic embodiment, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 and 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 composed of a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138 and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be pressed. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel in this order. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. Further, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is "forward push operation order". It is called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player. These stop buttons 137 to 139 correspond to an example of the stop operation means.

The medal return button 133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 134 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker 277 (see FIG. 35) provided below the inside of the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and the sound of the speaker 272 (see FIG. 35) provided above the inside of the slot machine 100 is output to the outside on the upper part of the effect device 160. A sound hole 143 for the purpose is provided. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and an effect image display device 157 (liquid crystal) arranged behind the shutter 163. A display device) is provided, and when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is displayed on the front side of the slot machine 100 (player side, front side). ) Has a structure that appears. It should be noted that the display device may not be a liquid crystal display device but may be a display device capable of displaying various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen may be used. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of the basic embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of the basic embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface. The effect image display device 157 corresponds to an example of the effect execution means.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 35. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game and a main effect according to a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is composed of a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. Here, regarding the main control unit 300, if the data capacity becomes large, it becomes difficult to confirm the program, and there is a problem of security deterioration such as becoming a hotbed for unauthorized modification. Therefore, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 And the data capacity of RAM 308 is limited. The main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a game execution means, an advantageous section setting means, and a state setting means.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used at the time of internal lottery of a winning combination, and a reel design. A ROM 306 that stores an array, stop position, etc., a RAM 308 that temporarily stores data, an I / O 310 that controls input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 that measures time, number of times, etc. And, WDT (watchdog timer) 314 is installed. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data. It is determined and an interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 every interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor or the like and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request. For example, when the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47/8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 has a random number generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start signal when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when a start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main processing of the main control unit described later). Start).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 has various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal receiving sensor for medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 141) for each interruption time. , Start lever 135 sensor, Left stop button 137 sensor, Middle stop button 138 sensor, Right stop button 139 sensor, Settlement button 134 sensor, Medal payout sensor for medal paid out from medal payout device 180, Optical sensor for reels 110 to 112 (Index sensor 80), etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register storing the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect whether or not the medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135, and detect a start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, the middle stop button 138 sensor, and the right stop button 139 sensor are installed in the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in the corresponding bet buttons 130 and 132, respectively, and are inserted when the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Is detected. The checkout button 134 sensor is provided on the checkout button 134. When the checkout button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. Each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The optical sensors (index sensors 80) of the reels 110 to 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and each time the light-shielding piece (detection piece 50) provided on the reel frame passes through, L Become a level. The rotation position information indicating how much the reel is rotated from the reference position from once reaching the L level to the next L level is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. Will be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero. This rotation position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 is provided in the drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, the drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and the medal payout device 180. Drive circuit 326 for driving the motor, various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129 are game start lamp 121, stored number display. It is provided with a drive circuit 328 for driving 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127).

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is slotted in an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the state of the game) is output.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 is the voltage of the power supply. When the value is less than a predetermined value (9v in the basic embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400, and enables communication with the first sub control unit 400. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured so that a signal such as a command cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 receives the control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via the input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on this control command, and the basic circuit 402 temporarily stores data with the CPU 404. The RAM 408, the I / O 410 for controlling the input / output of various devices, and the counter timer 412 for measuring the time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various indicators, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and sends an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and the sound source IC 418 is provided with speakers 272 and 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and the speakers 272 and 277 in response to a command from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel lamp, bet button lamp, etc.) are provided in the drive circuit 422 via an input / output interface. Reel backlight 94, etc.) is connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided on the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, a sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 for each interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits / receives a signal to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including the display control of the effect image display device 157. The second sub control unit 500 is, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157 and a control unit that controls various effect drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). ), Etc., and may be configured by a plurality of control units.

The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, and the like. 512 and are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and sends an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and the ROM 506 and the VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
Next, the symbol arrangement applied to each of the above-mentioned reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. It should be noted that the figure is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols applied to each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in a planar development.

On each reel 110 to 112, a plurality of types (10 types in the basic embodiment) of symbols shown on the right side of the figure are arranged in a predetermined number of frames (21 frames of numbers 0 to 20 in the basic embodiment). Further, the numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112. For example, in the basic embodiment, the frame number 1 on the left reel 110 is a "watermelon symbol", the frame number 0 on the middle reel 111 is a "bell symbol", and the frame number 2 on the right reel 112 is "seven 1". "Design", are arranged respectively.

The slot machine 100 in the basic embodiment stops the corresponding reels 110 to 112 within the maximum retractable range (less than 5 frames in the basic embodiment) from the position where the stop operation is performed, in order to improve the fun of the game. It is configured.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. The figure is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and payouts (number of grants) of each winning combination.

The winning combination of the slot machine 100 includes a special role 1, a replaying combination 1-2, and a small winning combination 1-6. The types of winning combinations are not limited to these winning combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Among the winning combinations in the basic embodiment, the special winning combination 1 is a combination (operating combination) that shifts to a special gaming state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player by winning. In addition, the replaying roles 1 and 2 are roles that enable replaying without inserting a new medal. These special roles 1 and 2 and the replay games 1 and 2 may be referred to as "actuating roles". In addition, the "winning" in the basic embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operating combination without the distribution of the medal (without the payout of the medal) is displayed on the valid line, for example, the special combination 1, Includes winning replays 1-2. The special role 1 is a special role that is carried over to the next game if it is not determined to be a prize, and the other roles are general roles that are not carried over to the next game if it is not determined to be a prize. be.

The special role 1 is a role (actuating role) that shifts to the special gaming state (RT2) by winning a prize. However, medals will not be paid out for winning these roles themselves. In the corresponding symbol combination, the special role 1 is "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1". In the following description, the special role 1 may be referred to as "BB1" or "BB".

When the special winning combination 1 is internally won, the internal winning flag corresponding to the special winning combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag corresponding to the special combination 1 is set to on, the main control unit 300 shifts the state of the game to the special combination internal winning state (RT1). This flag is kept on until the corresponding operating combination is won, and it becomes easy to win these operating combinations in the next and subsequent games. Specifically, even if you do not win those roles in the game that was internally won in Special Role 1, the state will be the same as the state in which you were internally won in Special Role 1 in the next and subsequent games, and the corresponding symbol combinations will be all won. It will be easy to do.

The internal winning state of the special role will be described in detail later, but if the internal winning state of the special role is internally won by a role other than the special role, the symbols constituting the other roles will be preferentially aligned. At the same time, the reel stop control is executed.

The replaying roles 1 and 2 are winning roles (operating roles) that allow the game to be played without inserting medals (game media) in the next game by winning, and the medals are not paid out. That is, the game can be executed again with the same number of bets as the number of previously inserted cards. In the corresponding symbol combination, the replay combination 1 is "replay-replay-replay", and the replay combination 2 is "replay-replay-watermelon". Of the above replays, the replay 1 may be referred to as a "normal replay" and the replay 2 may be referred to as a "chance replay".

The re-gaming combinations 1 and 2 may be any role as long as the player can play the next game without inserting a medal. Therefore, for example, when a prize is won in the replay, the medal insertion may be automatically inserted in the next game (the number of medals inserted is reset in the medal insertion number storage area prepared in the RAM 308), or the replay may be performed. The medals inserted in the winning game may be carried over to the next game and used as they are.

Small roles 1 to 6 are prize-winning roles in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combinations are as follows: small role 1 is "ANY-cherry-ANY", small role 2 is "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon", small role 3 is "bell-bell-bell", and small role. 4 is "replay-bell-bell", small role 5 is "bell-replay-bell", and small role 6 is "bell-bell-replay". The corresponding payout number is as shown in FIG. 37.

Of the above small roles, small role 1 is "cherry", small role 2 is "watermelon", small role 3 is "bell", small role 4 is "left bell", small role 5 is "medium bell", and small role. 6 may be referred to as a "right bell". In the case of "ANY-cherry-ANY", the middle reel middle reel symbol of the middle reel 111 may be "cherry", and the symbols of the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 may be any symbol.

Here, the small winning combination 3 (bell) is a winning combination regardless of the order (pressing order) of the stop operations of the stop buttons 137 to 139, but the small winning combination 4 (left bell) and the small winning combination 5 (middle bell). And the small winning combination 6 (left bell) is designed to win a prize when the order of the stop operations of the stop buttons 137 to 139 matches the predetermined stop operation order. For example, the small winning combination 4 (left bell) wins a prize when the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 110, and the small winning combination 5 (middle bell) wins a prize when the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 111. Then, the small winning combination 6 (right bell) wins when the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 112. Hereinafter, the small roles 4 to 6 may be collectively referred to as a push order bell. In addition, the stop operation order for winning the internally won push order bell is also referred to as the correct stop operation order.

<Types of internal winners>
Next, the types of internal winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a lottery table for internal winners for each RT.

FIG. 38 shows 12 types of internal winning combinations (conditional device numbers 1 to 10) in which the combinations described with reference to FIG. 37 are combined. The winning combination in the game is one of the roles corresponding to this internal winning combination. These internal winning combinations are determined by a lottery at the start operation of the game.

Conditional device numbers 1 and 2 are both internal winning combinations including the special combination 1. Of these, the condition device number 1 is an internal winning combination in which the special combination 1 is independently elected and does not overlap with other combinations. When this role is internally won, it becomes possible to win the special role 1 (shift to the special game state (RT2)), but if the prize is not won, the special role is shifted to the internal winning state (RT1). In this case, as long as the other role is not internally won in the next and subsequent games, it will be possible to continue to win the special role 1.

On the other hand, the condition device number 2 is an internal winning combination in which the special combination 1 and another combination are internally elected. In the basic embodiment, the small winning combination and the replaying combination are configured to stop in preference to the special winning combination. For this reason, in a game in which the special role 1 and the other role are duplicated and internally won, there is a possibility that the other role will win (in the case of the re-game role, the prize will always be won), but the special role 1 will win the prize. do not do. It should be noted that the next game shifts to the special role internal winning state (RT1), and unless the other role is internally won in the next and subsequent games, it will be possible to continue to win the special role 1.

Conditional device numbers 3 and 4 are internal winning combinations composed of replaying combinations.

In the condition device numbers 2 and 4, the re-game combination 1 and the re-game combination 2 are won in duplicate. When these condition devices are internally elected, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination 2 is displayed on the valid line when a predetermined stop operation is performed, and when any other stop operation is performed, the re-game combination 1 is displayed. Stop control is executed so that the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the valid line. In the basic embodiment, the predetermined stop operation is defined as the left first stop, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, not only the first stop operation but also the second stop operation may be included in the predetermined stop operation. Well, the timing of the stop operation may be the above-mentioned predetermined stop operation, and these may be combined, and any operation condition can be adopted.

Conditional device numbers 5 to 10 are internal winning combinations composed of small combinations. Of these, the condition device numbers 8 to 10 define the operating conditions (here, the push order, hereinafter the correct push order) for winning the corresponding small winning combination (left bell, middle bell, right bell). In the following description, the condition device numbers 8 to 10 may be collectively referred to as a push order bell. In the above configuration, if the stop operation does not match the correct pressing order, it may be lost, but for example, it may be possible to win a winning combination with a small number of payouts, and it is always possible to win a winning combination. It may be configured to be used.

In the lottery table of the internal winning combination shown in FIG. 38, the horizontal axis represents each gaming state (RT), and the vertical axis represents each lottery value (the size of the range of lottery data). In each RT described below, the internal winning probability of the winning combination is a random number value acquired at the time of the internal lottery by using the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306 to obtain numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each winning combination. It is obtained by the value divided by the numerical data in the range of (for example, 65536). For example, in the replay low probability state (RT0), the lottery value of the special winning combination 1 is 50, and the winning probability of the special winning combination 1 is 50/65536 * 100≈0.06%. The lottery data is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each numerical range is associated with each combination or loss. It is determined which combination the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery corresponds to the lottery data, and the internal lottery combination (internal winning combination) is determined. For this lottery data, settings 1 to 6 having different winning probabilities for at least one combination are prepared, and a staff member of a game store or the like can arbitrarily select and set any of the set values.

In the basic embodiment, the internal winning probabilities of the conditional devices of the conditional device numbers 8 to 10 are equal for each gaming state, but the internal winning probabilities may be biased.

If the combination of each condition device is not won, it will be lost and basically the symbol combination corresponding to the combination will not be displayed. In addition, the fact that the symbol combination related to the winning is not stopped on the winning line may be referred to as "loss". In addition, the fact that the player did not win the role of any of the conditional devices may be expressed as "winning the loss".

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33, set values having different degrees of advantage for the player are set. Settings 1 to 6 are prepared as setting values. The higher the set value, the higher the advantage of the player tends to be.

<Type of game state (RT)>
Next, the types of game states of the slot machine 100 and their transitions will be described. FIG. 39 is a transition diagram of the game state (RT) of the slot machine 100.

The slot machine 100 is configured to be able to switch between a plurality of types of states having different advantages, a re-game low probability state, a special role internal winning state, and a special game state, and it is advantageous by shifting these states. The degree is changed to improve the fun of the game. In the following description, this gaming state may be referred to as RT, and the above-mentioned re-gaming low probability state, special role internal winning state, and special gaming state may be referred to as RT0, RT1, and RT2, respectively. be. Further, when switching between these RTs, the corresponding lottery table is changed (described later). The RT is controlled by the main control unit 300.

FIG. 39 shows each RT described above, and these transition conditions are described on the arrows. When the transition condition corresponding to each arrow is satisfied, RT transitions in the direction of the arrow. These transition conditions include, for example, winning a predetermined winning combination, internally winning a predetermined winning combination, stopping and displaying a specific symbol combination on a specific winning line, and digesting a specified number of games. , And a predetermined number of coins may be paid out.

Hereinafter, each RT will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

<Replay low probability state (RT0)>
RT0 has a lower internal winning probability of the replaying combination than RT1, and is the most disadvantageous RT for the player.

The winning combination in RT0 includes condition device numbers 1 to 10. If the winning combination is not won, it will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed. In addition, the fact that the symbol combination related to the winning is not stopped on the winning line may be referred to as "missing". In addition, the fact that the role was not won may be expressed as "winning the loss".

FIG. 39 shows that when the special combination 1 is internally elected with RT0 set, the state shifts to the special combination internal winning state described later.

<Special role internal winning state (RT1)>
RT1 is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to the special combination 1 is set to ON. In addition, the probability of winning a re-game combination is higher than that of RT0, which is more advantageous than RT0.

The winning combination in RT1 includes condition device numbers 3 to 10.

FIG. 39 shows that when the special combination 1 is won in RT1 (when the corresponding symbol combination is displayed), the process shifts to RT2.

<Special game state (RT2)>
RT2 is an advantageous RT in which the probability of internal winning of the bell (small winning combination 3) is higher than that of other RTs, and it is easy to obtain medals.

Only the condition device number 7 is the winning combination in RT2. The small winning combination 3 that is internally won by the condition device number 7 is a winning combination that wins the bell regardless of the operating conditions (operation timing, operation order) when the internal winning is achieved.

FIG. 39 shows that RT2 shifts to RT0 when the specified number (324 sheets, see the remarks column of FIG. 37) is paid out.

In the basic embodiment, it ends when RT2 pays out more than a specified number of cards, but it ends when a predetermined winning combination (for example, a single bonus) is won, or a predetermined number of times (for example, for example). It may be terminated when there is a prize (8 times) or when a predetermined number of games (for example, 6 times) are played.

<Non-advantageous section and advantageous section>
In the slot machine 100 of the basic embodiment, apart from the RT described above, the state of the game is managed by dividing it into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section. Of these, in the advantageous section, notification of the stop operation order for the internally won combination (hereinafter, may be referred to as operation navigation) is permitted, and this operation navigation is not displayed in the non-advantageous section. In the advantageous section, the operation navigation is displayed depending on the conditions, but the operation navigation may not be displayed even if the push order bell is internally won. Hereinafter, these states will be described with reference to FIG. 40. The figure is a diagram showing the transition of the game state regarding the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section of the slot machine 100.

In the basic embodiment, the initial state (for example, the state at the time of shipment from the factory) is set to the non-advantageous section. Further, when the RAM is cleared (setting change), this non-advantageous section is set. The state of the non-advantageous section is referred to as a normal state A. Further, in the basic embodiment, three types of advantageous section states are provided: a normal state B, a chance state, and an AT state. FIG. 40 shows that the four states of the normal state A, the normal state B, the chance state, and the AT state transition. In the basic embodiment, the advantageous section flag is set to off if it is a non-advantageous section, and the advantageous section flag is set to on if it is an advantageous section. I make a distinction. In addition, in order to prevent arousing the spirit of gambling, when the advantageous section continues for a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 games) or when the predetermined net increase number (for example, 2400) is exceeded. Is configured to be a non-advantageous section.

The state of the advantageous section may be only the AT state, or may be further provided with a precursor state before shifting to the AT state, and is not limited to the configuration of the basic embodiment. .. Similarly, there may be a plurality of types of states in the non-advantageous section.

Since the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section are set separately from the RT, for example, there is a case of shifting to RT2 during the advantageous section. However, in RT2, the push order bell is not internally won and the operation navigation is not displayed. Therefore, a non-advantageous section may be set once for RT2, and the section may be returned to the advantageous section after the end of RT2. .. Further, the configuration is not limited to the above, and the RT2 may be configured to internally win the push order bell and the operation navigation may be displayed.

Hereinafter, each state of the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section will be described.

<Normal state A>
In the non-advantageous section (normal state A), a lottery for shifting to the advantageous section is executed based on the winning combination. If you win this lottery, you will move to the normal state B in the advantageous section.

<Normal state B>
In the normal state B, the state shifts to the chance state when the condition for shifting to the chance state is satisfied. Further, when the transition condition is satisfied, the number of games in the chance state is set. Regarding this transition condition, for example, a condition established by executing a predetermined number of games in the normal state B, a case where a transition lottery to the game chance state is executed in the normal state B and the lottery is won. Any condition that is satisfied, such as a condition that is satisfied when the points (any of 1 to 3) to be added according to the result of one game in the normal state B are accumulated up to the specified number (100 points). Conditions can be adopted.

<Chance state>
In the chance state, an AT lottery may be held according to the winning combination. Then, if the AT lottery has not been won (the number of AT sets is 0) by the time the set number of games has elapsed, the game shifts to the normal state B, and if the number of AT sets is not 0, the state shifts to the AT state. In the transition to the AT state, the number of AT sets is subtracted by 1, and the number of remaining AT games is set to a predetermined number of games (for example, 50).

In the slot machine 100 of the basic embodiment, the AT lottery is executed in the chance state, but for example, the AT lottery (addition of the number of AT sets) may be performed when shifting from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section. The timing and execution conditions of the AT lottery can be arbitrarily adopted.

<AT state>
Next, the AT state will be described. In the following, the AT state may be simply referred to as AT.

In the AT state, when the push order bell (condition device numbers 8 to 10) is internally won, an operation navigation showing the correct push order corresponding to each is displayed. It should be noted that this operation navigation is not limited to the one indicating the pressing order, and may indicate the timing of the stop operation, for example, a display such as "Aim for ...!", And the pressing order and timing. It may indicate both of them. Further, on the payout number display 127, the 7-segment lights are lit in a manner corresponding to the order in which the correct answers are pressed (hereinafter, may be referred to as navigation lighting). The display on the payout number display 127 may also be lit in a mode corresponding to the timing of the stop operation, or may be lit in a mode corresponding to both the push order and the timing. ..

In the basic embodiment, the number of remaining AT games is subtracted as the game in the AT state progresses. Then, when the number of AT remaining games becomes 0, if the number of AT sets is larger than 0, a predetermined value (for example, 50) is set again for the number of AT remaining games, and if the number of AT sets is 0, the chance state is entered. Execute the lottery. If this lottery is won, it shifts to the chance state, and if it is not won, it shifts from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section (initializes the parameters related to the advantageous section). If the special game state (RT2) is reached in the middle of the AT state, the subtraction of the number of remaining AT games is stopped, and the subtraction is restarted when the RT0 is reached. The number of remaining AT games may be added by winning an additional lottery (executed at the time of an internal lottery in the basic embodiment).

It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the number of AT sets and the number of remaining AT games, and the AT state may be started and ended according to a predetermined condition (for example, when a specific gaming state is reached).

<Outline of processing>
Hereinafter, the processes of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset starts by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 41 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

When the power is turned on, first, in step S101, the main control unit initial setting process is performed. In this main control unit initial setting process, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt prohibition is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 are set, and the WDT 314 is set. Allow operation and set initial values.

In step S103, the game start process is executed. In this process, it is checked whether or not a medal has been inserted (maintenance or operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132), and the winning line indicator lamp 120 is turned on according to the insertion of the medal. When a medal is inserted, the first sub-control unit 400 is prepared to send an insertion command indicating that the medal has been inserted. If the player wins the replay in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so that the player does not need to insert medals. In addition, it is checked whether the start lever 135 is operated while the specified number (3 medals) of medals are used, and if the start lever 135 is operated, the number of medals inserted and the valid winning line are checked. Confirm and start the game.

In step S105, various lottery processes including an internal winner lottery process and the like are executed. In this process, the lottery table of the internal winning combination stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current RT, and an internal lottery (lottery of the combination) is performed using this and the random number value acquired from the random number generation circuit 316. Determine the internal winner. As a result of the internal lottery, if any combination (including the operating combination) is internally won, the flag of that combination is turned on. Further, in step S105, preparations are made for transmitting an internal lottery command including internal winning information indicating the result of the winning combination internal lottery to the first sub-control unit 400. For example, when the replay is internally won, an internal lottery command indicating that the replay is internally won is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the winning combination is won. If the result of the internal lottery is a loss (non-winning of the winning combination), an internal lottery command indicating the loss is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In addition to the information on the internal winning combination, the internal winning command includes information on the current advantageous section (including information on the number of remaining games such as the number of remaining AT games when the period is finite) and AT lottery. And information that can identify the result of the AT additional lottery is included. Of the above information, the information regarding the number of remaining AT games may not be included in the internal winning command in the non-AT state, but may be included in the internal winning command only in the AT state. Further, in the AT state, the internal winning command including the internal winning of the condition device numbers 8 to 10 also includes the operation instruction information indicating the correct operation order of the operation order (pressing order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139. ..

In step S111, reel stop data corresponding to the first stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In step S113, the reel rotation start process is executed on condition that the game interval timer (subtracted by the timer update process described later) is 0, and the reels 110 to 112 are started to rotate. Further, at the start of rotation of the reels 110 to 112, preparations are made for transmitting a reel rotation start command to the first sub-control unit 400. After that, when the reels 110 to 112 reach a predetermined rotation speed, the optical sensor provided on each reel is detected, and the symbol position of each reel is grasped, the stop operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is enabled. The game interval counter secures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 s in the basic embodiment) and suppresses gambling.

In step S115, the reel stop control process is executed. In this process, when any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is pressed after the stop operation is enabled, the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped. Specifically, each time the stop operation is performed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop table. Further, for the first stop operation, the reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared, and for the second stop operation, the reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting the corresponding command (first to third pressing command) to the first sub-control unit 400 for each stop operation, and each time the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the corresponding command (first to third pressing command) is prepared. Preparations are made for transmitting the first to third stop commands) to the first sub-control unit 400. When all reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S117.

In step S117, the winning determination process is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the player has won the small winning combination 2. After determining the winning combination, preparations are made for transmitting the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S119, if any winning combination with a payout has been won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is given (paid out), and the number of medals given is displayed using the payout number display 127.

In step S121, RT update processing is performed. In this process, RT is transitioned based on the conditions shown in the state transition diagram shown in FIG. 39.

In step S123, the game state update process is performed. Here, based on the result of the game, the status regarding the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section described with reference to FIG. 40 is updated. For example, when the normal state A is changed to the normal state B, the advantageous section flag is set to on, and when the AT state is changed to the normal state A, the advantageous section flag is set to off. In addition, preparations for sending a game state update command are made. This command includes information about RT, information about non-advantageous sections and advantageous sections (eg, advantageous section flags, number of AT sets and number of AT remaining games).

With the above, one game is completed. After that, the game progresses by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-mentioned process.

<Main control unit 300 timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 42. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the basic embodiment), and the timer interrupt signal is used as an opportunity to interrupt the timer of the main control unit. The process is started in a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT314 is periodically (basically) so that the count value of the WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the basic embodiment) and WDT interruption does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the main control unit timer.

In step S205, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each of the various sensors 318. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area. The state of the optical sensor is confirmed by this process.

In step S207, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status (acquiring various interrupt status based on the signals from the various sensors 318) are executed. .. For example, if the interrupt status is the medal insertion process, the medal insertion acceptance process is performed, and if the interrupt status is the payout process, the medal payout process is performed.

In step S209, the timer update process is performed. For example, a process of updating various timers in each time unit, such as subtracting a game interval timer, is executed.

In step S211 the command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission in the main process of the main control unit 300, the timer interrupt process, and the like are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), command type (in the basic embodiment, a basic command, an input command, and a start lever). Reception command, internal winning command, production command associated with production lottery processing, reel rotation start command associated with the start of rotation of reels 110 to 112, first to third pressing commands associated with acceptance of operations of stop buttons 137 to 139, reel Consists of 1st to 3rd stop commands associated with 110 to 112 stops, winning commands, payout number commands and payout end commands associated with medal payout processing, status update commands), and command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). Has been done.

In the first sub control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S213, the external signal setting process is performed. In this external signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S205, the signal states of various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, the error is detected. (Not shown) Error processing is executed. Further, the medal selector 170 (medal blocker in which the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 operates), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) displays are set according to the current gaming state.

In step S217, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is received (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and when the low voltage signal is not received (when the power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219. move on.

In step S219, the timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, processing such as setting the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S221, information that needs to be saved, such as a specific variable for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery and a stack pointer, is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and a predetermined area including at least the used area of the RAM 308 is included. The checksum value for the area is derived and stored in the RAM 308, and the power supply flag indicating that the power failure processing has been performed is set to ON.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit 400>
Next, the process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 43. Note that FIG. 43A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 43B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 43 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step S301, various initial settings are performed. This initial setting is performed when the power is turned on. In this process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing the internal winning information, which is information representing the result of the internal winning, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information representing the gaming state.

In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305.

In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S309, the effect control process is performed. Here, the process of expanding the effect data and setting the device data in the effect execution area provided in the RAM 408, the process of setting the effect data in the effect reservation area provided in the RAM 408, and the received command. Based on the information contained in the command and the command, the effect data is set and the control process is executed. In addition, the effect data set in the effect reservation area and the device data set in the effect execution area may be updated (overwritten) with other data. In this case, the effect content is changed based on the overwritten data.

In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, control data is acquired from the device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the speakers 272 and 277, and the acquired control data is output to the sound source IC 418 to execute the effect by sound.

In step S313, the lamp control process is performed based on the process result of step S309. For example, control data is acquired from the device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the various lamps 420, and the acquired control data is output to the drive circuit 422 to execute the effect by the lamp.

In step S315, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, control data is acquired from the device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the shutter 163, and the acquired control data is output to the drive circuit 424 to execute the effect by the shutter 163.

In step S317, information output processing is performed in which a control command is set to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the effect image display device 157, preparations are made to transmit this device data to the second sub-control unit 500, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 43 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S321 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 43 (c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the basic embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S331, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 43A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S333, device data is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S315, and the effect random number value is updated.

<Processing of the second sub control unit 500>
Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 44. Note that FIG. 44A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 44B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 44 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 44D is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S401 of FIG. 44A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, input / output port initial setting, initialization process of a storage area in RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S403, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405.

In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S409, the effect control process is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S407, the process corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading the effect data for controlling the image of the background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading out the production data from ROM 506 other than this is included, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S411, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S409. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S409, the image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding a display image (notification image, background image) is executed. This image control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 44 (d). When this image control process is completed, the process returns to step S403.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 44 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S415 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 44 (c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the basic embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S417, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S403 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 44A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S419, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

Next, the image control process of step S411 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 44 (d). The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S421, an instruction to transfer image data is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 518 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on a table such as position information, and then an image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S423, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S425. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it.

In step S425, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S421, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) are instructed to VDP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S427, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S429, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of drawing the image is input, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S431. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is generated. Wait for to be entered.

In step S431, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

[Pushbutton configuration]
Hereinafter, the push button 600 used for the bet buttons 130 and 132, the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. 45 is a perspective view showing a button body 610 constituting the push button 600, and FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view showing the push button 600.

The push button 600 has a button body 610 (hatching that descends to the left in FIG. 46), a button base 620 (vertical and horizontal cross hatching in FIG. 46), and a return spring 630 (diagonal cross hatch in FIG. 46). The button body 610 has a transparent button head 611, a body portion 612 having a smaller diameter than the button head 611, and two buttons provided on the opposite side of the body portion 612 from the button head 611. It has legs 613. The button body 612 is a hollow body, and light from a separately provided light emitter (for example, LED 720 on the substrate 700 described later) hits the button head 611 through the button body 612 and causes the body head 611 to emit light. It is configured to be able to. Each of the two leg portions 613 is provided with a locking portion 614 that engages with the button base 620. Further, the tip of the leg portion 613 plays the role of a detection piece with respect to the detection sensor 710 described later.

The push button 600 is in a state in which the button body 610 and the return spring 630 are housed inside the button base 620. FIG. 46A shows a push button 600 in a state in which the button body 610 is not pressed (hereinafter, referred to as a non-pressed state). In this non-pressed state, the elastic force of the return spring 630 applies a force to push the button body 610 to the side opposite to the pressing direction, but since the locking portion 614 is locked to the button base 620, the button body 610 can be pressed. It is in a fixed position. When the button body 610 is pressed from this state, the state shown in FIG. 46 (B) (hereinafter referred to as the pressed state) is obtained. In this pressed state, the return spring 630 contracts due to the force of pressing the button body 610, the locking portion 614 separates from the button base 620, and the button body 610 is pushed until the button head 611 is locked by the button base 620. After that, when the button main body 610 is not pressed, the state returns to the non-pressed state shown in FIG. 46 (A) again. With the configuration described above, the push button 600 allows the button body 610 to move within a certain range.

Next, a configuration for detecting movement by pressing the button body 610 described above will be described. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the button body 610 and the detection sensor 710. Of these, FIGS. 47 (A1) and 47 (B1) show the positional relationship when viewed from the same direction as in FIG. 46. Further, FIG. 47 (A2) is a view shown from another angle (side surface side) so that it is easy to see that the leg portion 613 is in the position sandwiched between the detection sensors 710 in the state of FIG. 47 (A1). FIG. 47 (B2) is a diagram showing the leg portion 613 from another angle (side surface side) so that it can be easily seen that the leg portion 613 is in the position sandwiched between the detection sensors 710 in the state of FIG. 47 (B1). In these figures, the button base 620 and the return spring 630 are not shown.

The detection sensor 710 has a light emitting element 711 and a light receiving element 712, and a leg portion 613 that moves in the pressing direction by pressing the button main body 610 has a detection region between the light emitting element 711 and the light receiving element 712 of the detection sensor 710. By being inserted into the region connecting the light emitting element 711 and the light receiving element 712), light shielding is detected. FIGS. 47 (A1) and 47 (A2) show that the leg portion 613 is not in the detection region between the light emitting element 711 and the light receiving element 712 when the button main body 610 is not pressed. Further, FIGS. 47 (B1) and 47 (B2) show that the leg portion 613 is in the detection region between the light emitting element 711 and the light receiving element 712 when the button main body 610 is in the pressed state. With this configuration, the push button 600 is detected. In the non-pressed state, the leg 613 is not in the detection area between the light emitting element 711 and the light receiving element 712, but the leg 613 is in a state of waiting in the space partitioned by the detection sensor 710. ing. By waiting at this position in the non-pressed state, it is possible to quickly detect that the button body 610 has been pressed. Further, in this configuration, the amount of movement of the button body 610 can be reduced, so that the durability of the push button 600 can be improved.

In the push button 600, the leg portion 613 of the button body 610 plays two roles, a detection piece for detecting the press and a locking portion for locking to the button base 620. As described above, by forming the detection piece and the locking portion in a simple structure, the button body 610 can be prevented from being damaged. In the example of FIG. 45, a configuration in which a plurality of (two in the figure) leg portions 613 are provided on the button main body 610 has been described, but a configuration in which only one leg portion including a detection piece and a locking portion is provided is provided. May be. Further, when a plurality of leg portions 613 are provided, one of the leg portions 613 may be the detection target as shown in the example of FIG. 47, but the leg portions 613 other than the detection target are illegal. It is possible to give the person who tries to perform the role of a dummy detection piece, and it is possible to make it difficult to cheat.

In the example of FIG. 45, the leg portion 613 of the button body 610 has a flat shape in the radial direction of the button body 610, but the shape of the leg portion 613 is not limited, and for example, FIG. 48. As in the example of (A), the leg portion 613 may have a flat shape in the circumferential direction. Note that FIGS. 48 (B) and 48 (C) show the positional relationship between the leg portion 613 and the detection sensor 710 when the button body 610 of FIG. 48 (A) is adopted. FIG. 48 (B) shows that the leg portion 613 is not in the detection region between the light emitting element 711 and the light receiving element 712 when the button body 610 is not pressed, and FIG. 48 (C) shows. Shows that the leg portion 613 is in the detection region between the light emitting element 711 and the light receiving element 712 when the button main body 610 is in the pressed state.

In the example of FIGS. 45 and 48 (A), the configuration in which the locking portion 614 is provided so as to project inside the button body 610 has been described. For example, the locking portion 614 is outside the button body 610. It may be provided so as to project to the surface, and the arrangement and orientation of the locking portion 614 are not limited.

[Detection sensor and board layout for multiple button bodies]
When using the push button 600 described above, a plurality of push buttons 600 may be provided side by side as in the three stop buttons 137 to 139 of the stop button unit 136 in FIG. 33. Hereinafter, the positional relationship between the button body 610 and the detection sensor 710 will be described with reference to FIG. 49 when a plurality of the pushbuttons 600 described above are arranged side by side. The figure is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of the button main body 610 and the detection sensor 710. In this figure, the button base 620 and the return spring 630 are not shown.

In FIGS. 49 (A), (B) and (C), three button main bodies 610 (hereinafter, left button main body 610L, middle button main body 610C, and right button main body 610R) arranged in a direction orthogonal to the pressing direction are referred to. )It is shown. In these button main bodies 610, a detection sensor 710 for detecting a press on one of the leg portions 613 is provided. These detection sensors 710 are provided on a common substrate 700. In addition to the detection sensor 710, the substrate 700 is provided with three LEDs 720 for individually emitting light from the inside of the three button bodies 610 and a harness connector 730. The harness connector 730 is connected to a harness (connection cable) that connects to a device to which the detection signal of the push button 600 is transmitted, such as a board of the main control unit 300.

In each of FIGS. 49 (A), (B), and (C), all the legs 613 of the three button bodies 610 are arranged in a straight line. In FIG. 49A, the detection sensor 710 is provided on the leg 613 on the side adjacent to each other for the left button main body 610L and the middle button main body 610C, and the detection sensor 710 is provided on the left leg 613 of the right button main body. It is provided. In FIG. 49B, the detection sensor 710 is provided on the leg 613 on the side adjacent to each other for the left button main body 610L and the middle button main body 610C as in FIG. 49A, but the right side of the right button main body is provided. It is different from FIG. 49 (A) in that the detection sensor 710 is provided on the leg portion 613 of the above. In FIG. 49 (C), the detection sensors 710 of the three button bodies 610 are all provided on the right leg portion 613.

As shown in FIGS. 49A and 49B, when two detection sensors 710 are arranged close to each other on the substrate 700, the size of the substrate 700 can be reduced or a space on the substrate 700 can be secured. Can be done. For example, the substrate 700 of FIG. 49 (A) is smaller than the substrate 700 of FIG. 49 (C). In the example of FIG. 49A, the size of the substrate 700 can be reduced while the connector 730 is arranged between the detection sensors 710 of the middle button main body 610C and the right button main body 610R. Further, in FIG. 49 (B), the distance between the detection sensors 710 of the middle button main body 610C and the right button main body 610R is wider than that in the example of FIG. 49 (C). In the example of FIG. 49B, a larger connector 730 can be arranged between the detection sensors 710 of the middle button main body 610C and the right button main body 610R.

The effect of reducing the size of the board 700 or securing the space on the board 700 described above is achieved in the two adjacent button main bodies 610 (the left button main body 610L and the middle button main body 610C in FIGS. 49A and 49C). It occurs when the detection sensor 710 is brought as close as possible. Such a configuration is not limited to the configuration in which all the leg portions 613 are aligned in a straight line as in the example of FIGS. 49 (A) and 49 (B), but the leg portions 613 of the two adjacent button main bodies 610 are not limited to the configuration. Of these, the detection sensor 710 may be provided on the leg portion 613 closer to each other's button body 610.

Further, when the detection sensors 710 in the two adjacent button main bodies 610 are configured to be as close as possible, the positional relationship between these detection sensors 710 is different from the positional relationship between the button main bodies 610. For example, in FIGS. 49A and 49B, the positional relationship (distance and direction) of the detection sensor 710 of the middle button body 610C with respect to the detection sensor 710 of the left button body 610L and the position of the middle button body 610C with respect to the left button body 610L. The relationship is different. On the other hand, in FIG. 49C, the positional relationship (distance and direction) of the detection sensor 710 of the middle button body 610C with respect to the detection sensor 710 of the left button body 610L and the positional relationship of the middle button body 610C with respect to the left button body 610L are shown. It is the same.

In the configuration of FIG. 49 (C), when the position of the detection sensor 710 with respect to one of the button main bodies 610 is known, the position of the detection sensor 710 with respect to the other button main body 610 can be easily guessed, so that fraudulent activity is easy. Can be done. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 49A and 49B, when the positional relationship between the detection sensors 710 in the two adjacent button bodies 610 is different from the positional relationship between the button bodies 610 is adopted. Since the position of the detection sensor 710 with respect to the button body 610 is different for each button body 610, it is possible to make it difficult to perform fraudulent acts. It is not essential that the detection sensors 710 in the two adjacent button bodies 610 are as close as possible to each other in order to achieve this effect.

In the example of FIG. 49, the thickness direction of the substrate 700 is the same as the pressing direction, but the orientation of the substrate is not particularly limited. For example, the thickness direction of the substrate 700 is orthogonal to the pressing direction. It may be configured to be. FIG. 50 shows an example of a configuration in which the thickness direction of the substrate 700 is orthogonal to the pressing direction. Depending on the orientation of the substrate 700, the overall size may be made more compact.

[Operation example of additional notification effect]
As described above, in the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, the operation navigation may be executed when the AT state is set. FIG. 51 (A) shows an example of the background in the AT state, and FIG. 51 (B) displays the operation navigation superimposed on the background in the AT state shown in FIG. 51 (A). An example is shown. In the AT state, the number of remaining AT games is subtracted as the game progresses, but the number of remaining AT games may be added. At this time, a configuration is adopted in which an effect of notifying the addition is executed by using an operation means including the chance button 190. FIG. 51 (C) shows an example of an effect of urging the operation of the chance button 190 (hereinafter, chance button operation display), and FIG. 51 (D) shows an effect of notifying the addition (hereinafter, addition G). An example of (number display) is shown. In the example of FIGS. 51 (C) and 51 (D), a background different from the background of FIGS. 51 (A) and 51 (B) is used. Note that FIG. 51 (B) shows an example of displaying the operation navigation while the background in the AT state shown in FIG. 51 (A) is displayed, but the operation navigation is displayed on the background during the addition effect. May be displayed.

Hereinafter, the operation of these effects will be described with reference to the drawings. In the explanation of the following operation examples, it is assumed that the AT state is set unless otherwise specified. In addition, the start operation, the first stop operation, the second stop operation, the third stop operation, the bet operation, and the start operation are performed in this order (corresponding to the timings T1 to T6), and the chance button 190 is operated during these operations. The case where the operation (corresponding to the timing TC) is interrupted will be described.

[[Operation example (1)]]
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the second stop operation and the third stop operation (between timings T3 and T4) when the number of remaining AT games is added. be. In this example, it is assumed that the first start operation (timing T1) has internally won a role (including a loss) other than the replaying combination.

In the operation example of FIG. 52, it is assumed that the effect of notifying in this game (game starting from timing T1) that the lottery for adding the number of remaining AT games is won in the game at the time of the start operation or before is executed. In this case, when the start operation is performed, the display content is switched from the background during AT (FIG. 51 (A)) to the chance button operation display (FIG. 51 (C)) in the effect image display device 157. Further, the lamp inside the chance button 190 is switched from the off state to the on state. With these effects, the player can be prompted to operate the chance button 190.

Subsequently, it is assumed that the chance button 190 is operated between the second stop operation and the third stop operation (between timings T3 and T4) (timing TC). At this time, in the effect image display device 157, the display content is switched from the chance button operation display to the additional G number display (FIG. 51 (D)), and the lamp inside the chance button 190 is switched from the lit state to the extinguished state. In this example, the case where the chance button 190 is operated between the second stop operation and the third stop operation (between timings T3 and T4) is shown, but between the start operation and the third stop operation. By operating the chance button 190 of, the same operation is executed.

After that, when the third stop operation (timing T4) is performed, the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 are turned on. At this time, the effect image display device 157 continues to display the additional G number. Then, when the bet operation is performed (timing T5), the display of the effect image display device 157 is added and the display is switched from the G number display to the background during AT (FIG. 51 (A)), and the inside of the bet buttons 130 and 132 is changed. The lamp switches from the lit state to the off state. As for the number of remaining AT games after switching to the background during AT, the value after being added is displayed. In this example, it is shown that the push order bell (condition device numbers 8 to 10) is internally elected at the time of the next start operation (timing T6), and the operation navigation (FIG. 51 (B)) is executed. There is.

[[Operation example (2)]]
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the third stop operation and the bet operation (between timings T4 and T5) when the number of remaining AT games is added. In this example, it is assumed that the first start operation (timing T1) has internally won a role (including a loss) other than the replaying combination.

In the operation example of FIG. 53, it is assumed that the effect of notifying in this game (game starting from timing T1) that the lottery for adding the number of remaining AT games is won in the game at the time of the start operation or before is executed. In this case, when the start operation is performed, the display content is switched from the background during AT (FIG. 51 (A)) to the chance button operation display (FIG. 51 (C)) in the effect image display device 157. Further, the lamp inside the chance button 190 is switched from the off state to the on state. With these effects, the player can be prompted to operate the chance button 190.

Subsequently, it is assumed that the third stop operation is operated without the chance button 190 being operated (timing T4). At this time, the chance button operation display continues on the effect image display device 157, and the lighting state of the lamp inside the chance button 190 is maintained. Further, the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 are turned on.

Then, it is assumed that the chance button 190 is operated between the third stop operation and the bet operation (between timings T4 and T5) (timing TC). At this time, in the effect image display device 157, the display content is switched from the chance button operation display to the additional G number display (FIG. 51 (D)), and the lamp inside the chance button 190 is switched from the lit state to the extinguished state. The lighting state of the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 is maintained.

After that, when the bet operation is performed (timing T5), the display of the effect image display device 157 is added and the display is switched from the G number display to the background during AT (FIG. 51 (A)), and the inside of the bet buttons 130 and 132 is changed. The lamp switches from the lit state to the off state. As for the number of remaining AT games after switching to the background during AT, the value after being added is displayed. In this example, it is shown that the push order bell (condition device numbers 8 to 10) is internally elected at the time of the next start operation (timing T6), and the operation navigation (FIG. 51 (B)) is executed. There is.

[[Operation example (3)]]
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the bet operation and the start operation (between the timing T5 and T6) when the number of AT remaining games is added. In this example, it is assumed that the first start operation (timing T1) has internally won a role (including a loss) other than the replaying combination.

In the operation example of FIG. 54, it is assumed that the effect of notifying in this game (game starting from timing T1) that the lottery for adding the number of remaining AT games is won in the game at the time of the start operation or before is executed. In this case, when the start operation is performed, the display content is switched from the background during AT (FIG. 51 (A)) to the chance button operation display (FIG. 51 (C)) in the effect image display device 157. Further, the lamp inside the chance button 190 is switched from the off state to the on state. With these effects, the player can be prompted to operate the chance button 190.

Subsequently, it is assumed that the third stop operation is operated without the chance button 190 being operated (timing T4). At this time, the chance button operation display continues on the effect image display device 157, and the lighting state of the lamp inside the chance button 190 is maintained. Further, the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 are turned on.

Further, it is assumed that the bet operation is performed without operating the chance button 190 (timing T5). At this time, in the effect image display device 157, the display is switched to the background during AT (FIG. 51 (A)) without executing the additional G number display, and the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 are turned off from the lit state. Switch to. As for the number of remaining AT games after switching to the background during AT, the value after being added is displayed.

After that, when the chance button 190 is operated before the start operation (timing TC), the background display during AT is maintained in the effect image display device 157, and the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the lit state to the extinguished state. .. If the chance button 190 is not operated until the next start operation (timing T6), the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the lit state to the extinguished state when the start operation is performed. Further, in this example, it is shown that the push order bell (conditional device numbers 8 to 10) is internally elected at the time of the next start operation (timing T6), and the operation navigation (FIG. 51 (B)) is executed. There is.

[[Operation example (4)]]
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the second stop operation and the third stop operation (between timings T3 and T4) when the number of remaining AT games is added. be. In this example, it is assumed that the player has been internally elected to the re-game combination by the first start operation (timing T1).

In the operation example of FIG. 55, it is assumed that the effect of notifying in this game (game starting from timing T1) that the lottery for adding the number of remaining AT games is won in the game at the time of the start operation or before is executed. In this case, when the start operation is performed, the display content is switched from the background during AT (FIG. 51 (A)) to the chance button operation display (FIG. 51 (C)) in the effect image display device 157. Further, the lamp inside the chance button 190 is switched from the off state to the on state. With these effects, the player can be prompted to operate the chance button 190.

Subsequently, it is assumed that the chance button 190 is operated between the second stop operation and the third stop operation (between timings T3 and T4) (timing TC). At this time, in the effect image display device 157, the display content is switched from the chance button operation display to the additional G number display (FIG. 51 (D)), and the lamp inside the chance button 190 is switched from the lit state to the extinguished state. In this example, the case where the chance button 190 is operated between the second stop operation and the third stop operation (between timings T3 and T4) is shown, but between the start operation and the third stop operation. By operating the chance button 190 of, the same operation is executed.

After that, when the third stop operation (timing T4) is performed, unlike the examples of FIGS. 52 to 54, the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 are not turned on. This is because the player has been internally elected as a re-gaming player and no betting operation is required. At this time, the effect image display device 157 continues to display the additional G number. Therefore, with respect to the bet operation (timing T5) after the third stop operation, the display contents of the effect image display device 157 and the lamp states of various buttons are maintained as they are (they do not change) regardless of the presence or absence of the operation. ). Then, when the next start operation is performed (timing T6), the display of the effect image display device 157 is added and the display is switched from the G number display to the background during AT (FIG. 51 (A)). As for the number of remaining AT games after switching to the background during AT, the value after being added is displayed. In this example, it is shown that the push order bell (condition device numbers 8 to 10) is internally elected at the time of the next start operation (timing T6), and the operation navigation (FIG. 51 (B)) is executed. There is.

[[Operation example (5)]]
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the third stop operation and the bet operation (between timings T4 and T5) when the number of remaining AT games is added. In this example, it is assumed that the player has been internally elected to the re-game combination by the first start operation (timing T1).

In the operation example of FIG. 56, it is assumed that the effect of notifying in this game (game starting from timing T1) that the additional lottery for the number of remaining AT games is won in the game at the time of the start operation or before is executed. In this case, when the start operation is performed, the display content is switched from the background during AT (FIG. 51 (A)) to the chance button operation display (FIG. 51 (C)) in the effect image display device 157. Further, the lamp inside the chance button 190 is switched from the off state to the on state. With these effects, the player can be prompted to operate the chance button 190.

Subsequently, it is assumed that the third stop operation is operated without the chance button 190 being operated (timing T4). At this time, the chance button operation display continues on the effect image display device 157, and the lighting state of the lamp inside the chance button 190 is maintained. Further, the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 are turned on. Here, the bet operation is not necessary because the player has been internally elected as a re-player, but the structure is such that the player is urged to perform the bet operation so as to secure an opportunity to switch the display contents by the bet operation.

Then, it is assumed that the chance button 190 is operated between the third stop operation and the bet operation (between timings T4 and T5) (timing TC). At this time, in the effect image display device 157, the display content is switched from the chance button operation display to the additional G number display (FIG. 51 (D)), and the lamp inside the chance button 190 is switched from the lit state to the extinguished state. The lighting state of the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 is maintained.

After that, when the bet operation is performed (timing T5), the display of the effect image display device 157 is added and the display is switched from the G number display to the background during AT (FIG. 51 (A)), and the inside of the bet buttons 130 and 132 is changed. The lamp switches from the lit state to the off state. As for the number of remaining AT games after switching to the background during AT, the value after being added is displayed. Here, if the bet operation is not performed after the operation of the chance button 190, the same operation (switching of display and switching of lighting mode of the lamp) is executed by the subsequent start operation. In this example, it is shown that the push order bell (condition device numbers 8 to 10) is internally elected at the time of the next start operation (timing T6), and the operation navigation (FIG. 51 (B)) is executed. There is.

[[Operation example (6)]]
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the third stop operation and the bet operation (between timings T4 and T5) when the number of remaining AT games is added. In this example, it is assumed that the player has been internally elected to the re-game combination by the first start operation (timing T1).

In the operation example of FIG. 57, it is assumed that the effect of notifying in this game (game starting from timing T1) that the lottery for adding the number of remaining AT games is won in the game at the time of the start operation or before is executed. In this case, when the start operation is performed, the display content is switched from the background during AT (FIG. 51 (A)) to the chance button operation display (FIG. 51 (C)) in the effect image display device 157. Further, the lamp inside the chance button 190 is switched from the off state to the on state. With these effects, the player can be prompted to operate the chance button 190.

Subsequently, it is assumed that the third stop operation is operated without the chance button 190 being operated (timing T4). At this time, the chance button operation display continues on the effect image display device 157, and the lighting state of the lamp inside the chance button 190 is maintained. Further, the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 are turned on. Here, the bet operation is not necessary because the player has been internally elected as a re-player, but the structure is such that the player is urged to perform the bet operation so as to secure an opportunity to switch the display contents by the bet operation.

Further, it is assumed that the bet operation is performed without operating the chance button 190 (timing T5). At this time, in the effect image display device 157, the display content is switched from the chance button operation display to the additional G number display (FIG. 51 (D)), and the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 are switched from the lit state to the extinguished state. Further, at this time, since the operation of the chance button 190 is no longer necessary due to the execution of the additional G number display, the lamp inside the chance button 190 is switched from the lit state to the extinguished state. Regarding the operation of the chance button 190 (timing TC) after the bet operation, the display contents of the effect image display device 157 and the lamp states of the various buttons are maintained as they are (they do not change) regardless of the presence or absence of the operation. ).

After that, when the next start operation is performed (timing T6), the display of the effect image display device 157 is added and the display is switched from the G number display to the background during AT (FIG. 51 (A)). As for the number of remaining AT games after switching to the background during AT, the value after being added is displayed. In this example, it is shown that the push order bell (condition device numbers 8 to 10) is internally elected at the time of the next start operation (timing T6), and the operation navigation (FIG. 51 (B)) is executed. There is.

If the next start operation is performed without performing either the bet operation or the chance button 190 after the third stop operation, the display of the effect image display device 157 is displayed from the chance button operation display to the background during AT. The display is switched to (FIG. 51 (A)), the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 are switched from the lit state to the extinguished state, and the lamps inside the chance button 190 are switched from the lit state to the extinguished state.

[Regarding the configuration of the additional notification effect (1)]
The configuration of the additional notification effect described above makes it possible to execute the additional G number display by using the chance button 190 (for example, FIG. 55), and for a certain period (in the above example, from the start operation to the third stop operation). ), When the chance button 190 is not operated, there is an opportunity to execute the additional G number display by operating the chance button 190 or betting operation (for example, FIGS. 56 and 57). In this configuration, even if the player does not notice that the additional G number display is executed by the operation of the chance button 190, the additional G number display can be executed by another operation means. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to execute the additional G number display. It should be noted that the above configuration may be applied not only to the additional G number display but also to perform some kind of notification. Further, the operation means in the above operation example is an example, and may be related to the progress of the game or may be dedicated to the production.

Regarding the above configuration, a display prompting the operation of the operating means may be executed, such as a chance button operation display. In this case, it may be possible to more reliably execute the notification by the operation of the operating means. In addition, the player can be surprised when the notification is executed by an operation means different from the prompted operation means.

Further, with respect to the above configuration, a light emitting means may be provided in each operating means, and the light emitting state may be switched in order to encourage these operations.

[Regarding the configuration of the additional notification effect (2)]
In the configuration of the additional notification effect described above, when the chance button 190 is operated before the bet operation in a certain period (after the third stop operation in the above example), the chance button 190 is operated and the bet operation thereafter is performed. While the display content is switched by any of the above (for example, FIGS. 53 and 56), if the bet operation is performed first, the display content is switched by the bet operation, but the subsequent chance button 190 The display content is configured so as not to be switched in the operation of (for example, FIGS. 54 and 57). In this configuration, the display contents can be changed by the operation of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. The display contents that can be switched are not limited to various notifications and background displays, and various displays can be used. Further, the operation means in the above operation example is an example, and may be related to the progress of the game or may be dedicated to the production.

Regarding the above configuration, a display prompting the operation of the operating means may be executed, such as a chance button operation display. In this case, it may be possible to more reliably switch the display contents by operating the operating means. Further, when the display content is switched by an operation means different from the prompted operation means, the player can be surprised.

Further, with respect to the above configuration, a light emitting means may be provided in each operating means, and the light emitting state may be switched in order to encourage these operations.

[Regarding the configuration of the additional notification effect (3)]
In the configuration of the additional notification effect described above, when the additional G number is displayed (for example, FIG. 57) for the bet operation in a certain period (after the third stop operation in the above example), the background during AT is displayed. There is a case (for example, FIG. 56), and in the former case, there is a case where the background during AT is displayed by the subsequent start operation (for example, FIG. 57).

In this configuration, the background during AT can be easily displayed, and the interest of the game can be improved. It should be noted that these display contents are examples, and various notifications and background displays may be used, and various displays can be used. Further, the operation means in the above operation example is an example, and may be related to the progress of the game or may be dedicated to the production. With respect to these operating means, a light emitting means may be provided in each operating means, and the light emitting state may be switched in order to encourage these operations.

≪Others≫
In the present embodiment, as an example of the game table, the slot machine 100 using a medal (coin) as a game medium is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball (for example, a pachinko ball) is used for playing a game. It can be applied to slot machines, pachinko machines, arrange ball game machines, rock game machines, smart balls, etc. as media.

The slot machine is a slot machine that operates on mobile terminals (smartphones, game machines) and personal computers by a program that simulates the operation based on the above configuration, and only exchanges electronic data without using medals. In this case, the game medium includes electronic data corresponding to a medal, and the game medium is input from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device). The payout of the game medium includes outputting the digitized data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Although the present embodiment has been described above, the present embodiment is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiment of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. , Such modifications and alterations are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done.

Hereinafter, a game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a spinning machine such as a slot machine 100 and a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 58 to 87. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 58 to 87 are used only for the explanations using FIGS. 58 to 87, and even when the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. 58 to 58 to 87 are used. In the description using FIG. 87, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 58 to 87 are given priority.

FIG. 58 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 58 starts rotating when a predetermined number of game media are loaded and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the acceptance of the rotation start instruction operation, the winning or not of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops the rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. , If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped match the predetermined payout conditions, the game medium is paid out and the game ends. It is a game table that advances a series of games that end without paying out. The payout of this game medium may be referred to as profit. In addition, what facilitates the acquisition of this profit may be referred to as a privilege.

The slot machine 100 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. The front door 102 is a door member rotatably mounted on the main body 101. The front door 102 is provided with a locking function so that only a clerk at a game store can open the front door 102.

Inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) with multiple types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a drive device such as a stepping motor.

An appropriate number of each symbol is printed on the strip-shaped member at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of a line.

More specifically with reference to FIG. 59, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure) is placed on the upper design of the left reel and the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 4 shown in the figure). The displayed symbol is displayed on the left reel middle stage symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 7 shown in the figure) is displayed on the left reel lower stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (position 2 shown in the figure). The symbol is displayed on the upper part of the middle reel, the symbol displayed on the middle part of the left reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure) is the symbol displayed on the middle part of the middle reel, and the symbol displayed on the lower part of the middle reel 111 (position 8 shown in the figure). The symbol displayed on the lower part of the middle reel, the symbol displayed on the upper part of the right reel 112 (position 3 shown in the figure) is the symbol on the upper part of the right reel, and the symbol displayed on the middle part of the right reel 112 (position 6 shown in the figure) is on the right. The symbols displayed in the middle reel symbol and the lower part of the right reel 112 (position 9 shown in the figure) are called the lower right reel symbols, respectively, and each symbol of each reel 110 to 112 is passed through the symbol display window 113 to each reel 110 to. A total of nine are displayed on the 112, three in the vertical direction. Then, by rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 58, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 113 is arranged. The backlight is configured so that each symbol can be shielded and the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 110 to 112, and this optical sensor (index sensor shown in FIG. 61) is provided. A light-shielding piece (not shown) having a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion of 730). The symbol position of the reel is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the effective line.

The effective line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp indicating an effective line 114. The valid line is a line for determining whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination described in FIG. 70, which will be described later, is displayed (a line for which the winning determination is performed), and the internal winning combination is included in this effective line. When the symbol corresponding to is stopped, it is judged as a prize. Here, the line defines an area for one symbol for each of the reels 110 to 112 in the area in the display window 113. A line other than the valid line for which the winning judgment is not performed is referred to as an invalid line.

In FIG. 59, a middle line L1 composed of a left reel middle symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel middle symbol, a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right lower reel lower line L2. Left reel lower symbol, middle reel middle symbol and right reel upper symbol, right-up line L3, left reel upper symbol, middle reel upper symbol, right reel upper symbol, upper line L4, left reel lower symbol, Five lines of the lower line L5 composed of the middle reel lower symbol and the right reel lower symbol are shown. These lines are an example, and an area for one symbol is defined for each of the reels 110 to 112, for example, a line composed of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel lower symbol, and a right reel upper symbol. Anything is fine. Of the lines shown in FIG. 59, the upper line L4 is used as an effective line in this embodiment. The effective line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment is a dedicated machine for betting three medals, and no line is valid when the number of inserted medals is less than three, and line L4 is valid when three medals are bet. (Becomes used as a valid line). When the line is activated, the start lever 135 can be operated to start the game. The number of effective lines is not limited to one line. For example, the three lines of the middle line L1, the downward-sloping line L2, and the upward-sloping line L3 may be used as effective lines, or the number of effective lines corresponding to the number of bets may be used.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination) has been internally won in the internal lottery described later, or that the player is in a special gaming state described later. be. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. When the re-game lamp 122 wins a re-game combination (details will be described later), which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, the re-game is replayable (no medal is required). It is a lamp that informs the player. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, one sheet is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two sheets are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three sheets are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. ing. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 130 to 132, or the actual medals can be inserted (inserted operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the insertion means that both are included. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 composed of a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138 and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be pressed. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel in this order. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. Further, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is "forward push operation order". It is called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 134 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 155.

The front door 102 is also provided with a key hole 140, and a key is inserted into the key hole 140, and the inserted key is unlocked by turning it to the right and locked by turning it to the left. The slot machine 100 is provided with an open sensor (not shown) for detecting that the front door 102 has been opened. This open sensor detects that the front door 102 has opened by detecting an opening / closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 opens.

Further, a first chance button 165 and a second chance button 166 are provided between the bet button 132 and the medal slot 141. The first chance button 165 has a built-in first effect lamp, and the second chance button 166 has a built-in second effect lamp. Both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operation means operated by the player in the production. Further, a left button 167 is provided on the left side of the second chance button 166, and a right button 168 is provided on the right side. By operating the left button 167 and the right button 168, it may be possible to move the cursor displayed on the effect image display device 157. In this case, the second chance button 166 functions as a confirmation button. Sometimes.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 145 provided at the bottom is a hole for outputting the sound of the bass speaker 277 (see FIG. 60) to the outside. The left side lamp 144L provided on the left side of the front door 102 and the right side lamp 144R provided on the right side are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is also provided on the upper part of the effect device 160. The sound hole 143 is a hole for outputting the sound of the upper speaker 272 (see FIG. 60) to the outside. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and an effect image display device 157 arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (player side). .. Although the effect image display device 157 is a liquid crystal display device, it does not have to be a liquid crystal display device, but may be any display device capable of displaying various effect images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7 segments) may be used. A display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen may be used. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 58, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. Further, although the display screen is a flat surface, it may have a curved surface.

It should be noted that what has been referred to as a lamp so far is an example of a light emitting means, and in the present specification, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp, as long as it emits light such as a fluorescent lamp or a cold cathode fluorescent lamp. Sometimes referred to as a lamp, a lamp that emits light corresponds to an example of a light emitting means.

FIG. 60 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door open. The main body 101 is a box body that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and opens to the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that houses the main control board 300B (see FIG. 66) is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided at the upper part of the back plate 242, and the main control board storage case 210 is arranged. A reel unit 700 having three reels 110 to 112 is arranged below the control board storage case 210. A sub-control board storage case 220 containing a sub-control board 400B (see FIG. 66) is arranged inside the main control board storage case 210 and the side plate 260 on the left side of the reel unit 700. be. The sub-control board storage case 220 is provided with a first selection switch 190. Since the first selection switch 190 is provided inside the main body 101, a person who can unlock the front door 102 (for example, a clerk at a game store) should open the front door 102. However, a person (for example, a player) who cannot unlock the front door 102 cannot perform the operation. That is, the first selection switch 190 is provided at a position where the player cannot operate the first selection switch 190. The details of the first selection switch 190 will be described later. Further, an external centralized terminal plate 248 connected to the main control board 300B (see FIG. 66) and outputting information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

A hopper unit 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in the bucket) is arranged on the lower surface plate 264, and a power supply control board 252B (FIG. 66) is provided above the hopper unit 180, that is, below the reel unit 700. A power supply device 252 having (see) is arranged, and a power supply switch 244 is arranged on the front surface of the power supply device 252. The power supply device 252 converts an AC power supply supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, and each device. Further, a storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off is provided. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is arranged on the right side of the hopper unit 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind the medal auxiliary storage 240 (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting the power cord 265, and the power cord 265 connected to the power cord 265 extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 provided in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and the effect device 160 and the effect control board (which controls the effect device 160) are placed on the upper part of the design display window 113. (Not shown), an upper speaker 272 is provided. At the lower part of the symbol display window 113, a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, a passage 266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops an illegal medal or the like onto the medal tray 161 are provided. There is. Further, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145.

Next, the structure of the reel unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a perspective view showing the configuration of the reel unit 700.

As shown in FIG. 61, the reel unit 700 includes a reel case 702 made of a box-shaped metal plate. Connectors 7030, 7031, and 7032 for connecting the main control board 300B (see FIG. 66) and harnesses MR1 to MR3 (see FIG. 66) are provided on the upper portion of the reel case 702. Further, the reel case 702 contains three reels 110 to 112. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by motors 110m, 111m, 112m (see FIG. 66) provided for each reel. Each motor 110m to 112m is a stepping motor. Hereinafter, the left reel 110 will be described as an example, but the same applies to the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112. The motor 110m, the index sensor 730 for detecting the rotational position of the reel 110, and the backlight module 740 for irradiating light from the back surface to the front surface of the strip-shaped member 710 of the reel 110 are mounted on the mounting base 732. ing.

62 (a) is a perspective view showing the structure of the backlight module 740, and FIG. 62 (b) is a front view of the backlight module 740.

The backlight module 740 is composed of a reflector 742 and a lighting board 744 that is detachably attached to the back surface of the reflector 742. The reflector 742 is formed with three openings BK1 to BK3 extending from the front surface side to the back surface side side by side in the vertical direction. Further, on the lighting board 744, two LEDs 745 are arranged at positions corresponding to the openings BK1 to BK3.

The openings BK1 to BK3 and the LED 745 are provided at positions corresponding to the symbol positions (positions of Nos. 1 to 9 shown in FIG. 59) for stop display on the display window 113 in the attached state. As described above, by providing the LED 745 in each of the openings BK1 to BK3, it is configured so as not to interfere with the light emitted to other positions when irradiating the light. As a result, it is possible to irradiate each of the positions Nos. 1 to 9 shown in FIG. 59 with light. For example, by turning on all the LEDs 745, it is possible to illuminate all the symbols visible to the player from behind. Further, by turning on a part of the symbols, some of the symbols visible to the player can be illuminated from behind. The number and positions of openings and LEDs are not limited to this configuration.

Subsequently, the first selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG. 60 will be described in detail. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the first selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG. 60.

FIG. 63A is an enlarged view of the first selection switch 190. The first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 63 (a) has a circular rotating portion 190a having 16 contacts and is rotatably configured, and is formed so as to project outward with the rotating portion 190a as a base end. It has an indicator unit 190b. Further, around the first selection switch 190, 16 numbers (hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are applied corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the rotating portion 190a. The first selection switch 190 is an operating means for selecting one number from the 16 numbers.

These 16 numbers are treated as numerical values (setting values) representing the settings. That is, the first selection switch 190 is configured to be able to output the numerical information pointed to by the indicator unit 190b to the outside as a detection signal. For example, as shown in FIG. When "B" is pointed out, it means that the numerical value of "B" in hexadecimal is selected, and the information of the numerical value can be output as a detection signal (0b1011) of 4 bits in binary. Therefore, the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 65), which will be described later, inputs the detection signal to input the numerical value selected by the first selection switch 190 (any of the hexadecimal numbers 0 to F). The configuration is such that it can be detected, and the first sub-control unit 400 handles the numerical value pointed to by the instruction unit 190b as the selected set value.

In addition, instead of the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 63 (a), for example, the rotary switch 191 as shown in FIG. 63 (b) may be applied, or the slide as shown in FIG. 6 (c). Switch 192 may be applied.

The rotary switch 191 shown in FIG. 63B has 16 contacts, a ring-shaped rotating portion 191a configured to be rotatable, and a notched window 191b formed in the rotating portion 191a. .. Further, 16 numbers (hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are applied to the bottom of the rotating portion 191a of the rotary switch 191 corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the rotating portion 191a.

In this rotary switch 191, a numerical value that can be seen from the notch window 191b is selected, and the information of the numerical value can be output to the outside as a detection signal. As shown in FIG. 63 (b), when the numerical value visible from the notch portion 191b is "F", it means that the hexadecimal F numerical value is selected, and the information of the numerical value is binary 4 bits. It can be output as a detection signal (0b1111) of. Therefore, by inputting this detection signal, the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 65), which will be described later, can see the selected numerical value (in this example, hexadecimal number 0 to 0 to 16) visible from the notch portion 191b of the rotary switch 191. It is configured to be able to detect any of the numerical values of F).

The slide switch 192 shown in FIG. 63 (c) has a rectangular guide groove 192a and a slide portion 192b having 16 contacts and slidable along the guide groove 192a. Further, above the slide switch 192, 16 numbers (in this example, hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are applied corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the slide portion 192b.

In this slide switch 192, a numerical value at which the slide portion 192b is located is selected, and the information of the numerical value can be output to the outside as a detection signal. As shown in FIG. 63 (c), when the slide portion 192b is located at the position of the numerical value "0", it means that the numerical value of 0 in hexadecimal is selected, and the information of the numerical value is the binary number. It can be output as a 4-bit detection signal (0b0000). Therefore, by inputting this detection signal, the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 65), which will be described later, receives the selected numerical value (hexadecimal numerical value from 0 to F) in which the slide unit 192b of the slide switch 192 is located. It is configured to be able to detect any).

Since the first selection switch 190 described above with reference to FIGS. 63 (a) to 63 (c) is a mechanical (mechanical) switch, it can be operated even when it is not energized. Even when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the selected numerical value (set value) can be retained. Therefore, once the selection is made, the selected numerical value can be retained even when the power is turned off, and it is easy to set the set value intended by the game store, for example. In addition, since it is equipped with a number (display means) that allows the selected numerical value to be confirmed, it is easy to confirm the set value, which is highly convenient.

FIG. 63 (d) is an enlarged view of the second selection switch 194. The second selection switch 194 shown in FIG. 63 (d) includes a left button 167, a right button 168, and a second chance button 166 that functions as a confirmation button, as shown in FIG. 58. While the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 63 (a) is an operating means provided at a position that cannot be operated by the player, the second selection switch 194 can be operated by the player. It is an operating means provided at a position where it can be. That is, the second selection switch 194 is a switch that can be operated by the player, and for example, by pressing the left button 167 and the right button 168, a numerical value (setting value) representing the setting can be selected, and the second selection switch 194 can be selected. By pressing the chance button 166, the selected set value is confirmed. Alternatively, the set value can be selected by pressing the left button 167 and the right button 168, and the selected set value is confirmed after a predetermined time has elapsed without pressing the second chance button 166. May be good.

The second selection switch 194 can output a detection signal corresponding to each button when any of the second chance button 166, the left button 167, or the right button 168 is operated. Therefore, the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 65), which will be described later, detects whether the second chance button 166, the left button 167, or the right button 168 is operated by inputting this detection signal. It is a configuration that can be done.

Instead of the second selection switch 194 shown in FIG. 63 (d), for example, as shown in FIG. 63 (e), a cross key having an up / down / left / right button and a confirmation button in addition to the second chance button 166. A 195 may be provided, and the cross key 195 may be applied as the second selection switch 194. Further, two types of operating means may be provided, and one of the operating means may also serve as a chance button, or only one of the operating means may be the second selection switch 194.

Since the second selection switch 194 is not a mechanical (mechanical) switch, it cannot operate in a state where it is not energized, and cannot hold the selected numerical value (set value) by itself. Therefore, it is necessary to separately provide a storage means for storing the set value. Although the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 58 is configured not to back up the numerical value selected by the second selection switch 194, it may be configured to back up.

FIG. 63 (f) is a diagram comparing the sizes of the second chance button 166 and the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. 58. FIG. 63 (f) also shows the left button 167 and the right button 168. The first chance button 165 is about three times as large as the second chance button 166.

In addition, on condition that the second chance button 166 or the first chance button 165 is operated, a cut-in display is performed, one of the chance buttons is used for a continuous hitting effect, and the other chance button is used as a hidden button. You may. Here, the hidden button does not suggest or promote the operation of the operation means (for example, the operation suggestion display or the operation promotion display is not displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the built-in effect lamp does not illuminate. At least one or both), but when the operating means is operated, some kind of effect is performed.

FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of selection of set values using the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 58, the setting values that can be selected by the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194 are the sounds output from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 (for example, BGM, sound effect, error). It is the value of the volume (volume) of (sound, etc.). As described above, the first selection switch 190 is an operation means provided at a position that cannot be operated by the player, and is a switch used by the clerk of the game store to select a set value. Further, only the first selection switch 190 of the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194 can be selected to set the slot machine 100 to the power saving mode or the non-power saving mode (normal mode). Can also be done. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 58, the power saving mode is set only when the demonstration effect is being executed. Hereinafter, the demonstration will be abbreviated as a demo. The demo effect is an effect that is started when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in a state where the game is not restarted after the end of one game. The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 58 is set to the power saving mode when the demonstration effect is started in a state where the setting to the power saving mode is selected.

When the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode, the animation (demo animation) displayed on the effect image display device 157 is played in a dark state, so that the power consumption of the effect image display device 157 is suppressed and power is saved. .. Further, the power consumption of these light emitting means can be suppressed by turning off the first effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 shown in FIG. 63 built in the first chance button 165. Power is saved. When these light emitting means are turned off, the power consumption becomes 0, and the power saving effect of these light emitting means is higher than the power saving effect of the effect image display device 157.

Further, when the first selection switch 190 is operated, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 is displayed on the effect image display device 157. In the volume selection using the first selection switch 190, one volume level is selected from the seven volume levels. In the non-power saving mode, mute can also be selected.

FIG. 64 (A) is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the indicator unit 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to “0” shown in FIG. 63 (a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 is displayed on the effect image display device 157. The first volume selection icon SI1 displays seven levels of volume level selection values and seven levels of horizontal level display (indicator display). The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 64 (A) displays that the selection value of the seven-level volume level is 0 (0/7) and the characters “silence”. In addition, none of them are lit in the 7-step horizontal level display. When the mute is selected by the first selection switch 190, the output sound from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 becomes completely inaudible.

FIG. 64 (B) is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the indicator unit 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to “1” shown in FIG. 63 (a).

On the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 64 (B), the characters "volume 1/7" indicating that the selection value of the seven-step volume level is 1 are displayed. Further, in the 7-step horizontal level display, only the leftmost 1st step level is lit in the first color (for example, yellow).

FIG. 64 (C) is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the indicator unit 190b of the first selection switch 190 is aligned with “7” shown in FIG. 63 (a).

On the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 64 (C), the characters "volume 7/7" indicating that the selection value of the seven-step volume level is 7 are displayed. Further, in the 7-step horizontal level display, all the levels from the 1st step to the 7th step are lit in the first color (for example, yellow). When the volume level of the seventh stage is selected by the first selection switch 190, the output sound from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 becomes the maximum volume.

FIG. 64 (D) is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the indicator unit 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to “8” shown in FIG. 63 (a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 64 (D) displays characters indicating that the volume selection value is the exhibition volume. This exhibition volume is a volume suitable for giving a presentation of the slot machine 100 at an exhibition or the like, and is, for example, a volume between the volume level of the fourth stage and the volume level of the fifth stage. Further, in the 7-step horizontal level display, all the levels from the 1st step to the 7th step are lit in the second color (for example, red). In addition, instead of the exhibition volume, it may be possible to select a special volume that cannot be selected by the second selection switch 194 and can be selected only by the first selection switch 190. For example, it may be possible to select a step tone in which the volume is increased by one step every time a predetermined time elapses.

The first volume selection icon SI1 displayed on the effect image display device 157 disappears if the first selection switch 190 is not operated for a predetermined time.

FIG. 64 (a) is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the indicator unit 190 b of the first selection switch 190 is aligned with “9” shown in FIG. 63 (a).

The second volume selection icon SI2 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 64 (a). The background color of the second volume selection icon SI2 is different from the background color of the first volume selection icon SI1. In addition, the second volume selection icon SI2 displays the characters "power saving mode", seven levels of volume level selection values, and seven levels of horizontal level display (indicator display). On the second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 64 (a), the characters "power saving mode" and the characters "volume 7/7" indicating that the selection value of the 7-step volume level is 7 are displayed. There is. Further, in the 7-step horizontal level display, all the levels from the 1st step to the 7th step are lit in the third color (for example, blue).

FIG. 64 (b) is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the indicator unit 190 b of the first selection switch 190 is aligned with the “F” shown in FIG. 63 (a).

On the second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 64 (b), the characters "power saving mode" and the characters "volume 1/7" indicating that the selection value of the 7-step volume level is 1 are displayed. There is. Further, in the 7-step horizontal level display, only the leftmost first-step level is lit in the third color (for example, blue).

The second volume selection icon SI2 displayed on the effect image display device 157 also disappears if the first selection switch 190 is not operated for a predetermined time.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 58, when the indicator unit 190b of the first selection switch 190 is aligned with any of "9" or "A" to "F" shown in FIG. 63 (a), the slot machine 100 is set. It is selected to set to power saving mode. Even if the power saving mode is selected, the slot machine 100 is not set to the power saving mode, and as described above, the slot machine 100 must be in the demo state to be set to the power saving mode. It becomes a condition. On the other hand, when the indicator unit 190b is aligned with any of "0" to "8" shown in FIG. 63 (a), it is selected to set the slot machine 100 to the non-power saving mode. If it is selected to set to non-power saving mode, it will not be set to power saving mode even in the demo state. Further, in the state where the game is being performed, the slot machine 100 is set to the non-power saving mode (normal mode).

The volume output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 is the same regardless of whether the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode or the non-power saving mode. Therefore, the volume output by the selection value selected in FIG. 64 (B) and the volume output by the selection value selected in FIG. 64 (b) are the same, and are selected in FIG. 64 (C). The volume output by the selected value and the volume output by the selected value selected in FIG. 64A are also the same.

FIG. 64A is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the second selection switch 194 is operated.

When the second selection switch 194 that can be operated by the player is operated while the first guidance display icon GI1 described later is displayed on the effect image display device 157, the effect image display device 157 has a third volume. The selection icon SI3 is displayed. The third volume selection icon SI3 displays five levels of volume level selection values and five levels of vertical level display (indicator display). On the third volume selection icon SI3 shown in FIG. 64 (a), the characters "volume 1/5" indicating that the selection value of the five-step volume level is 1 are displayed. Further, in the five-level display, only the lowest first level is lit in the fourth color (for example, green). Pressing the right button 168 of the second selection switch 194 once raises the level by one step, and pressing the left button 167 once lowers the level by one step. However, even if the left button 167 is pressed once in the state shown in FIG. 64 (a), the level does not drop any more. That is, mute cannot be selected by operating the second selection switch 194. It should be noted that the mute may be selected by operating the second selection switch 194.

FIG. 64 (a) is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the right button 168 is pressed four times from the state shown in the figure (a).

On the third volume selection icon SI3 shown in FIG. 64 (a), the characters "volume 5/5" indicating that the selection value of the five-step volume level is 5 are displayed. Further, in the five-step vertical level display, all the levels of the first to fifth steps are lit in the fourth color (for example, green).

The third volume selection icon SI3 displayed on the effect image display device 157 disappears if the left button 167 and the right button 168 are not operated for a predetermined time.

The volume selected by operating the first selection switch 190 has seven levels, whereas the volume selected by operating the second selection switch 194 has five levels. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 58, the volume setting range is in the range of 0 to 127, and each setting value in the 7 steps is 18 for the first step, 36 for the second step, 54 for the third step, and 4 steps. The eyes are 73, the 5th stage is 91, the 6th stage is 109, and the 7th stage is 127. On the other hand, in the 5th stage, the remaining 2nd to 6th stages are obtained except for the 1st stage and the 7th stage of the 7th stage. That is, the second stage (36) of the seven stages is the first stage of the five stages, and the sixth stage (109) of the seven stages is the fifth stage of the five stages. Therefore, only the clerk of the amusement store can select the setting value (18) of the first stage of the seven stages and the setting value (127) of the seventh stage. The 1st stage (18) of the 7th stage may be the 1st stage of the 5th stage, the 5th stage (91) of the 7th stage may be the 5th stage of the 5th stage, or the 3rd stage (54) of the 7th stage. ) May be the first stage of the five stages, and the seventh stage (127) of the seven stages may be the fifth stage of the five stages. Alternatively, each set value in the five stages may be 26 for the first stage, 51 for the second stage, 76 for the third stage, 102 for the fourth stage, and 127 for the fifth stage.

With the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 and the first guidance display icon GI1 described later displayed on the effect image display device 157, the left button 167 of the second selection switch 194 is pressed once. When pressed, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 that has been displayed up to that point is replaced with the third volume selection icon SI3, and the display indicates that the volume level selection value is the second stage. .. On the other hand, if the right button 167 is pressed once instead of the left button 167 in the same state, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 that has been displayed up to that point is replaced with the third volume selection icon SI3. A display indicating that the selected value of the volume is the fourth stage is displayed. These displays are displayed regardless of the selection value displayed by the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2. That is, regardless of whether the selection value is 1/7 or 7/7, pressing the left button 167 once displays the selection value of 2/5. Further, regardless of whether the selection value is 1/7 or 7/7, pressing the right button 168 once displays the selection value of 4/5. This is because when switching to the third volume selection icon SI3, the selection values up to that point are discarded, the value of the volume level of 3/5, which is the initial value of the third volume selection icon SI3, is reselected, and the left button is displayed. By operating 167 or the right button 168, a change is added to the initial value (3/5). That is, when the operation of the second selection switch 194 is accepted, the initial value of the third volume selection icon SI3 is set, and the value obtained by operating the second selection switch 194 to change the initial value is the first value. 3 Volume selection icon Displayed with SI3. The first selection switch 190 is designed to be operated by a clerk, and the second selection switch 194 is designed to be operated by a player, and the intention of the player can be prioritized. On the contrary, when the first selection switch 190 is operated while the third volume selection icon SI3 is displayed, the selection value displayed by the third volume selection icon SI3 is inherited and the first selection is made. When the switch 190 is operated, the value obtained by changing the selected value so far is displayed by the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2. However, even here, the initial value (for example, 4/7) of the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 may be set without inheriting the selection value.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 65. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game and a main effect according to a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is composed of a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used at the time of internal lottery of a winning combination, and a reel design. ROM 306 for storing sequences, RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and WDT. (Watchdog timer) 314 is installed. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data. It is determined and an interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 every interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor or the like and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request.

The main control unit 300 has a random number generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start signal when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when a start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main processing of the main control unit described later). Start).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 is inserted from various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) for each interruption time. Medal medal reception sensor, start lever 135 sensor, left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 138 sensor, right stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from hopper unit 180, left reel 110 The state of the index sensor, the index sensor of the middle reel 111, the index sensor of the right reel 112, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register storing the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect whether or not the medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135, and detect a start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, the middle stop button 138 sensor, and the right stop button 139 sensor are installed in the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the corresponding bet buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are used as medals to be inserted into the game. Detects the loading operation when loading. The checkout button 134 sensor is provided on the checkout button 134. When the checkout button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals to be paid out by the hopper unit 180. Each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the left reel 110, the index sensor of the middle reel 111, and the index sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and the light-shielding pieces provided on the reel frame pass through. Every time you do, it becomes L level. The rotation position information indicating how much the reel is rotated from the reference position from once reaching the L level to the next L level is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. Will be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero. This rotation position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving motors 110m to 112m (see FIG. 66) provided for each reel 110 to 112 of the reel unit 700, and a solenoid provided for a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals. Drive circuit 324 to drive, drive circuit 326 to drive motor 180m (see FIG. 66) provided in hopper unit 180, various lamps 339 (effective line indicator lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertable lamp 124, re-game lamp) 122, the game medal insertion lamp 129 includes a drive circuit 328 for driving a game start lamp 121, a stored number display 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127).

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is slotted in an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the game state) is output.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply device 252 (see FIG. 60) to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 is a power supply. When the voltage value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400, and enables communication with the first sub control unit 400. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured so that a signal such as a command cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

Each component of the main control unit 300 described above is mounted on the main control unit board 300B (see FIG. 66).

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 receives the control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via the input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on this control command, and the basic circuit 402 temporarily stores data with the CPU 404. The RAM 408, the I / O 410 for controlling the input / output of various devices, and the counter timer 412 for measuring the time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight module 740, data for controlling various indicators, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and sends an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and the sound source IC 418 is provided with an upper speaker 272 and a bass speaker 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the amplifier and the sound output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 in response to a command from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, title panel) are provided in the drive circuit 422 via an input / output interface. A 162 lamp, a bet button lamp 200, a backlight module 740, a first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, a second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166, etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor 163 m (see FIG. 66) of the shutter 163. The motor 163m of the shutter 163 is a stepping motor, and the drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to the motor 160m in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, a sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 for each interrupt time. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a switch sensor 427, and the switch sensor 427 detects the pressing of the first chance button 165. Further, pressing of each of the second selection switch 194 including the second chance button 166, the left button 167, and the right button 168 is also detected by the switch sensor 427. The detection signal from the shutter sensor 428 and the switch sensor 427 is output to the basic circuit 402 by the sensor circuit 426.

Further, although the first selection switch sensor 190 is directly connected to the basic circuit 402, the first selection switch sensor 190 may also be connected to the basic circuit 402 via the switch sensor 427 and the sensor circuit 426. ..

Further, the CPU 404 transmits / receives a signal to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface.

Each component of the first sub-control unit 400 described above is mounted on the first sub-control unit board 400B (see FIG. 66).

The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including the display control of the effect image display device 157. The second sub control unit 500 is, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157 and a control unit that controls various effect drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). ), Etc., and may be configured by a plurality of control units.

The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, and the like. 512 and are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and sends an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 534 (video display processor), and the ROM 506 and the VRAM 536 are connected to the VDP 534 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads the image data or the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

According to the circuit configuration described above, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the control signal instructing the setting of the power saving mode to the drive circuit 422 or the second sub-control unit 500. As a result, the effect image display device 157 receives the control signal via the second sub-control unit 500, and the first effect lamp, the side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight built in the first chance button 165. The module 740 receives the control signal without going through the second sub-control unit 500.

Subsequently, connection examples of each board such as the power supply control board, the main control unit board, and the first sub-control unit board, and each unit such as the reel unit, the hopper unit, and the effect movable body unit will be described.

FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a connection example between each board and each unit.

FIG. 66 shows a power supply control board 252B, a main control unit board 300B, a first sub-control unit board 400B, a reel unit 700, a hopper unit 180, and an effect movable body unit 160U. The effect movable body unit 160U is a unit for moving the shutter 163, which is incorporated in the effect device 160 shown in FIG. 59. The shutter 163 corresponds to an example of a movable body.

A plurality of connectors PC1 to PC4, MC1 to MC6, and SC1 to SC4 are shown on the power supply control board 252B, the main control unit board 300B, and the first sub-control unit board 400B, respectively. Further, one or a plurality of connectors HC1, RC1 to RC3, and DC1 are shown in the reel unit 700, the hopper unit 180, and the effect movable body unit 160U, respectively.

At the island facility installed in the game machine installation shop, the AC power supply of 100V is stepped down to a voltage of 24V, and the AC current of 24V is supplied to the pachinko machine 100 through the power cord 265 connected to the connector PC1. The 24V alternating current is converted into a 24V DC voltage, a 12V DC voltage, and a 5V DC voltage on the power supply control board 252B. Although it may be converted into other DC voltage, in the description here, a DC voltage of 24V and a DC voltage of 5V will be described.

A 24V power supply line and a 5V power supply line are shown on the power supply control board 252B shown in FIG. 66, and are connected to a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and a power supply control 24V capacitor 24PC and a 5V power supply line connected to the 24V power supply line. Also shown are a power control 5V monitor LED 5PL and a power control 5V capacitor 5PC. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL is an LED lamp for power supply monitoring that lights or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL is a lighting or blinking while a 5V DC current is flowing. It is an LED lamp for power supply monitoring. The power switch 244 also shown in FIG. 60 is also shown.

A 24V power supply line and a 5V power supply line are connected to the connector PC2 of the power supply control board 252B. The connector PC2 and the connector MC5 of the main control board 300B are connected by a harness PM, and a DC current of 24V and a DC current of 5V are supplied to the main control board 300B through the harness PM. ..

Further, a 24V power supply line is connected to the connector PC3 of the power supply control board 252B. The connector PC3 and the connector SC1 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS1, and a DC current of 24 V is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS1. Further, a 5V power supply line is connected to the connector PC4 of the power supply control board 252B. The connector PC4 and the connector SC2 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS2, and a DC current of 5 V is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS2.

As with the first sub-control board 400B, 24V and 5V may be supplied to the main control board 300B by separate harnesses. Further, 24V and 5V may be supplied to the first sub control board 400B with a common harness in the same manner as the main control board 300B.

The 24V power supply line and the 5V power supply line are also shown on the main control unit board 300B shown in FIG. 66. A 24V DC current supplied through the harness PM flows through the 24V power supply line of the main control unit board 300B, and a 5V DC current also supplied through the harness PM flows through the 5V power supply line of the main control unit board 300B. .. Further, the main control unit board 300B shown in FIG. 66 also shows a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and a main control 24V capacitor 24MC connected to the 24V power supply line, and a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML connected to the 5V power supply line. ing. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML is an LED lamp for power supply monitoring that lights up or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML lights or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. It is an LED lamp for power supply monitoring. No capacitor is provided in the 5V power supply line.

Further, a hopper motor drive IC 326i and a reel motor drive IC 322i are mounted on the main control board 300B. The hopper motor drive IC 326i is an integrated circuit constituting the drive circuit 326 shown in FIG. 65. The reel motor drive IC 322i is an integrated circuit constituting the drive circuit 322 shown in FIG. 65. A direct current of 24 V and a direct current of 5 V are supplied to both the hopper motor drive IC 326i and the reel motor drive IC 322i. Although not shown, the main control board 300B is configured with the basic circuit 302 shown in FIG. 65, and is also mounted with integrated circuits constituting other drive circuits 324, 328 and the like.

The connector MC1 to which the hopper motor drive IC 326i of the main control board 300B is connected and the connector HC1 of the hopper unit 180 are connected by a harness MH. The 24V DC current and the 5V DC current supplied to the hopper motor drive IC 326i are supplied to the hopper unit 180 through the harness MH, and the motor 180m provided in the hopper unit 180 can be driven. Further, a control signal (command) for controlling the motor 180 m is transmitted from the main control board 300B through this harness MH.

Further, the connector MC2 to which the reel motor drive IC322i is connected and the connector RC1 of the reel unit 700 of the main control board 300B are connected by the harness MR1, and the connector MC3 and the reel unit to which the reel motor drive IC322i is also connected are connected. The connector RC2 of the 700 is connected by the harness MR2, and the connector MC4 to which the reel motor drive IC322i is also connected and the connector RC3 of the reel unit 700 are connected by the harness MR3. The 24V DC current and the 5V DC current supplied to the reel motor drive IC322i are supplied to the reel unit 700 through each of these harnesses MR1 to 3, and the motors 110m to 112m provided for each reel are supplied to the reel unit 700. It becomes driveable. Further, from the main control board 300B, control signals (commands) for controlling each motor 110 m to 112 m are transmitted through each of these harnesses MR1 to 3. Although the harness is connected to each motor, the connectors RC1 to RC3 on the reel unit 700 side are made into one connector, and the connectors MC2 to MC4 on the main control board 300B side are also made into one connector, and one common harness is used. You may connect with. However, even if it is called one common harness, it is a collection of three harnesses MR1 to MR3.

Further, the connector MC6 of the main control board 300B and the connector SC4 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness MS. This harness MS is a harness for control signals (for command transmission) and is not used for current supply.

The 24V power supply line and the 5V power supply line are also shown on the first sub-control unit board 400B shown in FIG. 66. A 24V direct current supplied through the harness PS1 flows through the 24V power supply line of the first sub-control unit board 400B, and a 5V direct current supplied through the harness PS2 flows through the 5V power supply line of the first sub-control unit board 400B. Current flows. Further, on the first sub-control unit board 400B shown in FIG. 66, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC connected to the 24V power supply line and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL connected to the 5V power supply line are also included. It is shown. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL is an LED lamp for power supply monitoring that lights up or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL lights or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. It is an LED lamp for power supply monitoring. Even in the first sub-control board 400B, no capacitor is provided in the 5V power supply line.

Further, a movable body motor drive IC 424i is mounted on the first sub-control board 400B. The movable motor drive IC 424i is an integrated circuit constituting the drive circuit 424 shown in FIG. 65. A DC current of 24 V and a DC current of 5 V are supplied to the movable motor drive IC 424i, respectively. Although not shown here, the basic circuit 402 shown in FIG. 65 is configured on the first sub-control board 400B, and integrated circuits constituting other drive circuits 424, 426, etc. are also mounted.

The connector SC3 to which the movable body motor drive IC 424i of the first sub-control board 400B is connected and the connector DC1 of the effect movable body unit 160U are connected by a harness SD. The 24V DC current and the 5V DC current supplied to the movable body motor drive IC 424i are supplied to the effect movable body unit 160U through the harness SD, and the motor 163 m provided in the effect movable body unit 160U is driven. It will be possible. Further, a control signal (command) for controlling the motor 163m is transmitted from the first sub-control board 400B through the harness SD.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 58 also includes a second sub-control unit 500 as shown in FIG. 65, which is not shown in FIG. 66, but the second sub-control board is also not included in the power supply control board 252B. A DC current of 24 V and a DC current of 5 V are supplied through the harness shown in the figure. Further, the second sub control board is connected to the first sub control board 400B by a harness for control signals (for command transmission). Further, the second sub control board is also connected to the effect device (effect image display device 157) in the same manner as the first sub control board 400B.

As described above, the main control board 300B and the hopper unit 180 are electrically connected by the harness MH, and the main control board 300B and the reel unit 700 are also electrically connected by the harness MR1 to MR3. Further, the first sub-control board 400B and the effect movable body unit 160U are also electrically connected by the harness SD.

FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a state in which the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 in the power-off state is opened and the left reel 110 is manually rotated. The power cut state may be a state in which the power switch 244 is turned off, or a state in which the power switch 244 is turned on but the power cord 265 is not connected to the outlet. However, power may not be supplied from the island equipment (the same shall apply hereinafter). If power is not supplied from the island equipment, even if the power cord 265 is connected to the outlet and the power switch 244 is turned on, the power is cut off. Even in such a power failure state, each reel 110 to 112 can be manually rotated in both the forward direction and the reverse direction.

Any of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 66 (power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, which are lit in the energized state. ) Is also off when the power is cut off.

However, as shown in FIG. 67, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, a current (induced current) due to the counter electromotive force is generated by the motor 110 m (see FIG. 66) that rotates the left reel 110. Continuing the description with reference to FIG. 66, the induced current generated by the motor 110m flows into the main control board 300B through the harness MR1 and is supplied from the reel drive IC 322i to the 24V power supply line and the 5V power supply line, respectively. A main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR is provided between the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the ground, and a main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR is provided between the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML and the ground. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML is lit by an induced current because the resistance value is adjusted by the main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML is adjusted by the main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR. By being there, it lights up by the induced current. Further, even if the manual rotation is stopped, since the main control 24V capacitor 24MC is provided in the 24V power supply line, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML continues to light for a while. On the other hand, since the 5V power supply line is not provided with a capacitor, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML is immediately turned off when the manual rotation is stopped. That is, when the manual rotation is stopped, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML is turned off before the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML. The 5V power supply line may also be provided with a capacitor having a capacity lower than that of the main control 24V capacitor 24MC.

The induced current that has flowed into the main control board 300B then flows into the power supply control board 252B through the harness PM, and is supplied from the connector PC 2 to the 24V power supply line and the 5V power supply line, respectively. A power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR is provided between the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the ground, and a power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR is provided between the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the ground. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL is lit by an induced current because the resistance value is adjusted by the power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, and the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL is adjusted by the power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. By being there, it lights up by the induced current. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of boards such as the LED (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B and the LED (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B are emitting light. Further, even if the manual rotation is stopped, since the power supply control 24V capacitor 24PC is provided in the 24V power supply line, the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL continues to light for a while. Further, since the power supply control 5V capacitor 5PC is also provided in the 5V power supply line, the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL also keeps lighting for a while.

The induced current that has flowed into the power supply control board 252B further flows into the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS1 and is supplied from the connector SC1 to the 24V power supply line. A sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR is provided between the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the ground. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and the ground. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL is lit by an induced current because the resistance value is adjusted by the sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR. Further, the induced current flowing into the power supply control board 252B flows into the first sub control board 400B through the harness PS2 and is supplied from the connector SC2 to the 5V power supply line. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and the ground. The sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL is turned on by an induced current because the resistance value is adjusted by the sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of boards such as the LED (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B, the LED (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, and the LED (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub control board 400B emit light. Will be there. Even if the manual rotation is stopped, the sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC is provided in the 24V power supply line, so that the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL continues to light for a while. On the other hand, since the 5V power supply line is not provided with a capacitor, the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL is immediately turned off when the manual rotation is stopped.

The above description is an explanation of the phenomenon that occurs when each of the harnesses MR1, PM, PS1, and PS2 is normally connected to the connector and is not disconnected. On the other hand, if the harness MR1 is broken or not properly connected to the connector RC1 and / and the connector MC2 (disconnected or insufficiently inserted), no matter how much the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the figure is shown. None of the monitor LEDs shown in 66 are lit, and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML remain off. As a result, if any of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 66, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the harness MR1 is abnormal or the connectors RC1 and MC2. You can suspect a poor connection.

Further, if the harness PM is disconnected or is not normally connected to the connector MC5 and / and the connector PC2, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML are used. Is lit, but the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, and power control 5V monitor LED 5PL are not lit. As a result, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML are lit, but the sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, the sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and When the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL is not lit, it is possible to suspect an abnormality in the harness PM or a poor connection with the connectors MC5 and PC2.

Further, even when the main control board 300B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B at the cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing stage, the LED (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B is lit by manually rotating the left reel 110. It is possible.

Further, if the harness PS1 is not disconnected or is not normally connected to the connector PC3 and / and the connector SC1, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the sub-control 24V among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. Only the monitor LED 24SL does not light. As a result, if only the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 66 does not light even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, it is suspected that the harness PS1 is abnormal or the connection with the connectors PC3 and SC1 is defective. Can be done. Further, if the harness PS2 is not disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector PC4 and / and the connector SC2, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the sub-control 5V among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. Only the monitor LED 5SL does not light. As a result, if only the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 66 does not light even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, it is suspected that the harness PS2 is abnormal or the connection with the connectors PC4 and SC2 is defective. Can be done.

Here, the description has been made when the left reel 110 is manually rotated in the power-off state, but even when the middle reel 111 is manually rotated in the power-off state, the right reel 112 is manually rotated in the power-off state. The same applies when it is rotated. Further, as the number of reels to be manually rotated increases, the monitor LED emits bright light. For example, when the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112 are manually rotated at the same time, the monitor LED emits bright light as compared with the case where only the left reel 110 is manually rotated.

Further, LEDs used for different purposes from the monitor LEDs such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, the sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, the sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL ( For example, even if it is an LED for error monitoring that emits light when an error occurs, an LED for signal monitoring, etc.), if it is provided with an adjustment resistor on the 24V power supply line or 5V power supply line, it can be manually turned off. When the left reel 110 is rotated, it emits light if there is no electrical connection failure. Therefore, even if the LED is used for a purpose other than the monitor LED, it is possible to confirm the electrical connection failure.

FIG. 68A is a perspective view of the hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 60 as viewed from diagonally above.

The connector HC1 shown in FIG. 66 is also shown in the hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 68 (a). The hopper unit 180 has a storage tank 181 for storing medals and a disk-shaped hopper disk 182 provided on the bottom surface of the storage tank 181. In FIG. 68 (a), a part of the hopper disk 182 is visible. The hopper disk 182 is provided with six medal passage holes 1821 at intervals in the circumferential direction. The medal passage hole 1821 is a hole having a size through which a medal, which is a game medium, can pass. The hopper disk 182 is rotated by a motor 180 m (see FIG. 66), and the medals stored in the storage tank 181 are discharged through the medal passage hole 1821.

FIG. 68B is a diagram showing how the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated.

FIG. 68 (b) shows a state in which the hopper disk 182 is viewed from directly above, and six medal passage holes 1821 can be confirmed. Even in the power failure state, the hopper disk 182 can be manually rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction by inserting a finger into the medal passage hole 1821.

When the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated, a current (induced current) due to the counter electromotive force is generated by the motor 180 m (see FIG. 66) that rotates the hopper disk 182. Continuing the description with reference to FIG. 66, the induced current generated by the motor 180 m flows into the main control board 300B through the harness MH, and is supplied from the hopper motor drive IC 326i to the 24 V power supply line and the 5 V power supply line, respectively. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML is lit by an induced current because the resistance value is adjusted by the main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML is adjusted by the main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR. By being there, it lights up by the induced current. On the other hand, if the harness MH is broken or not properly connected to the connector HC1 and / and the connector MC1, no matter how manually the hopper disk 182 is rotated, any of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 66 will light up. However, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML remain off. As a result, if any of the monitor LEDs or the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML shown in FIG. 66 do not light even if the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated, the harness MH is abnormal or the connectors HC1 and MC1 are displayed. You can suspect a poor connection.

The induced current generated by the motor 180 m of the hopper disk 182 then flows through the power supply control board 252B to the first sub control board 400B in the same manner as the induced current generated by the motor 110 m of the left reel 110 described above, and is normal. If so, the monitor LEDs (24PL, 5PL, 24SL, 5SL) provided on the respective boards 252B and 400B are turned on. Therefore, it is possible to confirm the electrical connection failure on the downstream side of the main control board 300B when the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated as in the case where the left reel 110 is manually rotated.

When the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated and the left reel 111 is also manually rotated in the power-off state, the number of movable bodies to be manually rotated has increased, so that the monitor LED emits bright light. Become.

Further, the shutter 163 shown in FIG. 58 can be manually opened and closed even in the power failure state.

When the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, a current (induced current) due to the counter electromotive force is generated by the motor 163 m (see FIG. 66) that opens and closes the shutter 163. Continuing the explanation with reference to FIG. 66, the induced current generated by the motor 163m flows into the first sub-control board 400B through the harness SD and is supplied from the movable motor drive IC 424i to the 24V power supply line and the 5V power supply line, respectively. Will be done. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL is lit by an induced current because the resistance value is adjusted by the sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL is also lit by the sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. By being there, it lights up by the induced current.

The induced current that has flowed into the first sub-control board 400B then flows into the power supply control board 252B through the harness PS1 and is supplied from the connector PC3 to the 24V power supply line. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL is lit by an induced current because the resistance value is adjusted by the power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR. Further, the induced current flowing into the first sub-control board 400B also flows into the power supply control board 252B through the harness PS2, and is supplied from the connector PC 4 to the 5V power supply line. The power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL is also lit by an induced current because the resistance value is adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of boards such as the LED (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B and the LED (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B are emitting light.

The induced current that has flowed into the power supply control board 252B further flows into the main control board 300B through the harness PM, and is supplied from the connector MC5 to the 24V power supply line and the 5V power supply line, respectively. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL is lit by an induced current because the resistance value is adjusted by the power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, and the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL is adjusted by the power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. By being there, it lights up by the induced current. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of boards such as the LED of the power supply control board 252B (24PL, 5PL), the LED of the first sub control board 400B (24SL, 5SL), and the LED of the main control board 300B (24ML, 5ML) emit light. Will be there.

The above description is an explanation of the phenomenon that occurs when each of the harnesses SD, PS1, PS2, and PM is normally connected to the connector and is not disconnected. On the other hand, if the harness SD is broken or not properly connected to the connector DC1 and / and the connector SC3, no matter how manually the shutter 163 is opened or closed, none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 66 will light up. , Sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL remain off. As a result, if any of the monitor LEDs or the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL shown in FIG. 66 do not light even if the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, there is an abnormality in the harness SD or the connectors DC1 and SC3. You can suspect a poor connection.

Further, if the harness PS1 is disconnected or is not normally connected to the connector SC1 and / and the connector PC3, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL will be used when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed. Although it lights up, the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML do not light up. As a result, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL are lit, but the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML are not lit. , It is possible to suspect an abnormality in the harness PS1 or a poor connection with the connectors SC1 and PC3. Further, if the harness PS2 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector SC2 and / and the connector PC4, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL will be used when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed. Although it lights up, the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up. As a result, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL are lit, but the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML are not lit. , It is possible to suspect an abnormality in the harness PS2 or a poor connection with the connectors SC2 and PC4.

Further, even when the first sub control board 400B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B at the cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing stage, the LED (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub control board 400B can be manually opened and closed by manually opening and closing the shutter 163. ) Can be lit.

Further, if the harness PM is disconnected or is not normally connected to the connector PC2 and / and the connector MC5, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the main control 24V monitor among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. Only the LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up. As a result, even if the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, if only the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. You can suspect a poor connection.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 66 and the hopper unit 180 and the reel unit 700 also shown in FIG. Hereinafter, the points different from the connection example described with reference to FIG. 66 will be mainly described, and duplicate description may be omitted.

In FIG. 69, the connector MC5 and the connector MC6 provided on the main control unit board 300B are not shown. A hopper relay board 901B is shown between the main control unit board 300B and the hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 69, and a reel relay board 902B is shown between the main control unit board 300B and the reel unit 700. Has been done.

The hopper relay board 901B is provided with a connector HRM to which the harness MH1 connected to the connector MC1 of the main control board 300B is connected and a connector HRH to which the harness MH2 connected to the connector HC1 of the hopper unit 180 is connected.

The reel relay board 902B is provided with a connector RRM1 to which the harness MR11 connected to the connector MC2 of the main control board 300B is connected and a connector RRR1 to which the harness MR12 connected to the connector RC1 of the reel unit 700 is connected. Further, a connector RRM2 to which the harness MR21 connected to the connector MC3 of the main control board 300B is connected and a connector RRR2 to which the harness MR22 connected to the connector RC2 of the reel unit 700 are connected are also provided. Further, a connector RRM3 to which the harness MR31 connected to the connector MC4 of the main control board 300B is connected and a connector RRR3 to which the harness MR32 connected to the connector RC3 of the reel unit 700 are connected are also provided.

Even in the connection example shown in FIG. 69, if the reels 110 to 112 are manually rotated in the power failure state, the monitor LEDs such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML are lit if normal. However, if the plurality of harnesses MR11, MR12, MR21, MR22, MR21, and MR32 between the main control unit board 300B and the reel unit 700 are disconnected or not connected normally, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and The monitor LED such as the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML does not light.

Even if the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated in the power-off state, the monitor LEDs such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML are lit if normal. However, if the plurality of harnesses MH1 and MH2 between the main control unit board 300B and the hopper unit 180 are disconnected or not connected normally, monitors such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML are monitored. The LED does not light.

In the connection example shown in FIG. 69, since the relay board 901B for the hopper and the relay board 902B for the reel are provided, the number of harnesses and the number of connectors are increased as compared with the connection example shown in FIG. There is a high possibility that a poor connection will occur. However, an induced current is generated by a manual operation in the power failure state, and the electrical connection failure can be easily confirmed from the lighting state of the monitor LED.

The hopper relay board 901B and the reel relay board 902B may also be provided with a 24V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor in the 24V power supply line, and may be provided with a 5V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor in the 5V power supply line. It is possible to confirm the electrical connection failure by generating an induced current by manual operation in the power failure state and turning on these monitor LEDs if it is normal.

In the description here, the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, the right reel 112, the hopper disk 182, and the shutter 163 have been described as movable bodies, but the present invention is not limited to these, and any movable body driven by a motor is used. good.

The same applies to the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 87, and examples of the movable body include a sprocket rotated by a payout motor in the payout device 152P shown in FIG. 87. The payout motor rotates and stops under the control of the payout control board 170P (see FIG. 87), and when the sprocket is manually rotated in the power-off state, an induced current is generated in the payout motor. If the LED provided on the payout control board 170P and the LED provided on the main control board 156P (see FIG. 87) connected to the payout control board 170P by a harness are normally lit by this induced current. do. Further, as in the above description, the induced current flowing into the main control board 156P flows through the power supply control board 182P (see FIG. 87) to the first sub control board 160P (see FIG. 87), and is normal. If so, the LEDs provided on the respective boards 182P and 160P are turned on. Further, as the movable body, the two movable parts are driven by an effect movable body (for example, a croon) driven by a motor in which the main control unit controls the rotation, and two motors in which the first sub control unit controls the rotation. It may be a movable body or the like.

Further, a light emitting means such as a 7-segment (SEG) display may be used instead of the LED lamp that is turned on by the induced current in the power failure state. For example, it may be a 7-segment display that displays set values (for example, settings 1 to 6) having different degrees of advantage for the player. As a light emitting means, it is a requirement that it be visible.

In the above description, the adjustment resistance (24MR, 5MR, 24PR, 5PR, 24SR, 5SR) is used to make the monitor LED emit light by the induced current in the power interruption state, but the means capable of adjusting the impedance is used. Anyway, it is not limited to the adjustment resistance. However, if a large amount of induced current flows even in the energized state, there will be an adverse effect. Need to be adjusted.

According to the above description
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.]
Movable bodies [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, etc.] that can be operated by driving a motor [for example, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] Movable unit with [Crune etc.] [For example, hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, effect movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
The movable body unit is electrically connected [for example, connected via a harness] to the light emitting means.
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body in a power-off state to drive the motor.
The game table is characterized by [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 58 and the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 87]. 』\
Explained.

That is, the light emitting means may emit light even when the power is cut off.

After attaching the movable body unit that was removed from the game console for cleaning and maintenance, whether or not the movable body unit and the light emitting means are electrically normally connected is determined by the presence or absence of light emission of the light emitting means. Can be confirmed even when the power is cut off. Further, by manually operating the movable body and causing the light emitting means to emit light, the game table can be visually confirmed without the light projecting means. Further, even when the movable body unit is attached to the game table at the factory, it is possible to confirm whether the movable body unit and the light emitting means are electrically and normally connected even when the game table is in a power failure state. can. As described above, it has a special effect that it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the movable body unit is electrically and normally connected.

The power cut state may be a state in which the power switch of the game console is turned off, or a state in which the power switch is turned on but the power cord is not connected to the outlet. Alternatively, the power may not be supplied from the island facility.

Further, the movable body unit may be a rotation display unit [for example, a reel unit 700], a prize medium payout unit [for example, a hopper unit 180], or an effect operation unit [for example, an effect. Movable unit 160U] may be used (hereinafter, the same applies).

again,
"The light emitting means is provided on a substrate [for example, a main control board 300B, 156P, a first sub control board 400B, 160P, a power supply control board 252B, 182P, a relay board (901B, 902B), a payout control board 170P, etc.]. And
A game table including a detachable harness [for example, various harnesses shown in FIG. 66, various harnesses shown in FIG. 68] that relays the board and the movable body unit. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, after attaching the movable body unit that was removed from the game table for cleaning and maintenance, the game table determines whether the harness is normally connected or the harness is not broken. It can be confirmed even in the disconnected state.

The board may be a board having a main control unit [for example, main control boards 300B, 156P], or a board having a sub control unit [for example, first sub control boards 400B, 160P or second sub. It may be a control board 164P], a board having a payout control unit [for example, a payout control board 170P], or a board having a power supply control unit [for example, a power supply control board 252B, 182P]. It may be a relay board [for example, a relay board 901B for a hopper, a relay board 902B for a reel].

Further, the substrate and the movable body unit may be relayed by a plurality of harnesses [for example, harnesses MR1 to MR3 having a plurality of harnesses in parallel, harness MR11 and harness MR12 having a plurality of harnesses in series].

again,
"The light emitting means is capable of emitting light in an energized state [for example, constantly emitting light or periodically emitting light, and emitting light when conditions are met].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the light emitting means can be used for different purposes depending on whether the light emitting means is energized or disconnected. That is, it can be used for the original purpose (for example, current monitor, voltage monitor, error monitoring, signal monitoring) in the energized state, and can be used for checking the electrical connection in the power cut state.

again,
"The light emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, LED for current monitor, LED for voltage monitor, LED for error monitoring, etc.].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, in the energized state, the light emitting means can be used for applications that are not related to the operation of the movable body.

again,
"The light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [for example, an induced current] generated by a counter electromotive force by manually operating the movable body in a power failure state to drive the motor.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the movable body unit is electrically and normally connected only by allowing the current to flow to the light emitting means.

According to the above description
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.]
Movable bodies [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, etc.] that can be operated by driving a motor [for example, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] Movable unit with [Crune etc.] [For example, hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, effect movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
The movable body unit is electrically connected [for example, connected via a harness] to the light emitting means.
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body in a power-off state to drive the motor (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), and the first case. There is a case where the light emission is continued even if the motor drive is stopped [for example, the case where the light emission is continued due to the electric charge stored in the capacitor].
The game table is characterized by [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 58 and the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 87]. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, in addition to the above-mentioned special effect, it is possible to confirm the light emission of the light emitting means even if the movable body is manually stopped, and it becomes easy to confirm the light emission of the light emitting means. ..

again,
"Capacitors capable of accumulating charges generated by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state [for example, main control 24V capacitor 24MC, power supply control 24V capacitor 24PC, power supply control 5V capacitor 5PC, A game table characterized by being equipped with a sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC]. 』\
Was also explained.

By using a general electronic component called a capacitor, it is possible to easily confirm the light emission of the light emitting means.

again,
"The light emitting means is provided on a substrate [for example, a main control board 300B, 156P, a first sub control board 400B, 160P, a power supply control board 252B, 182P, a relay board (901B, 902B), a payout control board 170P, etc.]. And
A game table including a detachable harness [for example, various harnesses shown in FIG. 66, various harnesses shown in FIG. 68] that relays the board and the movable body unit. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The light emitting means is capable of emitting light in an energized state [for example, constantly emitting light or periodically emitting light, and emitting light when conditions are met].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The light emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, LED for current monitor, LED for voltage monitor, LED for error monitoring, etc.].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [for example, an induced current] generated by a counter electromotive force by manually operating the movable body in a power failure state to drive the motor.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to the above description
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.]
A movable body unit [for example, a reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, the left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, a motor 110 m].
It is a game table equipped with
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112 m].
The movable body unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, connected via harnesses MR1 to MR3].
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body in a power-off state to drive the first motor.
The light emitting means may also emit light by manually operating the third movable body in a power-off state to drive the third motor.
The game table is characterized by [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 58 and the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 87]. 』\
Explained.

After attaching the movable body unit that was removed from the game table for cleaning and maintenance, whether or not each movable body and the light emitting means are electrically normally connected is determined by the presence or absence of light emission of the common light emitting means. It can be confirmed even if the table is in a power failure state. Further, by manually operating each movable body and causing the light emitting means to emit light, the game table can be visually confirmed without the light projecting means. Further, even when the movable body unit is attached to the game table at the factory, it is possible to confirm whether each movable body and the light emitting means are electrically and normally connected even when the game table is in a power failure state. .. As described above, it has a special effect that it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the movable body unit is electrically and normally connected.

The movable body unit may have a fourth movable body [for example, the middle reel 111] that can be operated by driving the fourth motor [for example, the motor 111 m].

again,
"The light emitting means is provided on a substrate [for example, a main control board 300B, 156P, a first sub control board 400B, 160P, a power supply control board 252B, 182P, a relay board (901B, 902B), a payout control board 170P, etc.]. And
A detachable first harness [for example, harness MR1, harness MR11 and harness MR12] that relays the substrate and the first motor, and
A detachable third harness [for example, harness MR3, harness MR31 and harness MR32] that relays the substrate and the third motor, and
A game table characterized by being equipped with. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, after the movable body unit that has been removed from the game table for cleaning or maintenance is attached, the first harness is normally connected or the second harness is also normally connected. It can be confirmed whether or not the first harness is broken or the second harness is not broken even when the game console is in a power failure state.

again,
"The light emitting means is capable of emitting light in an energized state [for example, constantly emitting light or periodically emitting light, and emitting light when conditions are met].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The light emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the first movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, LED for current monitor, LED for voltage monitor, LED for error monitoring, etc.].
The light emitting means can emit light even when the third movable body is stopped in an energized state.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, in the energized state, the light emitting means can be used for applications that are not related to the operation of the first movable body or the operation of the third movable body.

again,
"The light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [for example, an induced current] generated by a counter electromotive force by manually operating the first movable body in a power failure state to drive the first motor. Being done
The light emitting means is configured to emit light even with a current [for example, an induced current] generated by a counter electromotive force by manually operating the third movable body in a power failure state to drive the third motor. Has been,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to the above description
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.]
A first movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m].
A second movable body unit [eg, hopper unit 180] having a second movable body [eg, hopper disk 182] that can be operated by driving a second motor [eg, motor 180 m].
It is a game table equipped with
The first movable body unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, connected via harnesses MR1 to MR3].
The second movable body unit is also electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, connected via a harness MH].
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body in a power-off state to drive the first motor.
The light emitting means may also emit light by manually operating the second movable body in a power-off state to drive the second motor.
The game table is characterized by [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 58 and the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 87]. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, after attaching each movable body unit that was removed from the game table for cleaning and maintenance, it is common to determine whether or not each movable body unit and the light emitting means are electrically and normally connected. It can be confirmed even if the game table is in a power-off state depending on the presence or absence of light emission of the means. Further, by manually operating each movable body and causing the light emitting means to emit light, the game table can be visually confirmed without the light projecting means. In addition, even when each movable body unit is attached to the game table at the factory, it is possible to check whether each movable body unit and the light emitting means are electrically and normally connected even when the game table is in a power failure state. can. As described above, it has a special effect that it becomes easy to confirm whether or not a plurality of movable body units are electrically and normally connected.

again,
"The light emitting means is provided on a substrate [for example, a main control board 300B, 156P, a first sub control board 400B, 160P, a power supply control board 252B, 182P, a relay board (901B, 902B), a payout control board 170P, etc.]. And
A detachable first harness [for example, harness MR1] that relays the substrate and the first motor,
A detachable second harness [for example, harness MH] that relays the substrate and the second motor, and
A game table characterized by being equipped with. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, after installing each movable unit that was removed from the game console for cleaning and maintenance, either the first harness is normally connected or the second harness is also normally connected. It can be confirmed whether or not the first harness is broken or the second harness is not broken even when the game console is in a power failure state.

again,
"The light emitting means is capable of emitting light in an energized state [for example, constantly emitting light or periodically emitting light, and emitting light when conditions are met].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The light emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the first movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, LED for current monitor, LED for voltage monitor, LED for error monitoring, etc.].
The light emitting means can emit light even when the second movable body is stopped in an energized state.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, in the energized state, the light emitting means can be used for applications that are not related to the operation of the first movable body or the operation of the second movable body.

again,
"The light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [for example, an induced current] generated by a counter electromotive force by manually operating the first movable body in a power failure state to drive the first motor. Being done
The light emitting means is configured to emit light even with a current [for example, an induced current] generated by a counter electromotive force by manually operating the second movable body in a power failure state to drive the second motor. Has been,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is confirmed whether or not the first movable body unit is electrically and normally connected only by allowing the current to flow to the light emitting means, and the second movable body unit. It becomes easier to confirm whether or not is electrically connected normally.

According to the above description
"First light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED. , LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
Second light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, Among the LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display, etc., the light emitting means different from the first light emitting means] and
It can be operated by driving a motor [for example, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, croon, etc.] Movable unit having various movable bodies [for example, hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, effect movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
The movable body unit is electrically connected [for example, connected via a harness] to the first light emitting means.
The movable body unit is also electrically connected [for example, connected via a harness] to the second light emitting means.
The first light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body in a power-off state to drive the motor.
The second light emitting means may also emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power-off state.
The game table is characterized by [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 58 and the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 87]. 』\
Explained.

That is, the first light emitting means may emit light even in the power cut state, and the second light emitting means may also emit light even in the power cut state.

After attaching the movable body unit that was removed from the game table for cleaning and maintenance, whether or not the movable body unit and the plurality of light emitting means are electrically and normally connected depends on the presence or absence of light emission of the plurality of light emitting means. It can be confirmed even if the game console is in a power-off state. Further, by manually operating the movable body and causing the plurality of light emitting means to emit light, it becomes easier to visually confirm the game table even without the light projecting means. In addition, even when the movable body unit is attached to the game table at the factory, it is necessary to confirm whether the movable body unit and a plurality of light emitting means are electrically and normally connected even when the game table is in a power failure state. Can be done. As described above, it has a special effect that it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the movable body unit is electrically and normally connected.

The first light emitting means is connected to a power supply line having a first voltage [for example, 24V], and the second light emitting means is connected to a power supply line having a second voltage [for example, 5V]. It may be connected to. Further, the first light emitting means is provided on the first substrate [for example, the main control board 300B], and the second light emitting means is provided on the second board [for example, the power supply control board 252B]. It may be the one provided in. Alternatively, the first light emitting means may be an LED lamp, and the second light emitting means may be a 7-segment display.

again,
"The first light emitting means is provided on a substrate [for example, a main control board 300B, 156P, a first sub control board 400B, 160P, a power supply control board 252B, 182P].
The second light emitting means is also provided on the substrate.
A game table including a detachable harness [for example, a harness to which both 24V and 5V power is supplied] that relays the board and the movable body unit. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are provided on a common substrate.

According to this game table, it is easy to visually check the periphery of the substrate when the plurality of light emitting means emit light without the light projecting means.

again,
"The first light emitting means [for example, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] is provided on the first board [for example, the main control board 300B].
The second light emitting means [for example, the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL] is provided on the second board [for example, the power supply control board 252B].
The second substrate is a substrate different from the first substrate.
Detachable harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, MR1 to MR3] that relay the first substrate and the movable body unit, and
A detachable harness [for example, harness PM] that relays the first substrate and the second substrate, and
A game table characterized by being equipped with. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it becomes easy to confirm whether or not each of the movable body unit and the first substrate, and the first substrate and the second substrate are electrically and normally connected.

again,
"The first light emitting means is capable of emitting light in an energized state [for example, constantly emitting light or periodically emitting light, and emitting light when conditions are met].
The second light emitting means is also capable of emitting light in an energized state [for example, constantly emitting light or periodically emitting light, and emitting light when conditions are met].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be used for different purposes in the energized state and the power cut state. That is, it can be used for the original purpose (for example, current monitor, voltage monitor, error monitoring, signal monitoring) in the energized state, and can be used for checking the electrical connection in the power cut state.

again,
"The first light emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, LED for current monitor, LED for voltage monitor, LED for error monitoring, etc.].
The second light emitting means is also capable of emitting light even when the movable body is stopped in the energized state [for example, LED for current monitor, LED for voltage monitor, LED for error monitoring, etc.].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, in the energized state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be used for applications that are not related to the operation of the movable body.

again,
"The first light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [for example, an induced current] generated by a counter electromotive force by manually operating the movable body in a power failure state to drive the motor.
The second light emitting means is also configured to emit light by a current [for example, an induced current] generated by a counter electromotive force by manually operating the movable body in a power failure state to drive the motor.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is confirmed whether or not the movable body unit is electrically and normally connected only by allowing the current to flow to each of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means. Will be easier to do.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a demo animation displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the demo effect.

A predetermined time during which no operation is performed by the player while the animation (non-demo animation) displayed on the effect image display device 157 is displayed continuously from the game or after the game is completed. When the time (for example, 30 seconds) is reached, the animation is switched to and the demo animation is started to be displayed. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 58, the demo animation is roughly divided into five scenes. First, the opening animation (demo animation 1/5) is displayed. In this opening animation, the entire screen on the effect image display device 157 becomes white once, and then the company logo gradually begins to appear from the back of the white display screen, and finally, as shown in FIG. 70 (a), at the end. The corporate logo appears completely. When the opening animation ends, the animation in which the character appears will start. At first, the animation (demo animation 2/5) in which the main character, the lord, appears, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), is displayed. Further, when the animation in which the character appears is started, the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed at the lower left of the display screen of the effect image display device 157. This first guidance display icon GI1 is an icon displayed only during the demonstration production. That is, it is displayed only in the animation in which the character in the demo animation appears. However, it may be displayed even in non-demo animation. The display of the second selection switch 194 is displayed on the first guidance display icon GI1. That is, the display 167p of the left button 167 and the display 168p of the right button 168 are both displayed in black, and the characters "volume adjustment" are also displayed in black. By operating the left button 167 and the right button 168, the upper speaker is displayed. It is suggested that the volume of the output sound from the 272 and the output sound from the bass speaker 277 can be adjusted. As described with reference to FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (a), when the left button 167 is pressed once while the first guide display icon GI1 is displayed, the third volume selection icon SI3 is displayed. It is displayed, the volume level of 5 steps is lowered by 1 step, and when the right button 168 is pressed, the 3rd volume selection icon SI3 is also displayed, and this time, the volume level of 5 steps is raised by 1 step. Further, the display 166p of the second chance button 166 is displayed in white, and the characters "game information" are also displayed in white, suggesting that the game information is displayed by operating the second chance button 166. ing.

FIG. 71A is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157, which is displayed when the second chance button 166 is pressed while the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed.

The game information displayed when the second chance button 166 is pressed while the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed is a payout table. In the payout table shown in FIG. 71 (a), it is shown that eight medals are paid out when the bell-bell-bell symbol combination is aligned on the effective line described with reference to FIG. 59. -It is shown that 3 medals will be paid out when the combination of watermelon symbols is complete. It is also shown that if the cherry symbol stops in the middle symbol, two medals will be paid out. This payout table is composed of a plurality of pages, and the payout table shown in FIG. 71 (a) is the first page. The first guidance display icon GI1 displayed at the lower left of the display screen is replaced with the second guidance display icon GI2. In the second guidance display icon GI2, the characters "page move" are displayed in black for the display 167p of the left button 167 and the display 168p of the right button 168 displayed in black, and the left button 167 and the right button 168 are operated. It is suggested that the page of the dividend table can be changed by doing so. With the second guidance display icon GI2 displayed, pressing the left button 167 once advances the payout table page by one page, and pressing the right button 168 once advances the payout table page by one page. In addition, the character "end" is displayed in white with respect to the display 166p of the second chance button 166 displayed in white, and the display of the dividend table can be terminated by operating the second chance button 166. Is suggested. When the second chance button 166 is pressed, the display of the payout table disappears on the display screen of the effect image display device 157, and the display of the non-demo animation is started. That is, when the second chance button 166 is operated while the demo animation is displayed, the demo production ends, and when the display of the payout table ends, the display of the non-demo animation starts.

The first guidance display icon GI1 described above corresponds to an example of the second display, and the display of the dividend table corresponds to an example of the response display.

In the demo animation, following the animation in which the main character, the lord, appears in FIG. 70 (b), the animation in which the princess appears (demo animation 3/5) shown in FIG. 70 (c) is displayed. Also in this animation, the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed at the lower left. Further, in the demo animation, following the animation in which the princess appears, the animation in which the old man appears (demo animation 4/5) shown in FIG. 70 (d) is displayed. Also in this animation, the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed at the lower left. Then, at the end of the demo animation, the ending animation (demo animation 5/5) is displayed. In this ending animation, as shown in FIG. 70 (e), a warning display is displayed, and the first guidance display icon GI1 disappears. When the display of the ending animation is completed, the series of demo animations ends, and if the demo production continues, it returns to the above-mentioned opening animation (demo animation 1/5), the entire screen becomes white again, and then a series of series. The demo animation is displayed repeatedly until some operation is performed.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing step by step the state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when the setting to the power saving mode is selected while the non-demo animation is displayed.

In FIG. 72 (a), the effect image display device 157 displays an animation in which the lord is sitting on the upper seat and the old man is reading a letter. This animation is an animation that is continuously displayed on the effect image display device 157 during the game, or is displayed on the effect image display device 157 after the game is completed, and is the demo animation described with reference to FIG. 70. It is a different animation (hereinafter referred to as "non-demo animation"). In this non-demo animation, the eyes and fans of the lord move, the hands of the grandfather move, and this non-demo animation is displayed. The brightness of the layer on which the non-demo animation is displayed in the effect image display device 157 is normal brightness, and the non-demo animation is reproduced in a bright state. Further, each figure of FIG. 72 has a first chance. A button 165, a second selection switch 194 (first chance button 166, left button 167, right button 168), left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, and three reels 110-112 are shown (FIG. 72). In the first chance button 165 shown in a), the built-in first effect lamp is lit in white, and in the second chance button 166, the built-in second effect lamp is lit in white. Both the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R shown in (a) are lit in white. Further, the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 63) provided in each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also lit in white. The three reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 72 (a) are illuminated in white.

The light emitting mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the light emitting mode of the right side lamp 144R may be the same. For example, they may be turned on in the same color, blinked at the same timing, or turned off together. Alternatively, the light emitting mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the light emitting mode of the left side lamp 144L may be the same. Further, of the first effect lamp, the second effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 (see FIG. 63), only the left side lamp 144L may be turned off.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 72 (a), the indicator unit 190b of the first selection switch 190 is in a state of being adjusted to “6” shown in FIG. 63 (a), and outputs from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272. The volume is set to the volume level of the sixth stage.

In the example shown in FIG. 72, in order to operate the first selection switch 190, a store clerk inserts a key into the key hole 140 and turns the inserted key clockwise to unlock and open the front door 102. Even when the key is used, when the front door 102 is opened, the above-mentioned opening sensor detects that the front door 102 has been opened, and the upper speaker 272 says "the door is open". The error notification sound of the error is repeatedly output, and the effect image display device 157 displays an error display of the door opening error by displaying characters such as "door opening". The output of the error notification sound of the door opening error and the display of the error display are continued until the front door 102 is closed. There are many players who think that the error notification sound is noisy to the surrounding players. Therefore, a clerk at a game store may open the front door 102 while holding the opening / closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 is opened. By doing so, the opening / closing piece does not protrude, the opening of the front door 102 is not detected by the opening sensor, and the error notification of the door opening error is not performed. In the example shown in FIG. 72, the store clerk operates the first selection switch 190 with the front door 102 opened while holding the opening / closing piece. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIGS. 72 (b) and later does not display the error display of the door opening error. Also, no error notification sound is output.

First, the store clerk performs a switch operation (1) in which the indicator unit 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "7" shown in FIG. 63 (a).

When this switch operation (1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the effect image display device 157 has the same first volume selection icon SI1 as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 64 (C). Is displayed, and it is notified that the volume level of the 7th stage is selected. Even if the front door 102 is opened, the non-demo animation is continuously displayed, and even if the switch operation of the first selection switch 190 is performed, the non-demo animation is continuously displayed.

FIG. 73 is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. 72. In FIG. 73, time elapses from the left to the right of the figure, the timing of (c) in FIG. 73 coincides with the timing of FIG. 72 (c), and the timing of (d) in FIG. 73 is shown in FIG. It coincides with the timing of 72 (d), and the timing of (e) in FIG. 73 coincides with the timing of FIG. 72 (e). Further, FIG. 73 shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 and the brightness of the animation display on the effect image display device 157, as well as the first effect lamp and the second chance built in the first chance button 165. Light emitting modes of various light emitting means such as a second effect lamp built in the button 166, a left side lamp 144L, a right side lamp 144R, and a backlight module 740 provided on each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also shown. ..

At the left end of the timing chart of FIG. 73, the non-demo animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157 with normal brightness, and the first volume selection icon SI1 in which the characters "volume 7/7" are displayed is also displayed. The state of being is shown. It is also shown that the various light emitting means are lit in white.

Next, the store clerk performs a switch operation (2) in which the instruction unit 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to “8” shown in FIG. 63 (a).

When this switch operation (2) is performed, as shown in FIG. 72 (c), the effect image display device 157 has the same first volume selection icon SI1 as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 64 (D). Is displayed to notify that the exhibition volume is selected. Even at the timing (c) in the timing chart of FIG. 73, the non-demo animation and the first volume selection icon SI1 in which the characters “volume for exhibition” are displayed are displayed on the effect image display device 157. It is shown.

Subsequently, the store clerk performs a switch operation (3) for adjusting the indicator unit 190b of the first selection switch 190 to “9” shown in FIG. 63 (a).

Until now, the non-power saving mode setting was selected, but when this switch operation (3) is performed, the power saving mode setting is selected and the volume level of the 7th stage is selected. It will be in the state of being done. FIG. 72 (d) is a diagram showing a state immediately after the switch operation (3) is performed. As shown in FIG. 73, the time from the switch operation (3) to the state shown in FIG. 72 (d) is shown in FIG. 72 (c) after the previous switch operation (2) is performed. The time from the switch operation (2) to the state shown in FIG. 72 (c) is shorter than the time to reach the state shown in FIG. 72 (e) after the switch operation (3) is performed. ) Is the same length as the time until the state is reached.

In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 72 (d), the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 72 (c) has the same second volume selection icon SI2 as the second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 64 (a). Is displayed overlapping, and in the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 72 (e), the first volume selection icon SI1 is completely replaced with the second volume selection icon SI2. The replacement of the icons is also shown in the time chart shown in FIG. 73.

The character "power saving mode" is displayed on the second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 72 (e). This display indicates that the setting of the power saving mode is selected, and the power saving mode is selected. It is not a display indicating that the mode has been set. The non-demo animation is continuously displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 72 (e), and remains in the non-demo state. Therefore, the power saving mode is not set, and as shown in the timing charts of FIGS. 72 (e) and 73, the first effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp built in the first chance button 165 are not set. The 144R and the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 63) of each reel 110-112 remain lit in white. Further, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 also remains lit in white. In addition, the non-demo animation is played in a bright state without being dark.

FIG. 74 shows a state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when the front door 102 is opened while the opening / closing piece is held while the demo animation is displayed and the selection is made to set the power saving mode. It is a figure which shows step by step.

The demo effect is started in FIG. 74 (a), and the opening animation (demo animation 1/5) shown in FIG. 70 (a) is displayed on the effect image display device 157. That is, on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 74 (a), the company logo that has begun to gradually appear from the back is displayed in a state in which the entire display screen is once whitened and then gradually appears. Also, the demo animation is played in a bright state without being dark. Further, in each figure of FIG. 74, as in FIG. 72, the first chance button 165, the second selection switch 194 (first chance button 166, left button 167, right button 168), left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, and three reels 110-112 are shown. Further, in the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. 74 (a), the built-in first effect lamp is lit in white, and in the second chance button 166, the built-in second effect lamp is lit in white. .. Further, both the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R shown in FIG. 74 (a) are lit in white. Further, the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 63) provided on each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also lit in white, and the three reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 74 (a) are illuminated in white. ..

In the demonstration effect, the light emission mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the light emission mode of the right side lamp 144R may be the same. For example, they may be turned on in the same color, blinked at the same timing, or turned off together. Alternatively, the light emitting mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the light emitting mode of the left side lamp 144L may be the same. Further, of the first effect lamp, the second effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 (see FIG. 63), only the left side lamp 144L may be turned off. Alternatively, the first effect lamp may be blinking white, or the right side lamp 144R may be lit in red.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 74 (a), the indicator unit 190b of the first selection switch 190 is in a state of being adjusted to “6” shown in FIG. 63 (a), and outputs from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272. The volume is set to the volume level of the sixth stage.

Further, as in the example shown in FIG. 72, in the example shown in FIG. 74, the clerk of the game store opens the first selection switch 190 while holding the opening / closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 opens. To operate. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIGS. 74 (b) and later does not display the error display of the door opening error. Also, no error notification sound is output.

First, in this example as well, as in the example shown in FIG. 72, the switch operation (1) for adjusting the indicator unit 190b of the first selection switch 190 to “7” shown in FIG. 63 (a) is performed by the clerk.

When this switch operation (1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the effect image display device 157 has the same first volume selection icon SI1 as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 64 (C). Is displayed, and it is notified that the volume level of the 7th stage is selected. Even if the front door 102 is opened, the demo animation is continuously displayed, and even if the switch operation of the first selection switch 190 is performed, the demo animation is continuously displayed. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 74 (b) displays an animation (demo animation 2/5) in which the main character, the lord, is described using FIG. 70 (b). In the lower left, the first guide is displayed. The display of the display icon GI1 has started. The first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed overlapping with a part of the first volume selection icon SI1, but conversely, the first volume selection icon SI1 is displayed as a part of the first guidance display icon GI1. It may be displayed in an overlapping manner.

Next, the store clerk performs a switch operation (2) in which the instruction unit 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to “8” shown in FIG. 63 (a).

When this switch operation (2) is performed, as shown in FIG. 74 (c), the effect image display device 157 has the same first volume selection icon SI1 as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 64 (D). Is displayed to notify that the exhibition volume is selected. Further, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 74 (c) displays the animation (demo animation 3/5) in which the princess appears, which was described using FIG. 70 (c), and the first is displayed in the lower left. The guidance display icon GI1 continues to be displayed. The first volume selection icon SI1 of the exhibition volume, which started to be displayed later than the first guidance display icon GI1, is overlapped with the first guidance display icon GI1.

Subsequently, the store clerk performs a switch operation (3) for adjusting the indicator unit 190b of the first selection switch 190 to “9” shown in FIG. 63 (a).

Until now, the non-power saving mode setting was selected, but when this switch operation (3) is performed, the power saving mode setting is selected and the volume level of the 7th stage is selected. It will be in the state of being done.

FIG. 75 is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. 74. Also in FIG. 75, as in FIG. 73, time elapses from the left to the right of the figure. Further, the timing of (c) in FIG. 75 coincides with the timing of FIG. 74 (c), and the timings of (d) to (h) thereafter correspond to the timings of FIGS. 74 (d) to (h). I am doing it. Further, FIG. 75 shows a display mode of the effect image display device 157, a first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, a second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166, and a left side. Light emitting modes of various light emitting means such as a lamp 144L, a right side lamp 144R, and a backlight module 740 provided on each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also shown.

Also at the left end of the timing chart in FIG. 75, the animation (demo animation 3/5) in which the princess appears is displayed in a bright state on the production image display device 157, and the characters "volume for exhibition" are displayed. The state in which the volume selection icon SI1 and the first guidance display icon GI1 are also displayed is shown. It is also shown that the various light emitting means are lit in white.

FIG. 74 (d) is a diagram showing a state immediately after the switch operation (3) is performed, and the states shown stepwise after the figure (d) are stepwise before the figure (c). It will be shown at shorter time intervals than the shown state.

When the power saving mode is selected while the demo effect is being executed, that is, the demo animation is being displayed, the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode. In FIG. 74 (d), the power saving mode is already set, and the first effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the three reels 110 to 112 built in the first chance button 165 are respectively. The provided backlight module 740 is turned off to save power. That is, among the light emitting means that have been lit in white so far, the light emitting means other than the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 is turned off. While the power saving mode is set, only this second effect lamp continues to light in white. Further, in the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 74 (d), the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 74 (c) has the same second volume selection as the second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 64 (a). The icons SI2 are displayed overlapping.

Furthermore, if it is selected to set the power saving mode while the demo animation is displayed, the display of the demo animation starts from the beginning. That is, as described above, if the power saving mode is selected while the demo animation is displayed, the power saving mode is set. Therefore, when the power saving mode is set, the demo animation is displayed. Is started from the beginning. On the other hand, as described with reference to FIG. 72, even if the power saving mode is selected when the demo animation is not displayed, the power saving mode is not set and the demo animation is displayed. It doesn't even start from the beginning. As shown in the timing chart of FIG. 75, at the timing of FIG. 74 (d), the demo animation 3/5 is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the opening animation (demo animation 1/5) of the demo animation is played back. Is also started.

In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 74 (e), the first volume selection icon SI1 is completely replaced with the second volume selection icon SI2. In addition, the display of the demo animation 3/5 has ended, and the company logo has begun to appear slightly on the display screen that has once become white due to the start of the opening animation (demo animation 1/5). Further, the first guidance display icon GI1 has disappeared.

In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 74 (f), the company logo has appeared fairly clearly, but since the second volume selection icon SI2 overlaps, the company logo is shown in FIG. 74 (a). It is more difficult to see than the state shown. Further, at the timing of FIG. 74 (f), the display of the power saving mode setting display AI for notifying that the power saving mode is set to "power saving mode is being set" is started at the lower part of the display screen.

At the timing shown in FIG. 74 (g), the demo animation begins to darken. When the demo animation starts to darken, it becomes more difficult to see than before it starts to darken, but the visibility of the power saving mode setting display AI and the second volume selection icon SI2 does not change, and the power saving mode setting display AI and The second volume selection icon SI2 is clearly visible. That is, the brightness of the display AI during the power saving mode setting and the brightness of the second volume selection icon SI2 do not change.

At the timing shown in FIG. 74 (h), the first guidance display icon GI1 that once disappeared is redisplayed. The redisplayed first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed on the foremost layer, overlaps a part of the second volume selection icon SI2, and also overlaps with the power saving mode setting display AI. The visibility of the first guide display icon GI1 is the same as that of the first guide display icon GI1 in FIG. 74 (b), and the first guide display icon GI1 can be clearly seen. That is, the brightness of the first guidance display icon GI1 does not change either.

The power saving mode setting display AI may be displayed on the foremost layer and may overlap with a part of the first guidance display icon GI1. Alternatively, the second volume selection icon SI2 may be displayed on the foremost layer and may overlap with a part of the first guidance display icon GI1 and also with a part of the power saving mode setting display AI.

The time from when the demo animation starts to darken on the effect image display device 157 until it becomes completely dark (FIGS. 74 (g) to (h)) is the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, left. The time for the backlight modules 740 provided on the side lamps 144L, the right side lamps 144R, and the three reels 110 to 112 to be turned off at the timing of FIG. 74 (d) is longer than that. When the demo animation suddenly becomes dark, the player may think that the production image display device 157 is out of order or be surprised, but by darkening the demo animation over time in this way, the transition to the power saving mode is made. May be noticed by the player.

It should be noted that even when the store clerk performs a switch operation for adjusting the indicator unit 190b of the first selection switch 190 from "9" to "8" shown in FIG. 63 (a) during the display of the demo animation in the power saving mode. The display of the demo animation starts from the beginning. That is, if it is selected to set to the non-power saving mode while the demo animation is displayed, it is set to the non-power saving mode, and if it is set to the non-power saving mode, the demo animation is displayed from the beginning. The demo animation that was started and played dark will now play brightly. Light emitting means (first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, and three reels 110 to 112) that were turned off in the power saving mode before the demo animation became bright. The backlight module 740) provided in each starts lighting. On the other hand, even if it is selected to set from the power saving mode to the non-power saving mode when the demo animation is not displayed, the setting does not change because it is already set to the non-power saving mode, and the demo animation. The display of is not started from the beginning.

When the second chance button 166, which is lit in white, is pressed according to the first guidance display icon GI1 while the power saving mode is set, the mode returns to the non-power saving mode, the display of the demo animation ends, and the figure. The dividend table shown in 71 (a) is displayed. Also, when the left button 167 or the right button 168 is pressed according to the first guidance display icon GI1, the mode returns to the non-power saving mode, and the demo animation is changed to the non-demo animation (for example, the animation of the lord and the grandfather shown in FIG. 72). ), And the third volume selection icon SI3 described with reference to FIG. 64 (a) and FIG. 64 (a) is displayed.

Also, when the first chance button 165, which is turned off, is pressed while the power saving mode is set, the mode returns to the non-power saving mode, and the demo animation is changed to the non-demo animation (for example, the lord shown in FIG. 72). And grandfather's animation), and a certain production may be started.

FIG. 71 (b) is a diagram showing a display screen displayed when the first chance button 165 is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 74 (h).

In the state shown in FIG. 74 (h), the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed on the display screen of the effect image display device 157. As described above, the first guidance display icon GI1 does not include the display of the first chance button 165, and the first guidance display icon GI1 is not a display relating to the first chance button 165. Further, since the power saving mode is executed, the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 is turned off. In this state, not only is it not promoting the pressing of the first chance button 165, but there is no suggestion regarding the first chance button 165. Nevertheless, when the first chance button 165 is operated, the setting suggestion display of the slot machine 100 is displayed as the above-mentioned effect. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 58, set values having different degrees of advantage for the player are set. Settings 1 to 6 are prepared as setting values. The higher the set value, the higher the advantage of the player tends to be. The player usually cannot know this set value, but as shown in FIG. 71 (b), a setting suggestion display may be displayed. If only the character of the lord is displayed, it suggests an odd number (settings 1, 3, 5). If only the grandfather's character is displayed, it suggests an even number (settings 2, 4, and 6). If only the princess character is displayed, it suggests that the setting is 3 or higher. If both the lord and princess characters are displayed, it suggests that setting 5 or setting 6. When such a setting suggestion display is performed, the first chance button 165 corresponds to a hidden button.

Even if the first chance button 165 is pressed in the state of FIGS. 74 (d) to 74 (g) before the first guide display icon GI1 is displayed, the setting suggestion display is displayed on the effect image display device 157. On the contrary, in the state of FIGS. 74 (d) to 74 (g), even if the first chance button 165 is pressed, the setting suggestion display is not displayed on the effect image display device 157. You may do it. Further, whether or not the setting suggestion display is displayed may be determined by a lottery when the first chance button 165 is pressed, or may be determined by the pressing timing.

FIG. 76 shows the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when the front door 102 is opened and the power saving mode is selected without pressing the open / close piece while the demo animation is displayed. It is a figure which shows step by step.

The example shown in FIG. 76 is an example while the error notification of the door opening error is performed. Hereinafter, the differences from the example shown in FIG. 74 in which the error notification of the door opening error is stopped will be mainly described.

In the example shown in FIG. 76, a clerk at a game store opens the front door 102 before the demo animation starts. At this time, the clerk of the game store opens the front door 102 without pressing the opening / closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 is opened, so that the error notification of the door opening error is started. That is, the effect image display device 157 displays an error display of a door opening error by displaying characters such as "door is opening", and a door opening error such as "door is open" is displayed from the upper speaker 272 (not shown in FIG. 76). Error notification sound is repeatedly output.

In FIG. 76 (a), the demo effect is started, and the display of the opening animation (demo animation 1/5) is started on the effect image display device 157. At the upper left of the display screen of the effect image display device 157, an error display EI1 of a door opening error due to a character display such as "door opening" is displayed. This error display EI1 is displayed on the foremost layer and continues to be displayed until the front door 102 is closed.

Further, in the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. 76 (a), the built-in first effect lamp is lit in red, and the right side lamp 144R is also lit in red in conjunction with the first effect lamp. .. On the other hand, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 is lit in white. The left side lamp 144L is also lit in white. Further, the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 63) provided on each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also lit in white, and the three reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 76 (a) are illuminated in white. ..

The store clerk performs the switch operation (1) of the first selection switch 190, and as shown in FIG. 76 (b), the effect image display device 157 displaying the demo animation in which the lord appears is "volume 7". The first volume selection icon SI1 in which the characters "/ 7" are displayed is displayed. Further, in the lower left, the display of the first guidance display icon GI1 is started.

Next, the store clerk performs the switch operation (2) of the first selection switch 190, and as shown in FIG. 76 (c), the effect image display device 157 on which the demo animation in which the princess appears is displayed. The first volume selection icon SI1 in which the characters "volume for exhibition" are displayed is displayed. Further, the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed in the lower left.

Subsequently, the store clerk performs the switch operation (3) of the first selection switch 190, and the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode. In FIG. 76 (d), the power saving mode is already set, but only the backlight module 740 provided on each of the three reels 110 to 112 is turned off. That is, the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 is still lit in red, and the right side lamp 144R is also lit in red. Further, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 is still lit in white, and the left side lamp 144L is also lit in white. The light-off state of the backlight module 740 continues until the setting of the power saving mode is completed.

In addition, the display of the demo animation is started from the beginning, and while the demo animation 3/5 in which the princess appears is displayed, the opening animation (demo animation 1/5) of the demo animation is also started to be played. Further, in the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 76 (d), the second volume selection icon SI2 is displayed overlapping with the first volume selection icon SI1. Even if the power saving mode is set, the error display EI1 remains displayed. The following is the same as the example shown in FIG. 74 except that the mode of various light emitting means and the error display EI1 are continuously displayed, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

Also in this example, during the display of the demo animation in the power saving mode, the clerk performed a switch operation to adjust the indicator unit 190b of the first selection switch 190 from "9" to "8" shown in FIG. 63 (a). Even in this case, the display of the demo animation starts from the beginning. That is, if it is selected to set to the non-power saving mode while the demo animation is displayed, it is set to the non-power saving mode, and if it is set to the non-power saving mode, the demo animation is displayed from the beginning. The demo animation that was started and played dark will now play brightly. Light emitting means (first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, and three reels 110 to 112) that were turned off in the power saving mode before the demo animation became bright. The backlight module 740) provided in each starts lighting. On the other hand, even if it is selected to set from the power saving mode to the non-power saving mode when the demo animation is not displayed, the setting does not change because it is already set to the non-power saving mode, and the demo animation. The display of is not started from the beginning.

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing step by step the state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when the power saving mode is selected while the hopper empty error is still generated.

A motor-driven medal ejection device 180 (see FIG. 60) is provided inside the slot machine 100, and during the medal payout operation, the game medals in the bucket are lost and the medal payout sensor has passed a predetermined first time. If it does not turn on even if it does not turn on and recovery cannot be performed even if the recovery process of rotating the motor in the reverse direction is performed, a hopper empty error is notified. For an empty hopper error, open the front door 102 to replenish the bucket with medals and press the reset button provided inside the slot machine 100, or close the front door 102 and press the key inserted in the key hole 140 to the left. The error is canceled by turning to.

FIG. 77A is a diagram showing a state in which a hopper empty error has occurred. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 77 (a), the error notification is displayed in the background display of the error notification (background display of the diagonal hatching). That is, the error display EI2 that cannot identify the error that occurred, such as "error occurred", and the error display EI3 that explains how to cancel the hopper empty error, such as "please replenish the medals and then press the reset switch". It is displayed. In addition, an error display indicating an instruction to the player such as "Please call a clerk" may be displayed.

Further, in the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. 77 (a), the built-in first effect lamp is lit in red, and the right side lamp 144R is also lit in red in conjunction with the first effect lamp. .. On the other hand, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 is turned off. Further, the left side lamp 144L is lit in white. Further, the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 63) provided on each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also lit in white, and the three reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 77 (a) are illuminated in white. ..

The clerk of the game store opens the front door 102 without pressing the opening / closing piece, and performs the switch operation (1) in which the instruction unit 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to “7” shown in FIG. 63 (a). Since the effect image display device 157 displays an error display EI2 such as "error has occurred", the error notification of the door opening error is also used for this error display EI2, and the characters such as "door opening" shown in FIG. 76 are also used. The error display EI of the door opening error by the display is not displayed. In addition, the error notification sound of the door opening error such as "the door is open" is not output. It should be noted that an error notification sound indicating an instruction to the player such as "please replenish medals" may be output. Alternatively, the error display EI of the door opening error may be displayed, or the error notification sound of the door opening error may be output.

As a result of the switch operation (1) of the first selection switch 190 being performed by the store clerk, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), the effect image display device 157 on which the background display of the error notification is displayed is "volume". The first volume selection icon SI1 on which the characters "7/7" are displayed overlaps with the error display EI2 such as "error has occurred". The first volume selection icon SI1 may be displayed on the foremost layer, and if an error display indicating an instruction to the player such as "Call a clerk" is also performed, this error display is performed. It is also displayed overlapping. Alternatively, the error display EI3 explaining how to cancel the hopper empty error may be displayed on the foremost layer.

Next, the store clerk performs the switch operation (2) of the first selection switch 190, and as shown in FIG. 77 (c), the effect image display device 157 in which the background display of the error notification is still displayed is "exhibited. The first volume selection icon SI1 in which the characters "Meeting volume" are displayed is displayed.

Subsequently, the store clerk performs the switch operation (3) of the first selection switch 190, selects the setting of the power saving mode, and sets the volume level to the state in which the volume level of the seventh stage is selected. However, since the state shown in FIG. 77 (d) is not the state in which the demo effect is being executed, the power saving mode is not set and the display of the demo animation is not started from the beginning. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 77 (d), the second volume selection icon SI2 in which the characters "power saving mode" are displayed instead of the first volume selection icon SI1 causes an error such as "an error has occurred". It is displayed overlapping with the display EI2.

Further, in FIG. 77 (d), there is no change in the mode of the various light emitting means, and only the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 remains extinguished.

In the above description, the power saving mode is not set unless the demo effect is executed, but if the power saving mode setting is selected, the game is being performed. However, the power saving mode may be set.

In addition, when the power saving mode is set, the animation is played in a dark state to save power, and the first effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, which are built in the first chance button 165, are shown in the figure. Although power is saved by turning off the backlight module 740 shown in 63, power saving may be performed in other devices as well. For example, when the power saving mode is set, the output sound from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 may be lowered, the effect movable body may be immovable, or the movement may be restricted. Alternatively, the brightness of the entire display screen of the effect image display device 157 may be reduced, not limited to the reproduction of the animation. Further, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 may also be turned off. Further, the light emitting means such as the first effect lamp, the second effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 are not completely turned off, but the brightness (light amount) is reduced. Even in a dimmed state, it leads to power saving.

Further, the timing for starting power saving is the first effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, the backlight module 740 (timing of FIG. 74 (d)), and the effect image display device 157 (FIG. 74 (FIG. 74). Although it differs depending on the timing) of g), power saving is started first by the first effect lamp, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740, and later by the right side lamp 144R and the effect image display device 157. You may want to start saving electricity. Further, in addition to the effect image display device 157, a second effect image display device having a small display screen is provided, and the second effect image display device starts power saving first, and then the effect image display device 157 starts power saving. You may do so. Further, the combination of the light emitting means and the sound output means, the combination of the effect movable body and the display means, the combination of the light emitting means and the effect movable body, the combination of the effect movable body and the sound output means, the combination of the display means and the sound output means, etc. The timing for starting power saving may be different.

Further, although the brightness (light amount) of various lamps could not be selected by the operation of the first selection switch 190, the brightness (light amount) level of various lamps is also the brightness (light amount) level of various lamps of the first selection switch 190 as well as the volume level. It may be possible to select by operation.

Subsequently, the operation effect in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 58 will be described.

FIG. 78 is a diagram showing two examples of operation effects.

FIG. 78 shows an effect image display device 157, a first chance button 165, a second chance button 166, a left button 167, and a right button 168. The first effect lamp built into the first chance button 165 can display the emission display of the seven colors (red, orange,?, Green, blue, indigo, purple) that make up the rainbow, and is white. The light emission display can also be displayed. This white emission display becomes the default emission display of the first chance button 165. Like the first effect lamp, the second effect lamp built into the second chance button 166 can display the light emission display of the seven colors constituting the rainbow, and also has a white light emission display as the default light emission display. It can be displayed. The second chance button 165 may be configured to display only white light emission (default light emission display).

In the state shown on the left side of FIG. 78 (a), the operation effect is started. This operation effect is an effect started after the end of the game, and is an effect executed only during the period when the game is not performed. That is, the operation effect is an effect that is started when the third stop operation is performed and all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and when the start lever 135 is operated, the operation effect ends even if it is in the middle, and the game is played. Is started. The operation effect may be an effect that is continuously executed from the time of the game (during reel rotation), or may be an effect that is continuously executed even if the game is started, or may be an effect that is continuously executed during the game (during reel rotation). ) May be performed only.

In the first chance button 165 shown on the left side of FIG. 78 (a), the built-in first effect lamp is lit in a third color (for example, red), and a light emission display of the third color is displayed. On the production image display device 157, an animation in which the lord sits on the upper seat and the old man is reading a letter (hereinafter, this animation is referred to as "large hall animation") is displayed, so that it overlaps with this large hall animation. The first operation promotion display HD1 prompting the operation of the first chance button 165 is displayed. Here, the first operation promotion display HD1 is composed of a character display LD1 such as pressing the first chance button 165 and a first button display 165D representing the first chance button 165. The first button display 165D is a display representing the first chance button 165 displaying the light emission display of the third color, and is displayed in the same state as the actual first chance button 165.

The start timing of the operation effect may be the timing at which the light emission display of the first chance button 165 changes, or the timing at which the display of the first operation promotion display HD1 is started. The timing at which the light emission display of the first chance button 165 changes and the timing at which the display of the first operation promotion display HD1 starts may be the same timing, but the light emission display of the first chance button 165 changes. The timing may be earlier. Since the timing at which the light emission display changes is earlier, the player's attention is attracted to the first chance button 165, and the change in the light emission display functions as a warning that the first operation promotion display HD1 is performed. However, the timing at which the light emission display of the first chance button 165 changes may be later.

When the first chance button 165 was operated while the first operation promotion display HD1 was being displayed, the first chance button 165 was operated on the effect image display device 157 as shown on the right side of FIG. 78 (a). The operation result display (response display) displayed in response to the above is displayed. The operation result display will be described in detail later, but here, the operation result display RD20 of the suggestion display is displayed. The operation result display RD20 of the suggestion display is a display suggesting the degree of expectation by the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the character display RD22 of the lord, and the frame display RD21 here is the first color (for example, yellow). .. Further, on the operated first chance button 165, the light emission display of the third color (for example, red) is continuously displayed. That is, the display mode has not changed after the operation.

Also in the first chance button 165 shown on the left side of FIG. 78 (b), the built-in first effect lamp lights up in the third color (for example, red) in the same manner as in FIG. The light emission display is displayed. Further, as in FIG. 78 (a), the effect image display device 157 includes a first operation promotion display including a first button display 165D representing a first chance button 165 displaying a light emission display of a third color. HD1 is displayed.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation promotion display HD1 is being displayed, the effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of FIG. 78 (b) also has the first color as in the figure (a). The operation result display RD20 of the suggestion display including the frame display RD21 (for example, yellow) is displayed. On the other hand, in this example, the operated first chance button 165 is turned off, and the emission display of the third color (for example, red) is finished.

The first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed over a predetermined time, and even if the operation of the first chance button 165 is not performed within the predetermined time, the operation result display is displayed after the predetermined time has elapsed. Is displayed. That is, the operation result display is a display that is displayed regardless of whether the first chance button 165 is operated or not, but if the first chance button 165 is operated at an early timing, the operation result display can be displayed at an early timing. You can start the next game after seeing it. If the operation of the first chance button 165 is not performed within a predetermined time, the operation result display may not be displayed.

Subsequently, a characteristic operation effect in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 58 will be described.

FIG. 79 is a table summarizing the outline of the characteristic operation effect in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 58.

There are two types of characteristic operation effects described here, depending on the type of operation result display. One is the first operation effect, and when the first chance button 165 is operated during the display of the first operation promotion display HD1, the operation result display for notifying the number of AT-added games is displayed. The other is the second operation effect, and when the first chance button 165 is operated during the display of the first operation promotion display HD1, the operation result display of the suggestion display is displayed.

In both the first operation effect and the second operation effect, the light emission display of the first chance button 165 before the operation, the light emission display of the first chance button 165 after the operation, and the frame included in the operation result display. There are multiple patterns of display color combinations.

FIG. 79A is a table summarizing the patterns when the first chance button 165 before the operation displays the light emission display of the third color (for example, red) in the first operation effect. (B) is a table summarizing the patterns when the first chance button 165 before the operation displays the light emission display of the fourth color (for example, rainbow color) in the first operation effect. The rainbow color may be a mode in which the display color is continuously changed one by one to display each of the seven colors constituting the rainbow, or the seven colors constituting the rainbow are displayed at one time. The mode may be displayed by dividing the area.

In the first operation effect, the effect image display device 157 displays the first operation promotion display HD1 that prompts the operation of the first chance button 165, but the operation result is displayed even if the second chance button 166 is operated. May be displayed. That is, both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 may be operation valid buttons. The second chance button 166 is in a state where the default fifth color (for example, white) emission display is displayed, but like the first chance button 165, the third color (for example, red) emission display or It may be displayed in a fourth color (for example, rainbow color). Alternatively, the operation of the second chance button 166 is also valid only when the second chance button 166 displays the emission display of the third color (for example, red) or the emission display of the fourth color (for example, rainbow color). It may be a button.

The state in which the first chance button 165 before the operation displays the emission display of the third color (for example, red) is the same as the state shown on the left side of FIGS. 78A and 78B. Further, in the first operation effect, the first chance button 165 before the operation may display a light emission display of a fourth color (for example, a rainbow color). In either state, the effect image display device 157 displays the same first operation promotion display HD1 as the first operation promotion display HD1 shown in FIG. 78 (a), and during the display of the first operation promotion display HD1. When the first chance button 165 is operated, the effect image display device 157 displays an operation result display for notifying the number of AT-added games. As shown in the tables of FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b), the color of the frame display in this operation result display differs depending on the number of AT-added games. Further, the first chance button 165 after the operation changes to the emission display of the same color as the frame display color in the operation result display.

When both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operation valid buttons, the first chance button 165 is operated even when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165. However, the color of the frame display in the operation result display is changed to the same color as the light emission display, and the second chance button 166 may be the same light emission display as the light emission display before the operation, or may be the first chance button 165. Similarly, the color of the frame display in the operation result display may be changed to the same color as the light emission display. Alternatively, only when the second chance button 166 is operated, the color may be changed to the emission display of the same color as the frame display color in the operation result display.

Even if the first chance button 165 before the operation displays the emission display of the third color (for example, red) (the table shown in FIG. 79 (a)), the fourth color (for example, rainbow color) is displayed. ) Is displayed (table shown in FIG. 79 (b)), but the color of the frame display in the operation result display is displayed in the fourth color (for example, rainbow color). Only when the second chance button 166 is pressed, the operation result display is not displayed, and the operation result display is not displayed unless the first chance button 165 is pressed. The number of AT additional games is determined in advance by a lottery before the first operation effect is started, and the content of the operation result display for notifying the number of AT additional games is determined based on the lottery result. It is also decided whether or not to make the second chance button 166 an operation valid button. When the color of the frame display in the operation result display is displayed in the fourth color (for example, rainbow color), the operation of the second chance button 166 is controlledly accepted, but the operation result display is not displayed. Alternatively, the operation itself of the second chance button 166 may not be accepted in a controlled manner.

FIG. 79 (c) is a table summarizing the patterns when the first chance button 165 before the operation displays the light emission display of the third color (for example, red) in the second operation effect. (D) is a table summarizing the patterns when the first chance button 165 before the operation displays the light emission display of the fourth color (for example, rainbow color) in the second operation effect.

Even in the second operation effect, the effect image display device 157 displays the first operation promotion display HD1 for prompting the operation of the first chance button 165, but the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 Both may be operation enable buttons. The second chance button 166 is in a state where the default fifth color (for example, white) emission display is displayed, but like the first chance button 165, the third color (for example, red) emission display or It may be displayed in a fourth color (for example, rainbow color). Alternatively, the operation of the second chance button 166 is also valid only when the second chance button 166 displays the emission display of the third color (for example, red) or the emission display of the fourth color (for example, rainbow color). It may be a button.

Also in the second operation effect, before the operation of the first chance button 165, the effect image display device 157 displays the same first operation promotion display HD1 as the first operation promotion display HD1 shown in FIG. 78 (a). There is. In the second operation effect, when the first chance button 165 is operated during the display of the first operation promotion display HD1, the effect image display device 157 displays the operation result display (see FIG. 78) of the suggestion display. To. As shown in the tables of FIGS. 79 (c) and 79 (d), the color of the frame display in this operation result display differs depending on the degree of expectation (reliability) of the suggestion display. Further, also in the second operation effect, the first chance button 165 after the operation changes to the emission display of the same color as the frame display color in the operation result display.

Further, in the second operation effect, when both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operation valid buttons, the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165. However, the first chance button 165 may change to a light emission display having a color common to the frame display color in the operation result display, and the second chance button 166 may have the same light emission display as the light emission display before the operation. Then, as with the first chance button 165, the color may be changed to a light emission display having the same color as the frame display color in the operation result display. Alternatively, only when the second chance button 166 is operated, the color may be changed to the emission display of the same color as the frame display color in the operation result display.

Further, even when the first chance button 165 before the operation displays the emission display of the third color (for example, red) (the table shown in FIG. 79 (c)), the fourth color (for example, red) is displayed. Even when the emission display of (rainbow color) is displayed (table shown in FIG. 79 (d)), the color of the frame display in the operation result display of the suggestion display is the fourth color (for example, rainbow color). Only when the second chance button 166 is pressed, the operation result display of the suggestion display is not displayed, and the operation result display of the suggestion display is not displayed unless the first chance button 165 is pressed. The result for the expected degree (reliability) of the suggestion display (details will be described later, but whether or not to shift to the AT state) is determined in advance by the lottery before the start of the second operation effect, and the lottery result. In response to this, the degree of expectation (reliability) of the suggestion display is determined, and whether or not the second chance button 166 is used as the operation valid button is also determined. When the color of the frame display in the operation result display of the suggestion display is displayed in the fourth color (for example, rainbow color), the operation of the second chance button 166 is controlledly accepted, but the operation result display of the suggestion display is displayed. The mode may not be displayed, or the mode itself may not be controlledly accepted for the operation of the second chance button 166.

In both the first operation effect and the second operation effect, the light emission display before the operation of the first chance button 165 is the light emission of the first color, the second color, the fifth color, and other colors. The display may be used, and the color of the frame display and the color of the light emission display of the first chance button 165 after the operation may be other colors.

In addition, the first operation effect and the second operation effect may occur at the same time. In this case, both the operation result display for notifying the number of AT-added games and the operation result display of the suggestion display are displayed, and the color of the light emission display of the first chance button 165 after the operation is the operation result display of the suggestion display. It will be the same color as the frame display color. It should be noted that the color may be the same as the color of the frame display in the operation result display for notifying the number of additional games.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a color relationship in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 58.

In FIG. 80, the light emission display mode of the first chance button 165 is shown in a vertical row on the left side.

The vertical column on the left side shows the state of the light emission display of the first chance button 165.

The vertical column in the center shows the display mode of the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games. For example, + 25G displayed on the AT additional game number display RD12 indicates that the number of games for which the AT state is maintained has been increased by 25 games. The color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the AT additional game number display RD12 is a color corresponding to the number of additional games in which the AT state is maintained. The color of the frame display RD11 may indicate the reliability of other benefits. For example, in the case of a game in which points are accumulated, the color of the frame display RD 11 may be a color corresponding to the number of points.

The vertical column on the right side shows the display mode of the operation result display RD20 of the suggestion display. What is suggested here is the degree of expectation (reliability) in which the player is given a privilege (AT state in this example). By displaying the character display RD22 of the lord inside the frame display RD21, the effect of fortune-telling whether or not to shift to the state where the above privilege is given (in this example, when winning, the state shifts to the state where the above privilege is given). It is confirmed that the battle production will start, and the color of the frame display RD21 is the degree of expectation (in this example, the degree of expectation (reliability) to win in the battle production) to shift to the state where the above benefits are given. ). In this sense, the operation result display RD20 of the suggestion display also corresponds to the display relating to the player's privilege. In addition, the operation result display RD20 of the suggestion display is also a notice display that the effect of fortune-telling whether or not to shift to the state where the above privilege is given is started and a notice display that the effect is started in the next game. Furthermore, it also corresponds to a notice display that the player will be given a privilege, or a notice display that the player will win in the battle production. The privilege given to the player may be a big bonus or the like in addition to the AT state. Further, instead of the character display RD22 of the lord, the character display of the princess or the character display of the grandfather may be displayed. In the case of the princess character display, there is a 50% probability that the effect of deciding whether or not to shift to the state where the above benefits are granted will be started, and the color of the frame display RD21 is also a color corresponding to that probability (for example). , The first color), and in the case of the grandfather's character display, there is a 0% probability that the effect of deciding whether or not to shift to the state where the above privilege is given is started, and the color of the frame display RD21. May be a color according to the probability (for example, a fifth color).

In FIGS. 78 to 86, the state in which the first chance button 165 is turned off is represented by a plain state without hatching.

Further, in FIGS. 78 to 86, the fifth color (for example, white) is represented by vertical hatching. This fifth color corresponds to the color of the default emission display on the first chance button 165. Further, in the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT added games, the fifth color is displayed as the color of the frame display RD11, which corresponds to the color indicating that the number of games for which the AT state is maintained is 25 games added. do. Further, the fifth color corresponds to a color suggesting that the expectation level (reliability) is 0% in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestion display. That is, the fifth color corresponds to a color indicating that the expectation of transition to the AT state is 0% or the reliability as a notice of transition to the AT state is 0%. It corresponds to a color that suggests that it will never shift.

Further, in FIGS. 78 to 86, the first color (for example, yellow) is represented by hatching facing diagonally downward to the left. This first color corresponds to the color of the first emission display in the first chance button 165. Further, in the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT added games, the first color is displayed as the color of the frame display RD11, which corresponds to the color indicating that the number of games for which the AT state is maintained is 50 games added. do. Further, the first color corresponds to a color suggesting that the expectation degree (reliability) is 25% in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestion display. That is, the first color corresponds to a color indicating that the expectation of transition to the AT state is 25%, or the reliability as a notice of transition to the AT state is 25%.

Further, in FIGS. 78 to 86, the second color (for example, blue) is represented by hatching facing diagonally downward to the right. This second color corresponds to the color of the second emission display in the first chance button 165. Further, in the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT added games, the second color is displayed as the color of the frame display RD11, which corresponds to the color indicating that the number of games for which the AT state is maintained is 100 games added. do. Further, the second color corresponds to a color suggesting that the expectation degree (reliability) is 50% in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestion display. That is, the second color corresponds to a color indicating that the expectation of transition to the AT state is 50%, or the reliability as a notice of transition to the AT state is 50%.

Further, in FIGS. 78 to 86, the third color (for example, red) is represented by diagonal cross-hatching. This third color corresponds to the color of the third emission display on the first chance button 165. Further, in the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT added games, the third color is displayed as the color of the frame display RD11, which corresponds to the color indicating that the number of games for which the AT state is maintained is 300 games added. do. Further, the third color corresponds to a color suggesting that the expectation degree (reliability) is 75% in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestion display. That is, the third color corresponds to a color indicating that the expectation of transition to the AT state is 75%, or the reliability as a notice of transition to the AT state is 75%.

Further, in FIGS. 78 to 86, the fourth color (for example, rainbow color) is represented by cross-hatching of vertical lines and horizontal lines. This fourth color corresponds to the color of the fourth emission display on the first chance button 165. Further, in the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT added games, the fourth color is displayed as the color of the frame display RD11, which corresponds to the color indicating that the number of games for which the AT state is maintained is 500 games added. do. Further, the fourth color corresponds to a color suggesting that the expectation level (reliability) is 100% in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestion display. That is, the third color corresponds to a color indicating that the expectation of transition to the AT state is 100%, or the reliability as a notice of transition to the AT state is 100%, and the AT state is always in effect. Corresponds to the color that suggests a transition.

In the explanation here, it has been explained that the degree of expectation (reliability) that the player is given the privilege differs depending on the color, but the fifth color, the first color, the second color, It may be suggested that the player's advantage is increased or the expectation (reliability) of various notices is increased in the order of description such as the third color and the fourth color.

FIG. 81 is a diagram specifically showing some examples of the first operation effect 1 described with reference to FIG. 79 (a). Also in FIG. 81, as in FIG. 78, the effect image display device 157, the first chance button 165, the second chance button 166, the left button 167, and the right button 168 are shown (FIGS. 82 to 86). Same as above).

The state shown on the left side in each of FIGS. 81 (a) to 81 (c) is a state in which the operation effect is started after the game is completed. On the first chance button 165, a light emission display of a third color (for example, red) is displayed. A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap with the large hall animation. The first operation promotion display HD1 here also has a character display LD1 such as pressing the first chance button 165 and a first chance button 165 displaying a light emission display of a third color, as in the example shown in FIG. It is composed of the first button display 165D represented.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation promotion display HD1 is being displayed, the state shown on the right side in each of FIGS. 81 (a) to 81 (c) is obtained. In the state shown on the right side in each figure, the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Further, the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is changed from the light emission display before the operation. The light emission display of the first chance button 165 changes before the operation result display RD10 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (the same applies to the following examples). By doing so, the display mode of the operation result display RD10 can be suggested in advance by the light emission display of the first chance button 165.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 81 (a), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the + 50G character display is displayed in the first color (for example, yellow), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is the third. The color (eg red) is changing to the first color. When the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is also obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 81 (b), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the + 100G character display is displayed in the second color (for example, blue), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is the third. It is changing from a color (eg red) to a second color. When the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is also obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 81 (c), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the + 500G character display is displayed in the fourth color (for example, rainbow color), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is the third. The color of (for example, red) is changing to the fourth color. When the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the operation result display RD10 is not displayed and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 also changes, unlike the previous examples. do not do.

As described above, the light emission display of the first chance button 165 after the operation is a light emission display related to the operation result display of the first chance button 165, and the first chance button 165 is also viewed after the operation. By doing so, it may be possible to obtain information according to the operation. Further, in the effect image display device 157, various images may be displayed at the same time or various display colors may be used at the same time, so that the effect represented by the display screen may be difficult for the player to understand. In some cases, the effect represented by the light emission display of the 1 chance button 165 is easier for the player to understand. Furthermore, since the light emission display of the first chance button 165 after the operation and the operation result display of the first chance button 165 are related displays, a cohesive effect is developed, and the player also produces the effect in this respect. It will be easier to understand.

FIG. 82 is a diagram specifically showing some examples of the first operation effect 2 described with reference to FIG. 79 (b).

The state shown on the left side in each of FIGS. 82 (a) to 82 (c) is a state in which the operation effect is started after the game is completed. On the first chance button 165, a light emission display of a fourth color (for example, rainbow color) is displayed. A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap with the large hall animation. The first operation promotion display HD1 here is from the character display LD1 such as pressing the first chance button 165 and the first button display 165D representing the first chance button 165 displaying the emission display of the fourth color. It is configured.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation promotion display HD1 is being displayed, the state shown on the right side in each of FIGS. 82 (a) to 82 (c) is obtained. In the state shown on the right side in each figure, the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 82 (a), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the + 25G character display is displayed in the fifth color (for example, white), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is the fourth. It is changing from a color (eg, iridescent) to a fifth color. When the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is also obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 82 (b), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the + 300G character display is displayed in the third color (for example, red), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is the fourth. It is changing from a color (eg, iridescent) to a third color. When the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is also obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 82 (c), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the + 500G character display is displayed in the fourth color (for example, rainbow color), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is the fourth. It remains displayed in the color of. When the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the operation result display RD10 is not displayed unlike the previous examples.

FIG. 83 is a diagram specifically showing some examples of the second operation effect 1 described with reference to FIG. 79 (c).

The state shown on the left side in each of FIGS. 83 (a) to 83 (c) is a state in which the operation effect is started after the game is completed. On the first chance button 165, a light emission display of a third color (for example, red) is displayed. A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap with the large hall animation. The first operation promotion display HD1 here also has a character display LD1 such as pressing the first chance button 165 and a first chance button 165 displaying a light emission display of a third color, as in the example shown in FIG. It is composed of the first button display 165D represented.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation promotion display HD1 is being displayed, the state shown on the right side in each of FIGS. 83 (a) to 83 (c) is obtained. In the state shown on the right side in each figure, the operation result display RD20 for suggestion display is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Further, the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is changed from the light emission display before the operation.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 83A, the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the character display RD22 of the lord is displayed in the first color (for example, yellow), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is the third. The color of (for example, red) is changing to the first color. When the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is also obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 83 (b), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the character display RD22 of the lord is displayed in the second color (for example, blue), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is the third. The color of (for example, red) is changing to the second color. When the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is also obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 83 (c), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the character display RD22 of the lord is displayed in the fourth color (for example, rainbow color), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed. It has changed from three colors (eg red) to a fourth color. When the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the operation result display RD20 is not displayed and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 also changes, unlike the previous examples. do not do.

FIG. 84 is a diagram specifically showing some examples of the second operation effect 2 described with reference to FIG. 79 (d).

The state shown on the left side in each of FIGS. 84 (a) to 84 (c) is a state in which the operation effect is started after the game is completed. On the first chance button 165, a light emission display of a fourth color (for example, rainbow color) is displayed. A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap with the large hall animation. As in the example shown in FIG. 82, the first operation promotion display HD1 here includes a character display LD1 such as pressing the first chance button 165 and a first chance button 165 displaying a fourth color emission display. It is composed of the first button display 165D represented.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation promotion display HD1 is being displayed, the state shown on the right side in each of FIGS. 84 (a) to 84 (c) is obtained. In the state shown on the right side in each figure, the operation result display RD20 for suggestion display is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 84 (a), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the character display RD22 of the lord is displayed in the fifth color (for example, white), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the fourth. The color of (for example, rainbow color) is changing to the fifth color. When the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is also obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 84 (b), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the character display RD22 of the lord is displayed in a third color (for example, red), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the fourth. The color of (for example, iridescent) has changed to a third color. When the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is also obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 84 (c), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the character display RD22 of the lord is displayed in the fourth color (for example, rainbow color), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is the first. It remains displayed in four colors. When the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the operation result display RD20 is not displayed unlike the previous examples.

Further, another example of the operation effect will be described.

FIG. 85 is a diagram showing another example of the operation effect.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 85A is a state in which the operation effect is started after the game is completed. On the first chance button 165, a light emission display of a third color (for example, red) is displayed. A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap with the large hall animation. As in the example shown in FIG. 81, the first operation promotion display HD1 here also has a character display LD1 such as pressing the first chance button 165 and a first chance button 165 displaying a light emission display of a third color. It is composed of a first button display 165D representing.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation promotion display HD1 is being displayed, the light emission display of the first chance button 165 emits light of a third color as shown on the right side of FIG. 85 (a). The display has changed to a light emission display of the first color (for example, yellow). Further, an operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games is displayed in the central portion of the display screen of the effect image display device 157. The operation result display RD10 has the same size as the operation result display RD10 described so far, and the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the + 100G AT additional game number display RD12 is the color of the light emission display of the first chance button 165. Unlike, it is displayed in a second color (eg, blue). On the other hand, the operation result display RD20 of the suggestion display is also displayed at the lower right of the display screen. The operation result display RD20 of the suggestion display displayed in the lower right is smaller than the operation result display RD20 described so far and is reduced in size, but the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the character display RD22 of the lord is the first. It is displayed in the same first color as the color of the light emission display of the chance button 165. That is, although the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games is displayed with priority over the operation result display RD20 for the reduced suggestion display, the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed. The operation result display RD20 of the suggestion display has priority over the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games, and is displayed in the same color as the frame display RD21 in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestion display. As described above, although the operation result display RD10 and the operation result display RD20 have different priorities, the operation result display RD10 and the operation result display RD20 may be displayed at the same time. When the operation result display RD10 and the operation result display RD20 are displayed at the same time, the battle effect is started when the next game is started, and the right to win the battle effect and shift to the AT state is stocked. That is, even if 100 games are added and the end condition of the AT state is satisfied, the game shifts to the AT state again by the stocked right. It should be noted that the battle effect is not started when the next game is started, but the battle effect is started when the end condition of the AT state is satisfied (for example, when the added 100 games are digested), and the battle is started. There may be a case where the player wins the production and shifts to the AT state again.

Further, as in this example, the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the same color as the color of the frame display RD21 in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestion display, and also the light emission display of the first color and the first. The two-color emission display may be displayed alternately. Alternatively, half of the light emitting region may be displayed in the first color and the other half may be displayed in the second color. Further, the area of the light emitting region may be larger for the priority color. For example, the first color may be displayed in the light emitting region of 3/4, and the second color may be displayed in the light emitting region of 1/4.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 85 (b) is also the same as the state shown on the left side of FIG. 85 (a), and the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation promotion display HD1 is being displayed. Then, as shown on the right side of FIG. 85 (b), the light emission display of the first chance button 165 changes from the light emission display of the third color to the light emission display of the first color (for example, yellow). Further, the effect image display device 157 displays the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games, but does not display the operation result display RD20 for suggestion display. In the operation result display RD10 shown on the right side of FIG. 85B, the color of the frame display RD11 is a second color (for example, blue) different from the color of the light emission display of the first chance button 165. In this example, as a result of the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games being displayed with priority over the operation result display RD20 for the suggestion display, the frame display RD21 is the suggestion display displayed in the first color. The display of the operation result display RD20 is hidden. According to the homepage of the game console manufacturer that introduces this slot machine 100 and the strategy guide, the color of the light emission display of the first chance button 165 does not match the color of the frame display of the operation result display displayed on the effect image display device 157. In this case, the player who knows that the operation result display of the frame display of the same color as the color of the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is hidden, the frame display RD21 is the first color. It can be inferred that the operation result display RD20 of the displayed suggestion display is hidden, and the interest of the game may be improved. In addition, when there are three or more types of operation result display, the player does not know which type of operation result display is hidden, and the desired type of operation result display is hidden. In some cases, the interest of the game may be improved in anticipation of. Alternatively, it may not always be hidden. In this case, the color of the light emission display of the first chance button 165 and the operation result display displayed on the effect image display device 157 are displayed. It is possible that the colors of the frame display will not match, and the player does not know whether it is hidden or not, and this is also the interest of the game in the hope that the operation result display will be hidden. May improve.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 85 (c) is also the same as the state shown on the left side of FIG. 85 (a), and the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation promotion display HD1 is being displayed. Then, as shown on the right side of FIG. 85 (c), the light emission display of the first chance button 165 changes from the light emission display of the third color to the light emission display of the first color (for example, yellow). Further, the effect image display device 157 displays the operation result display RD20 for suggestion display, but does not display the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games. In the operation result display RD20 shown on the right side of FIG. 85C, the color of the frame display RD21 is a second color (for example, blue) different from the color of the light emission display of the first chance button 165. In this example, contrary to the previous example, the operation result display RD20 of the suggestion display is displayed with priority over the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games, and as a result, the frame display RD11 is the first. The display of the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT additional games displayed in color is hidden. According to the homepage of the game console manufacturer that introduces this slot machine 100 and the strategy guide, the color of the light emission display of the first chance button 165 does not match the color of the frame display of the operation result display displayed on the effect image display device 157. In this case, the player who knows that the operation result display of the frame display of the same color as the color of the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is hidden, the frame display RD11 is the first color. It can be inferred that the operation result display RD10 for notifying the displayed number of AT additional games is hidden, and the interest of the game may be improved. In addition, when there are three or more types of operation result display, the player does not know which type of operation result display is hidden, and the desired type of operation result display is hidden. In some cases, the interest of the game may be improved in anticipation of. Alternatively, it may not always be hidden. In this case, the color of the light emission display of the first chance button 165 and the operation result display displayed on the effect image display device 157 are displayed. It is possible that the colors of the frame display will not match, and the player does not know whether it is hidden or not, and this is also the interest of the game in the hope that the operation result display will be hidden. May improve.

FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an example in which an operating means other than the first chance button 165 is operated in the operation effect.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 86A is also a state in which the operation effect is started after the game is completed, and the first chance button 165 displays a light emission display of a third color (for example, red). A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap with the large hall animation. As in the example shown in FIG. 81, the first operation promotion display HD1 here also has a character display LD1 such as pressing the first chance button 165 and a first chance button 165 displaying a light emission display of a third color. It is composed of a first button display 165D representing.

When the start lever 135 is operated instead of the first chance button 165 while the first operation promotion display HD1 is being displayed, the game is started. That is, the three reels 110 to 112 start rotating. Although the hall animation is still displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of FIG. 85 (a), the operation result display such as the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games and the operation result display RD20 for suggestion display is displayed. The display of the type (response display) is not displayed. In addition, since the game has started, another animation (for example, an animation dedicated to the game) may be displayed in place of the hall animation. Further, the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is changed to the light emission display of the fifth color, that is, the default light emission display. The first chance button 165 may be turned off. If you want to proceed with the game without looking at the light emission display or operation result display RD10, RD20 as in the example shown in FIG. 81 or the example shown in FIG. 83, the game is started by operating the start lever 135 in this way. The liver.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 86B is also a state in which the operation effect is started after the game is completed. On the first chance button 165, a light emission display of a third color (for example, red) is displayed. On the other hand, the second chance button 166 is off. A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap with the large hall animation. As in the example shown in FIG. 81, the first operation promotion display HD1 here also has a character display LD1 such as pressing the first chance button 165 and a first chance button 165 displaying a light emission display of a third color. It is composed of a first button display 165D representing.

As shown on the right side of FIG. 86 (b), even when the second chance button 166 in the off state is operated instead of the first chance button 165 while the first operation promotion display HD1 is being displayed. The light emission display of the first chance button 165 that was not operated is changed from the light emission display of the third color to the light emission display of the first color (for example, yellow). On the other hand, the operated second chance button 166 remains in the off state. Further, the effect image display device 157 displays the operation result display RD20 of the suggestion display as the operation result display (response display) displayed in response to the operation of the second chance button 166. In the operation result display RD20 shown on the right side of FIG. 86B, the color of the frame display RD21 is the same first color (for example, yellow) as the color of the light emission display of the first chance button 165. In this example, the second chance button 166 was operated without operating the first chance button 165, but the same result as the example when the first chance button 165 was operated (the example shown in FIG. 83A). It has become. If the second chance button 166 is operated without operating the first chance button 165, the result may be the same as the example shown in FIG. 83 (b) in which the first chance button 165 is operated. The result may be the same as the example shown in the figure (c).

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 86 (c) is also a state in which the operation effect is started after the game is completed, but the first chance button 165 in this state displays a second color (for example, blue) emission display. Has been done. On the other hand, the second chance button 166 displays a light emission display of a fifth color (for example, white). The first chance button 165 may also display the default fifth color (for example, white) emission display, or a color other than the first to fifth colors (sixth). The emission display of the color (for example, green) may be displayed. Alternatively, the first chance button 165 may be turned off. The hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the second operation promotion display HD2 prompting the operation of the second chance button 166 is displayed so as to overlap with the hall animation. The second operation promotion display HD2 here is composed of a character display LD2 such as pressing the second chance button 166 and a second button display 166D representing the second chance button 166 on which the index finger is placed. The second button display 166D is a display including the second chance button 166 displaying the light emission display of the fifth color, and is displayed in the same state as the actual second chance button 166. Before the second operation promotion display HD2 is displayed, the first chance button 165 emits light in a sixth color (for example, green), and it is foretold that the second operation promotion display HD2 is displayed.

When the second chance button 166 is operated while the second operation promotion display HD2 is being displayed, as shown on the right side of FIG. 86 (c), the effect image display device 157 displays the operation result of the second chance button 166. As a result, the operation result display RD20 of the suggestion display is displayed. Also in the operation result display RD20 shown on the right side of FIG. 86 (c), the color of the frame display RD21 is the first color (for example, yellow). In this example, the second chance button 166 after the operation also displays the emission display of the first color which is the same as the color of the frame display RD21, and the operated operation means is that the operation means is operated. The emission display of the same color as the color included in the operation result display (response display) displayed in response is displayed. On the other hand, the first chance button 165 still displays the emission display of the second color (for example, blue), which is different from the color of the emission display of the second chance button 166 after the operation (first color). ing.

As described with reference to FIG. 86B, even if the second chance button 166 is operated while the first operation promotion display HD1 is being displayed, the operation result display is displayed, but the second operation promotion display HD2 is displayed. Even if the first chance button 165 is operated during the display, the display of the operation result display (response display) such as the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT added games and the operation result display RD20 for the suggestion display is not displayed.

When the second chance button 166 is operated, the first chance button 165 may also display the light emission display of the first color.

Further, the second chance button 166 after the operation may remain in the light emission display of the fifth color, may be turned off, or may be in the second color (for example, blue). Etc., it may change to a light emission display of another color.

Further, when the second chance button 166 is configured to display only the light emission of the fifth color, the second chance button 166 after the operation may remain the light emission display of the fifth color. , May be turned off.

Before the operation promotion display such as the first operation promotion display HD1 or the second operation promotion display HD2 is displayed, both the first button display 165D and the second button display 166D are displayed on the display effect image display device 157. It may be foretold that the operation promotion display of either the 1 operation promotion display HD1 or the second operation promotion display HD2 is displayed.

Further, in both the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games and the operation result display RD20 for suggestion display, the colors of the frame displays RD11 and RD21 change, but the color of the entire operation result display changes or the color of the background display. May change, the color of the kimono of the character of the lord may change, the color of the character display and the color of the dialogue display may change. That is, the main color of the operation result display, the most conspicuous color, and the color having the largest display area may be changed to the color of the light emission display in the operation means after the operation.

Further, when the colors are common in the present specification, they do not have to be exactly the same, and there may be a difference in shades, and there are differences due to different types of devices such as a liquid crystal display device and an LED. May be good. Also, if the hues are similar, such as yellow, blue, and red, they are treated as common colors.

In addition, the display effect in the operation means after the operation may be a display effect related to the operation result display RD10, RD20, or may be a display effect matching the colors of the operation result display RD10, RD20. The result display may be a display effect reminiscent of the RD10 and RD20.

Further, it may be a combination of the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT added games and the operation result display suggesting the degree of expectation to shift to the state where the big bonus is given, or the operation for notifying the number of AT added games. Even if it is a combination of the result display RD10, the operation result display RD20 suggesting the expectation degree to shift to the state where the AT state is given, and the operation result display suggesting the expectation degree to shift to the state where the big bonus is given. good.

To summarize what has been described above, the display effect (for example, light emission display) performed by the operation means after the operation of the operation means (for example, the first chance button 165) is the display means (for example, the effect image display device 157). It may be displayed during the display of the effect display (for example, the operation response display). For example, the color displayed in the display effect performed by the operating means is displayed in the effect display performed by the display means.

Further, the display effects (for example, light emission display) performed by the operation means after the operation of the operation means (for example, the first chance button 165) are the first display effect (for example, the light emission display of the first color) and the second. It is selected from a plurality of display effects including a display effect (for example, a second color emission display), and the first display effect is the first effect display A (for example, the effect image display device 157) in the display means (for example, the effect image display device 157). , 50 may be displayed during the display of the operation result display RD10) for notifying the addition of the game, and the second display effect (for example, the light emission display of the second color) is the display means (for example, the effect image display device 157). ), It may be displayed during the display of the first effect display B (for example, the operation result display RD10 for notifying the addition of 100 games). For example, the color displayed in the first display effect is displayed during the display of the first effect display A (for example, the operation result display RD10 for notifying the addition of 50 games), and the color displayed in the second display effect is It is displayed during the display of the first effect display B (for example, the operation result display RD10 for notifying the addition of 100 games).

Alternatively, the first display effect (for example, the light emission display of the first color) is the operation result display RD20 suggesting the second effect display A (for example, an expectation degree of 25%) in the display means (for example, the effect image display device 157). ) May be displayed, and the second display effect (for example, the emission display of the second color) is the second effect display B (for example, expected) in the display means (for example, the effect image display device 157). It may be displayed during the display of the operation result display RD20) suggesting a degree of 50%. That is, the color displayed in the first display effect is displayed during the display of the second effect display A (for example, the operation result display RD20 suggesting an expectation degree of 25%), and the color displayed in the second display effect is , Is displayed during the display of the second effect display (for example, the operation result display RD20 suggesting an expectation degree of 50%).

Further, the third display effect (for example, the emission display of the third color) performed by the operation means (for example, the first chance button 165) is the first display effect (for example, the first color) after the operation of the operation means. The third display effect (for example, the light emission display of the third color) performed by the operating means may change to the second display effect (for example, the light emission display of the second color) after the operation of the operating means. It may change to (emission display).

Further, in the explanation so far, the slot machine 100 has been taken as an example, but the volume level can be selected by operating the first selection switch 190, the power saving mode can be selected, and the operation can be performed. The device of the light emission display after the operation of the means and the relation between the light emission display after the operation of the operation means and the operation result display RD10 and RD20 can be applied to the pachinko machine.

FIG. 87 is a rear view of a pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied, as viewed from the back side.

The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100P has an opening opened upward, and is located at the bottom of the ball tank 150P, which is located below the ball tank 150P for temporarily storing the game ball and the ball tank 150P. A tank rail 154P for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 152P located on the right side of the back surface is arranged.

The payout device 152P is composed of a tubular member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside the payout device 152P. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154P and has flowed down into the payout device 152P is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152P.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100P, and the pachinko machine 100P is configured by this configuration. Pay out the ball to the player.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152P, there is a main board case 158P that houses the main control board 156P that constitutes the main control unit that performs control processing for the entire game, and control processing related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the main control unit. The first sub-board case 162P for accommodating the first sub-control board 160P constituting the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit that performs control processing related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit. A second sub-board case 165P for accommodating the second sub-control board 164P constituting the A payout board case 172P that houses the payout control board 170P, a launch board case 176P that houses the launch control board 174P that constitutes a launch control unit that performs control processing related to launching a game ball, and a power supply that supplies power to various electrical game devices. It houses a power control board 182P that constitutes a control unit and has a power switch 178P that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear switch 180P that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184P and a CR interface unit 186P for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit and the card unit are arranged.

The RWM clear switch 180P is a switch capable of performing RWM clearing (initialization of RAM) by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 100P while operating the machine. When the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on while the RAM clear switch 180P is being operated, a predetermined notification (for example, "Please press again to clear the RAM" is displayed, a sound, or a character display is displayed. And sound), and when the operation is performed again, the RAM may be cleared.

Further, on the upper left of the first sub-board case 162P, the same first selection switch 190P as the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 63A is arranged. Since the first selection switch 190P is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 100P, a person who can unlock the front frame door of the pachinko machine 100P (for example, a clerk of a game store) can use the front frame door. The operation can be performed by opening the door, but a person who cannot unlock the front frame door (for example, a player) cannot perform the operation.

The RWM clear switch 180P is located at the lower left of the back surface, and the first selection switch 190P is located at the upper left of the back surface, but the RWM clear switch 180P is located at a position that is more difficult to operate than the first selection switch 190P (for example, the front frame). It may be placed at a position far from the gap created when the door is opened), or vice versa.

On the front side (player side) of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 87, there is a decorative symbol display device that replaces the effect image display device 157, a first effect button that replaces the first chance button 165, and a second chance button. A second effect button is arranged instead of 166.

According to the above description
"Display means [for example, effect image display device 157] and
The first operating means [for example, the first chance button 165] capable of displaying the light emission display, and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means can display a first operation promotion display [for example, a first operation promotion display HD1] that prompts the operation of the first operation means.
When the first operation means is operated during the display of the first operation promotion display, the display means displays the first operation result [for example, the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games]. It may be displayed,
The first operating means may display a first light emitting display [for example, a first color (yellow) light emitting display] when operated during the display of the first operation promotion display. And
The first emission display is a emission display related to the first operation result display of the first aspect [for example, the frame display RD11 is the first color (yellow) aspect] [for example, a common color system. Display] [for example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 81 (a)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

By looking at the first operating means even after the operation, it may be possible to obtain information according to the operation. Further, in the display means, various images may be displayed at the same time or various display colors may be used at the same time, so that the effect represented by the display screen may be difficult for the player to understand. In some cases, the effect represented by the light emission display is easier for the player to understand. Further, since the first light emission display and the first operation result display are related to each other, a cohesive effect is developed, and in this respect as well, the player can easily understand the effect.

The first operating means may have a built-in light emitting means (for example, LED), or may have a built-in image display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device or a dot matrix display device). There may be. Further, the first operating means may be one in which a display effect is executed instead of the light emission display. For example, an effect in which a certain pattern is displayed may be executed.

again,
"The first operation result display is a display relating to the player's privilege [for example, AT state].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The first operation result display may be a display relating to the amount of privilege granted to the player, a display relating to the granting period of the privilege granted to the player, or a game. It may be an indication regarding the timing of granting the privilege given to the person.

again,
"A second operating means [for example, a second chance button 166] is provided.
When the first operation means [for example, the first chance button 165] displays the first light emission display when the second operation means is operated during the display of the first operation promotion display. [For example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 86 (b)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the first operation means is not covered by the player's hand, the first light emission display becomes easy to see. In addition, the first light emission display may be performed by the operation of the second operating means, which may surprise the player and improve the interest of the game.

The second operating means may be capable of displaying a light emission display. For example, the second operating means may have a built-in light emitting means (for example, LED), or may have a built-in image display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device or a dot matrix display device). There may be.

again,
"A third operating means [for example, start lever 135] is provided.
The first operating means does not display the first light emission display when the third operating means is operated during the display of the first operation promotion display [for example, FIG. 86 (a). State shown on the right side of)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the game can be advanced without seeing the first light emission display.

The third operating means may be one in which the game progresses (for example, the game starts) by being operated.

again,
"In the first operating means, when the first setting [for example, the setting of the power saving mode] is selected, [for example, the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is indicated by" 9 "or" A "in FIG. 63. When it is adjusted to any of "F"], it may shift to the first state [for example, the extinguished state or the dimmed state] corresponding to the first setting.
When the first operation means is operated during the display of the first operation promotion display even if the first setting is selected [for example, in a non-demo state (normal state)], The first light emission display may be displayed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the player can confirm the first light emission display even if the power saving mode is set.

The power consumption of the first operating means may be lower in the state set in the first setting than in the state set in the second setting. That is, the first setting may be a power saving mode, and the second setting may be a normal mode (non-power saving mode).

Further, the first operating means may shift to the first state corresponding to the first setting when the first setting is set. The first state may be a state in which the light is turned off. That is, the light emission display may not be performed.

The display means is a state in which the first setting is set [for example, a demo state in which the power saving mode is set], and a second display related to the second operation means [for example, the first guidance display icon GI1. ] Is displayable [for example, FIG. 74 (h)], and in a state where the first setting is set, the second display is displayed on the display means, and the second operation means is displayed. When the operation is performed, the display means may display a response display to the operation [for example, display of the dividend table shown in FIG. 71 (a)].

again,
"The display means can display the first operation promotion display after the game is completed [for example, after the third stop] [for example, the state shown on the left side of FIG. 81 (a) or the like]. ,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The game console is a slot machine, each of which is provided with a plurality of reels (for example, three reels) that stop rotation by performing a stop operation, and the display means is the first operation promotion display. May be displayable after the stop operation (for example, the third stop operation) of the reel that has rotated to the latest among the plurality of reels is performed.

again,
"In the first emission display, the main emission color is a color common to the display color in the first aspect [for example, the frame display RD11 is the first color (yellow) aspect] [for example, the first emission display. Color (yellow)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to the above description
"Display means [for example, effect image display device 157] and
The first operating means [for example, the first chance button 165] capable of displaying the light emission display, and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means can display a first operation promotion display [for example, a first operation promotion display HD1] that prompts the operation of the first operation means.
When the first operation means is operated during the display of the first operation promotion display, the display means has a second aspect [for example, the frame display RD11 has a second color (blue) aspect]. The first operation result display [for example, the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games] may be displayed.
When the first operation means is operated during the display of the first operation promotion display, the display means of the first aspect [for example, the frame display RD21 is the first color (yellow) aspect]. The second operation result display [for example, the operation result display RD20 of the suggestion display] may be displayed.
The first operating means may display a first light emitting display [for example, a first color (yellow) light emitting display] when operated during the display of the first operation promotion display. And
The first emission display is more related to the second operation result display of the first aspect than the first operation result display of the second aspect [for example, the display color in the second aspect. A color closer to the display color in the first aspect is included].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, the operation result display may be suggested by the light emission display (the first light emission display) of the first operation means after the operation. That is, if the first light emission display is displayed earlier than the operation result display, it can be suggested to the player that the operation result display displayed on the display means is displayed in the first aspect. .. Further, since the first light emission display and the second operation result display of the first aspect are related to each other, a cohesive effect is developed and the player can easily understand the effect.

The first operating means may have a built-in light emitting means (for example, LED), or may have a built-in image display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device or a dot matrix display device). There may be.

Further, the first light emission display may be a light emission display unrelated to the first operation result display of the second aspect. When the first operation means is operated during the display of the first operation promotion display, the second light emission display may be displayed, and the second light emission display is the second aspect. It may be a light emission display related to the first operation result display.

The second operation result display may be the same type of operation result display as the first operation result display, or may be a different type of operation result display.

The second operation result display may be a display suggesting the degree of expectation that the player will be given a privilege. Alternatively, it may be a display of a notice that the privilege will be given to the player. When it is regarded as a notice display in this way, it may be a display showing the reliability of the notice.

again,
"When the first operation means is operated during the display of the first operation promotion display, the display means displays both the operation result of the first operation result display and the operation result display of the second operation result display. May be displayed,
The first operating means may display the first light emission display while both of the operation result displays are displayed on the display means [for example, FIG. 85 (a). State shown on the right],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the player can recognize the operation result display having a high priority by looking at the first operation means.

In the first operation means, the display means displays both the operation result display of the first operation result display of the second aspect and the operation result display of the second operation result display of the first aspect. In this state, the first light emission display may be displayed. Alternatively, the first operating means displays on the display means both the operation result display of the first operation result display of the second aspect and the operation result display of the second operation result display of the first aspect. In this state, the first light emission display may be displayed without fail.

Further, the first operating means may display a third light emitting display while both of the operation result displays are displayed on the display means, and the third light emitting display may display the third light emitting display. The light emission display may be different from the first light emission display and the second light emission display. The third light emission display is, for example, even if the third light emission display is a light emission display related to the first operation result display and also a light emission display related to the second operation result display. good. More specifically, the third emission display may be an alternate emission display of the display color and the common color in the second aspect and the display color and the common color in the first aspect. However, even if a part of the light emitting region is emitted and displayed in the same color as the display color in the second aspect, and the remaining part is emitted and displayed in the same color as the display color in the first aspect. good.

again,
"In the first operation means, the display means is the first of the first operation result display of the second aspect and the second operation result display of the first aspect. While displaying only the second operation result display, the first light emission display may be displayed [for example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 83 (a)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the first operation means, the display means has the second aspect of the display of the first operation result of the second aspect and the second operation result display of the first aspect. While displaying only the first operation result display, the first light emission display may not be displayed.

again,
"The operation result display of both of the above displayed on the display means is a display in which the second operation result display is smaller than the first operation result display.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even if it is difficult to see the high-priority display (the second operation result display) on the display means, the player can see the high-priority operation result display by looking at the first operation means. Can be recognized.

again,
"The first operation means may display the first light emission display when operated during the display of the first operation promotion display [for example, on the right side of FIG. 81 (a). State shown],
The first light emission display is the first operation result display of the first aspect [for example, the frame display RD11 is the first color (yellow) aspect] [for example, the operation result display for notifying the number of AT-added games]. RD10], which is a light emission display [for example, a light emission display including a color common to the display color in the first aspect].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The display color in the first aspect of the first operation result display and the display color in the first aspect of the second operation result display are a common first color [for example, yellow].
The first emission display is a emission display in which the main emission color is the first color.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The first operation result display is a display relating to the player's privilege [for example, AT state].
The second operation result display is a display of a notice that a certain effect [for example, a battle effect that shifts to the AT state when winning] is started.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"A second operating means [for example, a second chance button 166] is provided.
When the first operation means [for example, the first chance button 165] displays the first light emission display when the second operation means is operated during the display of the first operation promotion display. [For example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 86 (b)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"A third operating means [for example, start lever 135] is provided.
The first operating means does not display the first light emission display when the third operating means is operated during the display of the first operation promotion display [for example, FIG. 86 (a). State shown on the right side of)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"In the first operating means, when the first setting [for example, the setting of the power saving mode] is selected, [for example, the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is indicated by" 9 "or" A "in FIG. 63. When it is adjusted to any of "F"], it may shift to the first state corresponding to the first setting [for example, the extinguished state or the dimmed state].
When the first operation means is operated during the display of the first operation promotion display even if the first setting is selected [for example, in a non-demo state (normal state)], The first light emission display may be displayed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The display means can display the first operation promotion display after the game is completed [for example, after the third stop] [for example, the state shown on the left side of FIG. 81 (a) or the like]. ,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to the above description
"Display means [for example, effect image display device 157] and
The first operating means [for example, the first chance button 165] capable of displaying the light emission display, and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means can display a first operation promotion display [for example, a first operation promotion display HD1] that prompts the operation of the first operation means.
The first operation means may display a third light emission display during the display of the first operation promotion display [for example, the state shown on the left side of FIG. 81 (a)].
When the first operation means is operated during the display of the first operation promotion display, the first light emission display may be displayed [for example, shown on the right side of FIG. 81 (a). Status],
When the first operation means is operated during the display of the first operation promotion display, the second light emission display may be displayed [for example, shown on the right side of FIG. 81 (b). Status],
The first emission display is a display including an emission color of the first color [for example, yellow].
The second emission display is a display including an emission color of a second color [for example, blue].
The third emission display is a display including an emission color of a third color [for example, red].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

It is uninteresting if the post-operation state of the operating means is either to continue the light emission display before the operation or to turn it off, but according to this game console, expect the color change after the operation. This may improve the interest of the game.

In the first emission display, the main emission color is the display of the first color, and in the second emission display, the main emission color is the display of the second color. In the third emission display, the main emission color may be a display of a third color.

Further, the display including the emission color of the first color may be a display including the emission color of the second color and the emission color of the third color. Alternatively, even if at least one of the emission color of the second color and the emission color of the third color is included, the display containing the most emission color of the first color or the first emission color. It suffices if the color of is the most prominent display.

The display including the emission color of the second color may be a display including the emission color of the first color and the emission color of the third color. Alternatively, even if at least one of the emission color of the first color and the emission color of the third color is included, the display containing the most emission color of the second color or the second emission color. It suffices if the emission color of the color of is the most conspicuous display.

The display including the emission color of the third color may be a display including the emission color of the first color and the emission color of the second color. Alternatively, even if at least one of the emission color of the first color and the emission color of the second color is included, the display containing the most emission color of the third color or the third emission color. It suffices if the emission color of is the most conspicuous display.

Further, the first operating means may display the third light emitting display when operated during the display of the first operation promotion display.

again,
"The display means can display the first suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation that the player is given a privilege [for example, AT state].
The display means can display a second suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation.
The display means can display a third suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation.
The first suggestion display is a display including the first color [for example, the frame display RD21 is an operation result display RD20 of the first color (yellow)].
The second suggestion display is a display including the second color [for example, the frame display RD21 is an operation result display RD20 of the second color (blue)].
The third suggestion display is a display including the third color [for example, the frame display RD21 is an operation result display RD20 of the third color (red)].
The expectation degree [for example, 25%] suggested by the first suggestion display is different from the expectation degree [for example, 50%] suggested by the second suggestion display.
The expectation degree suggested by the first suggestion display is different from the expectation degree [for example, 75%] suggested by the third suggestion display.
The degree of expectation suggested by the second suggestion display is different from the degree of expectation suggested by the third suggestion display.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the player can recognize the degree of expectation by the color of the light emission display after operating the first operating means.

The first suggestion display corresponds to the first aspect of the second operation result display, and the second suggestion display corresponds to the second aspect of the second operation result display. The third suggestion display may correspond to the third aspect of the second operation result display.

Further, in the first suggestion display, the first color among the included colors is the most conspicuous display, and in the second suggestion display, the second color among the included colors is the most conspicuous. It is the most conspicuous display, and the third suggestion display may be the display in which the third color is the most conspicuous among the included colors. The first suggestion display is a display matched to the first color, the second suggestion display is a display matched to the second color, and the third suggestion display is the third suggestion display. The display may be matched to the three colors. The first suggestion display is a display that makes the image of the first color, the second suggestion display is a display that makes the image of the second color, and the third suggestion display is the display that makes the image of the second color. It may be a display that makes the image of three colors.

again,
"The expectation level [eg, 25%] suggested by the first suggestion display is smaller than the expectation level [eg, 75%] suggested by the third suggestion display.
The expectation [eg, 50%] suggested by the second suggestion is smaller than the expectation [eg, 75%] suggested by the third suggestion.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, the first color is a color suggesting that the expectation degree is smaller than the third color, and the second color has the expectation degree smaller than the third color. It may be a suggestive color.

By performing a light emission display with a low degree of expectation after the operation of the first operation means (by changing from the third light emission display to the first light emission display or the second light emission display), the player is calm. It may be possible to make it.

again,
"When the first operation means is operated during the display of the first operation promotion display, the display means displays the first operation result [for example, the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games]. Is to display
The first emission display is a emission display related to the first operation result display of the first aspect [for example, the frame display RD11 is the first color (yellow) aspect] [for example, a common color system. Display] [for example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 81 (a)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The first operation result display is a display relating to the player's privilege [for example, AT state].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The first operation result display has a second aspect and a third aspect in addition to the first aspect.
The first aspect is an aspect including the first color [for example, an aspect in which the frame display RD11 is the first color (yellow)].
The second aspect is an aspect including the second color [for example, the aspect in which the frame display RD11 is the second color (blue)].
The third aspect is an aspect including the third color [for example, the aspect in which the frame display RD11 is the third color (red)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The mode including the first color may be a mode containing the second color and the third color. Alternatively, even if at least one of the second color and the third color is contained, the aspect in which the first color is contained most or the first color is most conspicuous. Any aspect may be used.

The aspect including the second color may be a case where the first color and the third color are not included. Alternatively, even if at least one of the first color and the third color is contained, the aspect in which the second color is contained most or the second color is most conspicuous. Any aspect may be used.

The aspect including the third color may be a case where the first color and the second color are not included. Alternatively, even if at least one of the first color and the second color is contained, the aspect in which the third color is contained most or the third color is most conspicuous. Any aspect may be used.

again,
"A second operating means [for example, a second chance button 166] is provided.
When the first operation means [for example, the first chance button 165] displays the first light emission display when the second operation means is operated during the display of the first operation promotion display. [For example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 86 (b)],
The first operating means may display the second light emission display when the second operating means is operated during the display of the first operation promotion display.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Even if the first operating means may display the third light emitting display when the second operating means is operated during the display of the first operation promotion display. good.

again,
"A third operating means [for example, start lever 135] is provided.
The first operating means does not display the first light emission display when the third operating means is operated during the display of the first operation promotion display [for example, FIG. 86 (a). State shown on the right side of)],
The first operating means does not display the second light emission display when the third operating means is operated during the display of the first operation promotion display [for example, FIG. 86 (a). State shown on the right side of)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"In the first operating means, when the first setting [for example, the setting of the power saving mode] is selected, [for example, the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is indicated by" 9 "or" A "in FIG. 63. When it is adjusted to any of "F"], it may shift to the first state [for example, the extinguished state or the dimmed state] corresponding to the first setting.
When the first operation means is operated during the display of the first operation promotion display even if the first setting is selected [for example, in a non-demo state (normal state)], The first light emission display may be displayed, and the first light emission display may be displayed.
When the first operation means is operated during the display of the first operation promotion display even if the first setting is selected [for example, in a non-demo state (normal state)], The second light emission display may be displayed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The display means can display the first operation promotion display after the game is completed [for example, after the third stop] [for example, the state shown on the left side of FIG. 81 (a) or the like]. ,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to the above description
"The first device [for example, the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, the backlight module 740] and
A second device [for example, an effect image display device 157],
The first setting [for example, power saving mode setting] can be selected according to the operation [for example, the indicator 190b is set to one of "9" or "A" to "F" shown in FIG. 63 (a). When], the operation means for selection [for example, the first selection switch 190] and
It is a game table equipped with
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first device shifts to a first state [for example, a light-off state or a dimmed state] corresponding to the first setting. Is something that may happen
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the second device is in a second state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a state in which a demo animation is played in a dark state. ], And it may shift to
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the second device moves after the first device shifts to the first state [for example, FIG. 74 (d)]. The transition to the second state may occur [for example, FIG. 74 (g) to FIG. 74 (h)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game console, it may be easy to confirm that the first device has transitioned to the first state and that the second device has transitioned to the second state. That is, since there is a time lag, it may be possible to confirm the first state of the first device and then confirm the second state of the second device.

again,
"Even if the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first device does not shift to the first state unless it is in a certain state [for example, a demo state]. ,
Even if the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the second device does not shift to the second state unless it is in a certain state [for example, a demo state]. ,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The above-mentioned certain state means a state in which a demonstration effect is being performed (demo state).

again,
"The selection operation means can select a second setting [for example, a setting of a non-power saving mode (normal mode)] according to the operation [for example," 0 "in the indicator unit 190b shown in FIG. 63 (a). -When matching with any of "8"]
The first device consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting.
The second device consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the first setting is a power saving setting, while the second setting is a non-power saving setting (normal setting).

again,
"The number of the first devices [eg, 6] is greater than the number of the second devices [eg, 1].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the first device having a large number can be preferentially shifted to the first state, and the power consumption can be suppressed.

again,
"The power consumption of the first device [for example, 0] in the first state is smaller than the power consumption of the second device in the second state.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the first device has a higher power saving effect than the second device.

The power consumption of the first device while executing a certain effect may be larger than the power consumption of the second device performing the certain effect. It is possible to reduce the power consumption by giving priority to the first device having a large power consumption and shifting to the first state.

again,
"The selection operation means is provided at a position where the player cannot operate [for example, the inside of the main body 101 or the back side of the game table].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"A first control means for controlling the first device [for example, a first sub-control unit 400] and
A second control means [for example, VDP516] that controls the second device, and
Equipped with
The first control means transmits the first signal relating to the first setting.
The first device receives the first signal from the first control means without going through the second control means.
The second device receives the first signal via the second control means.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

A main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a sub-control means for receiving a command transmitted from the main control means and performing control based on the command are provided, and the sub-control means is the first. It may have the control means of the above and the second control means. Further, the sub-control means may be a means for controlling the effect.

again,
"The time required for the second device to transition from a state different from the second state to the second state [for example, FIGS. 74 (g) to 74 (h)] is the first state. It is longer than the time required for the device to transition from a state different from the first state to the first state [for example, FIG. 74 (d)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The first device is a first effect means [for example, a first light emitting means, a first display means].
The second device is a second effect means [for example, a second light emitting means, a second display means].
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the second effect means shifts to the second state after the first effect means shifts to the first state. May do,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The game console is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 58].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 78].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

note that,
"A game table including a first notification means, a second notification means, and an operation means capable of setting a first effect setting, wherein the operation means is operated to set the first effect. When is set, the first notification means becomes the notification mode corresponding to the first effect setting, and then the second notification means becomes the notification mode corresponding to the first effect setting. A game table featuring. "
Was also explained.

again,
"The operating means is a means capable of setting a second effect setting by being operated, and the first effect setting is a setting in which the power consumption of the notification means is suppressed as compared with the second effect setting. A game table characterized by being. "
Was also explained.

again,
"A game table characterized in that the number of the first notification means is larger than the number of the second notification means."
Was also explained.

again,
"A game table characterized in that the power consumption of the first notifying means that is notifying a certain notification is larger than the power consumption of the second notifying means that is notifying the certain notification."
Was also explained.

again,
"The operating means is a game table characterized in that the operating means is a means that the player cannot operate."
Was also explained.

again,
"The first control means and the second control means are provided, and the first notification means transmits a signal relating to the first effect setting from the first control means via the second control means. The second notification means receives the signal from the first control means regarding the first effect setting via the second control means. A featured game table. "
Was also explained.

again,
"The time required from the notification mode not corresponding to the first effect setting to the notification mode corresponding to the first effect setting is longer for the second notification means than for the first notification means. A game table characterized by being long. "
Was also explained.

According to the above description
"Display means [for example, effect image display device 157] and
A selection operation means [for example, the first selection switch 190] capable of selecting the first setting [for example, the setting of the power saving mode] according to the operation, and
It is a game table equipped with
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected [for example, when the indicator 190b is adjusted to any of "9" or "A" to "F" shown in FIG. 63 (a). ], The display means may start displaying the first animation [for example, a demo animation] from the beginning [for example, FIG. 74 (d)],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, it becomes easy to check the first animation from the beginning.

again,
"The display means is the first when the selection operation means is operated during the display of the first animation [for example, the switch operation (3) shown in FIG. 74] and the first setting is selected. The display of the animation of is restarted from the beginning [for example, FIG. 74 (d)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The first animation may be a demo animation. The demo animation is an animation in which display is started on the display means after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in a state where the game is not restarted after the end of one game. In other words, the demo animation starts when the time when no operation by the player is performed while the second animation (non-demo animation) is displayed reaches a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). It is an animation to be done.

again,
"In the display means, the selection operation means is operated while the second animation [for example, the non-demo animation shown in FIG. 72] is being displayed [for example, the switch operation (3) shown in FIG. 72]. Even if the setting is selected, the display of the first animation is not started from the beginning [for example, the example shown in FIG. 73].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"In the display means, even if the selection operation means is operated during the display of the second animation [for example, the switch operation (3) shown in FIG. 72] and the first setting is selected, the second setting is selected. The display of the animation is continued [for example, FIG. 72 (d)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The second animation may be an animation that is not displayed in the certain state (for example, a demo state).

again,
"When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected while the first animation is being displayed, the display means displays the first animation that has started to be displayed from the beginning. Displayed in a display mode [for example, a darkened display mode] corresponding to the setting of [for example, FIGS. 74 (g) to 74 (h)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"For example, the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, the backlight module 740] are provided.
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the effect means shifts to a first state [for example, a light-off state or a dimmed state] corresponding to the first setting. There is,
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the display means changes to a second state [for example, a state in which the demo animation is played in a dark state] corresponding to the first setting. It may be migrated,
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the display means is the second display after the effect means shifts to the first state [for example, FIG. 74 (d)]. There is a case where the state shifts to [for example, FIG. 74 (g) to FIG. 74 (h)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The effect means may be a light emitting means. Further, the first state may mean a state in which the effect means executes an effect corresponding to the first setting. Further, the second state means a state in which the first animation is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the first setting.

again,
"The effect means is the first state unless the first animation is displayed [for example, a demo state] even if the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected. Does not move to
Even if the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the display means is in the second state unless the first animation is displayed [for example, a demo state]. It does not migrate,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The selection operation means can select a second setting [for example, a setting of a non-power saving mode (normal mode)] according to the operation [for example," 0 "in the indicator unit 190b shown in FIG. 63 (a). -When matching with any of "8"]
The effect means that the power consumption is suppressed when the first setting is set as compared with the case where the second setting is set.
The display means that is set to the first setting has lower power consumption than that set to the second setting.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the first setting is a power saving setting, while the second setting is a non-power saving setting (normal setting).

again,
"The number of the effect means [for example, 6] is larger than the number of the display means [for example, 1].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to give priority to the production means having a large number and shift to the first state, and to suppress power consumption.

again,
"The power consumption of the effect means [for example, 0] in the first state is smaller than the power consumption of the display means in the second state.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the effect of the effect is higher than that of the display means.

The power consumption of the effect means that is executing a certain effect may be larger than the power consumption of the display means that is executing the effect. It is possible to reduce the power consumption by giving priority to the effect means having a large power consumption and shifting to the first state.

again,
"The selection operation means is provided at a position where the player cannot operate [for example, the inside of the main body 101 or the back side of the game table].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"A first control means for controlling the effect means [for example, a first sub-control unit 400] and
A second control means [for example, VDP516] that controls the display means, and
Equipped with
The first control means transmits the first signal relating to the first setting.
The effect means receives the first signal from the first control means without going through the second control means.
The display means receives the first signal via the second control means.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

A main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a sub-control means for receiving a command transmitted from the main control means and performing control based on the command are provided, and the sub-control means is the first. It may have the control means of the above and the second control means. Further, the sub-control means may be a means for controlling the effect.

again,
"The time required for the display means to shift from a state different from the second state to the second state [for example, FIGS. 74 (g) to 74 (h)] is such that the effect means is the first. It is longer than the time required to transition from a state different from one state to the first state [for example, FIG. 74 (d)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The game console is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 58].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 78].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to the above description
"The first light emitting means [for example, the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, the backlight module 740] and
A second light emitting means [for example, a second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166] and
The first setting [for example, power saving mode setting] can be selected according to the operation [for example, the indicator 190b is set to one of "9" or "A" to "F" shown in FIG. 63 (a). When], the operation means for selection [for example, the first selection switch 190] and
It is a game table equipped with
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first light emitting means shifts to a state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a light-off state or a dimming state]. [For example, FIG. 74 (d)],
Even if the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the second light emitting means does not shift to a state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a light-off state or a dimmed state]. [For example, in FIG. 74 (d), it remains lit in white],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, the difference between the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means is recognized by simultaneously recognizing the transition to the state corresponding to the first setting and the non-transition. It may be easier.

again,
"The first operating means [for example, the first chance button 165] and
A second operating means [for example, a second chance button 166],
Equipped with
The first operating means has the first light emitting means [for example, a first effect lamp].
The second operating means has the second light emitting means [for example, a second effect lamp].
The selection operation means can select a second setting [for example, a non-power saving mode (normal mode) setting] according to the operation [for example, the indicator 190b is shown in FIG. 63 (a) from "0" to "0". When matched to any of "8"]
The first setting is a setting that suppresses the power consumption of the first light emitting means as compared with the second setting.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The player can easily recognize that the first operating means can be operated by turning on or blinking the first light emitting means. Further, the player can easily recognize that the second operating means can be operated by turning on or blinking the second light emitting means. Further, the first setting is a power saving setting, and the second operating means having the second light emitting means that does not shift to the state corresponding to this setting is operated even if the first setting is set. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is possible. Further, as a result, the load applied to the first operating means can be reduced.

again,
"Display means [for example, effect image display device 157] is provided.
The display means can display a second display [for example, the first guidance display icon GI1] relating to the second operation means in a state where the first setting is set [for example, FIG. 74]. (B)-Fig. (D) and Fig. (H)],
When the second display is displayed on the display means and the operation of the second operation means is performed with the first setting set, the display means displays a response to the operation [for example, The dividend table shown in FIG. 71 (a)] is displayed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The second display may be an operation promotion display that promotes the operation of the second operation means, or may be an operation promotion display that suggests the operation of the second operation means. , The display may be such that the second operating means is displayed. For example, the first guidance display icon GI1 corresponds to this second display as an example.

again,
"When the second display is displayed on the display means and the operation of the first operation means is performed with the first setting set, the display means displays a response to the operation [for example," , Setting suggestion display shown in FIG. 71 (b)] may be displayed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the player may be surprised by displaying the response by operating the operation means that seems to be invalid.

The state in which the first setting is set may be a demo state. That is, the power saving setting is set in the demo state. The state in which the response display may be displayed on the display means may be a non-demo state (normal state) shifted from the demo state. That is, when the operation of the first operating means is performed, the demo state shifts to the non-demo state (normal state), and even if the operation of the first operating means is performed instead of the second operating means. The response display may be performed as an effect, or the first operation means may be a hidden operation means and the game information may be displayed as the response display.

Further, the response display for the operation of the first operating means performed by displaying the second display may be the same display as the response display for the operation of the second operating means, or may be displayed differently. There may be.

again,
When the operation of the first operating means is performed in the state where the first setting is set [for example, whether the second display is displayed or not], the display means A response display to the operation [for example, a setting suggestion display shown in FIG. 71 (b)] may be displayed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the player may be surprised by displaying the response by operating the operation means that seems to be invalid.

Here, the display means may or may not display the second display. The response display to the operation of the first operating means performed by hiding the second display may be the same display as the response display to the operation of the second operating means, or may be a different display. May be good.

again,
"If the operation of the first operating means is performed with the first setting set, the display means may not display the response display to the operation.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The display means may shift to a state corresponding to the first setting when the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected.
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the state in which the first light emitting means corresponds to the first setting (hereinafter, referred to as "first state") [for example, After shifting to the [off state or dimmed state] [for example, FIG. 74 (d)], the display means corresponds to the first setting (hereinafter referred to as “second state”) [for example, demo. There is a case of shifting to [a state in which the animation is played in a dark state] [for example, FIG. 74 (g) to FIG. 74 (h)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"Even if the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first light emitting means is in a state corresponding to the first setting unless it is in a certain state [for example, a demo state]. It does not migrate,
Even if the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the display means does not shift to the state corresponding to the first setting unless it is in a certain state [for example, a demo state]. Is,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, a certain state means a state in which a demonstration effect is being performed (demo state).

again,
"In the first light emitting means, the power consumption is suppressed when the first setting is set as compared with the case where the second setting is set.
The display means that is set to the first setting has lower power consumption than that set to the second setting.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the first setting is a power saving setting, while the second setting is a non-power saving setting (normal setting).

again,
"The number of the first light emitting means [for example, 6] is larger than the number of the display means [for example, 1].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the first light emitting means having a large number can be preferentially shifted to the first state, and the power consumption can be suppressed.

again,
"The power consumption of the first light emitting means in the first state [for example, 0] is smaller than the power consumption of the display means in the second state.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the first light emitting means has a higher power saving effect than the display means.

The power consumption of the first light emitting means while executing a certain effect may be larger than the power consumption of the display means performing the certain effect. It is possible to reduce the power consumption by giving priority to the first light emitting means having a large power consumption and shifting to the first state.

again,
"A first control means for controlling the first light emitting means [for example, a first sub-control unit 400] and
A second control means [for example, VDP516] that controls the display means, and
Equipped with
The first control means transmits the first signal relating to the first setting.
The first light emitting means receives the first signal from the first control means without going through the second control means.
The display means receives the first signal via the second control means.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

A main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a sub-control means for receiving a command transmitted from the main control means and performing control based on the command are provided, and the sub-control means is the first. It may have the control means of the above and the second control means. Further, the sub-control means may be a means for controlling the effect.

again,
"The time required for the display means to shift from a state different from the second state to the second state [for example, FIGS. 74 (g) to 74 (h)] is the first light emitting means. Is longer than the time required to transition from a state different from the first state to the first state [for example, FIG. 74 (d)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The selection operation means is provided at a position where the player cannot operate [for example, the inside of the main body 101 or the back side of the game table].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The game console is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 58].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 78].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The identification prefixes such as "first-", "second-", "third-", etc. described above may be replaced as appropriate. For example, "second-" may be replaced with "first-".

It should be noted that the actions and effects described in the embodiments described so far are merely a list of the most suitable actions and effects, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are limited to those described here. is not it. Further, even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, the appendices, etc. described above, the constituent requirement may be the other embodiment or the embodiment. It may be applied to a modified example, various examples, an appendix, and the like. That is, unless there is a factor that hinders the application, the constituent requirements included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modification, the various examples, the appendices, etc. are applied to other embodiments, examples, and modifications. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples, appendices, etc., it holds as one cohesive technical idea.

The game console according to the present invention may be applied to a game console typified by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a spinning machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine. can.

100 Slot machine 110-112 Reel 113 Design display window 130-132 Bet button 135 Start lever 137-139 Stop button 157 Liquid crystal display device

Claims (12)

An operation means that can change the production mode by the operation of the player,
The first symbol display means capable of displaying the variable display of the first symbol,
It is a game table equipped with
When the operating means is operated in the first state, it may be accepted as an operation for changing the effect mode.
When the operation means is operated in the second state, it is not accepted as the change operation of the effect mode.
The first state is a state in which at least the variation display of the first symbol is displayed.
The second state is a state in which at least the variation display of the first symbol is displayed.
The first state is different from the second state,
A game table featuring that. The game console according to claim 1.
In the first state, a part of the variation display of the first symbol is displayed, and in the second state, another part of the variation display is displayed.
A game table featuring that. The game console according to claim 1 or 2.
When there is a power failure and power recovery during the display of the variation display of the first symbol, the state from the start of the display to the power failure is the first state, and the power recovery is performed. The state from to the end of the display of the variation display is the second state.
A game table featuring that. The game console according to claim 3.
If the operation means is operated during the display of the variation display of the first symbol displayed after the display of the variation display after the power is restored, it may be accepted as an operation for changing the effect mode. ,
A game table featuring that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 4.
Equipped with display means
The display means is a means capable of displaying the effect mode display corresponding to the effect mode.
There is a case where the effect mode display is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as "first case") in at least a part of the display period of the variable display of the first symbol.
In some of the display periods of the variable display of the first symbol, the effect mode display may not be displayed (hereinafter, referred to as "second case").
When the operating means is operated in the second case, it may be accepted as an operation for changing the effect mode.
A game table featuring that. The game console according to claim 5.
In the first case, when the operating means is operated, it may be displayed that the display mode of the effect mode display is changed.
In the second case, when the operation means is operated, it is not displayed that the display mode of the effect mode display is changed, and the effect mode display displayed after the operation of the operation means is the operation. It may be a reflected display mode,
A game table featuring that. The game console according to claim 5 or 6.
The display means is a means capable of displaying an operation display corresponding to the operation means.
The operation display may be displayed during at least a part of the display period of the variable display of the first symbol.
In some of the display periods of the variable display of the first symbol, the operation display may not be displayed (hereinafter referred to as "third case").
When the operating means is operated in the third case, it may be accepted as an operation for changing the effect mode.
A game table featuring that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 7.
If the operation means is operated while the stop display of the first symbol is displayed, it is not accepted as the change operation of the effect mode.
A game table featuring that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 8.
In the third state, if the operation means is operated while the stop display of the first symbol is displayed, it is not accepted as the change operation of the effect mode.
If the operating means is operated while the stop display of the first symbol is being displayed in a fourth state different from the third state, it may be accepted as an operation for changing the effect mode.
A game table featuring that. The game console according to claim 9.
A second symbol display means capable of displaying a variable display of the second symbol in the fourth state is provided.
A game table featuring that. The game console according to claim 10.
Equipped with a decorative pattern display means that can display variable display of decorative patterns,
The decorative symbol display means is a means capable of displaying the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the variable display of the first symbol in the third state.
The decorative symbol display means is a means capable of displaying the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the variable display of the second symbol in the fourth state.
A game table featuring that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 11.
If the operating means is operated during the jackpot game state, it may be accepted as a change operation of the effect mode.
If the operating means is operated during the remaining period of the jackpot gaming state after the power failure and power recovery occur during the jackpot gaming state, it may be accepted as an operation for changing the effect mode.
A game table featuring that.

Images